London Economic Development Sustainability Appraisal

London Development Agency Sustainability Appraisal of Mayor's Revised Economic Development Strategy
Sustainability Appraisal Report October 2009
Creating the environment for business
Copyright and Non-Disclosure Notice

The contents and layout of this report are subject to copyright owned by Entec ( Entec UK Limited 2009) save to the extent that copyright has been legally assigned by us to another party or is used by Entec under licence. To the extent that we own the copyright in this report, it may not be copied or used without our prior written agreement for any purpose other than the purpose indicated in this report. The methodology (if any) contained in this report is provided to you in confidence and must not be disclosed or copied to third parties without the prior written agreement of Entec. Disclosure of that information may constitute an actionable breach of confidence or may otherwise prejudice our commercial interests. Any third party who obtains access to this report by any means will, in any event, be subject to the Third Party Disclaimer set out below.
Third-Party Disclaimer
Any disclosure of this report to a third-party is subject to this disclaimer. The report was prepared by Entec at the instruction of, and for use by, our client named on the front of the report. It does not in any way constitute advice to any third-party who is able to access it by any means. Entec excludes to the fullest extent lawfully permitted all liability whatsoever for any loss or damage howsoever arising from reliance on the contents of this report. We do not however exclude our liability (if any) for personal injury or death resulting from our negligence, for fraud or any other matter in relation to which we cannot legally exclude liability.
Document Revisions
No.
1 2
Details
Draft Report Final Report
Date
October 09 October 09
Page ii
Doc Reg No. CA001v2R261009
Entec UK Limited October 2009
Non-Technical Summary
This section sets out the Non-Technical Summary of the Sustainability Appraisal (SA) Report produced as part of the appraisal undertaken to inform the revised Economic Development Strategy (EDS) for London. The following sections explain what the revised EDS is, provide an outline of its content and describe the relationship of the SA with the EDS. An outline of the SA process and the role of the SA Report in this process are described together with the findings and recommendations arising from the SA. For more information on this public consultation and how to give us your views, please see the final page in this section.
What is the Economic Development Strategy?

The Economic Development Strategy (EDS) is one of the Mayoral strategies which is required under the Greater London Authority Act 1999 (GLA Act) and the Regional Development Act 1998 (RDA Act). The LDA is responsible for preparing a draft for publication on behalf of the Mayor. The EDS sets out a strategic direction, clear medium term priorities and proposals for interventions and proposed strategic partnerships that will collectively support sustainable economic growth for London. Section 7A(4) of the RDA Act, as amended by the GLA Act, requires that the LDA keep the revised London EDS under review, and empowers it to submit proposed revisions to the Mayor. The last revision of the EDS was published in January 2005. There is now a need to revise the EDS to reflect a number of changes including: a new Mayoral administration; a very different economic climate; an increased emphasis on climate change; the progress towards the Olympic and Paralympic Games; and Crossrail. The Mayors Spatial Development Strategy The London Plan and the Mayors Transport Strategy are also being revised so there is a significant opportunity to fully align these three strategies. The draft revised EDS sets out the following vision for London: Over the years to 2031, and beyond, London should excel among global cities, expanding opportunities for all its people and enterprises, achieving the highest environmental standards and quality of life and leading the world in its approach to tackling the urban challenges of the 21st century, particularly that of climate change.
Page iv
Achieving this vision will mean making sure London makes the most of the benefits of the energy, dynamism and diversity that characterise the city and its people; embraces change while promoting its heritage, neighbourhoods and identity; and values responsibility, compassion and citizenship. The chosen strategy seeks to enable the London economys strengths to flourish and address weaknesses. As a result, the revised EDS proposes five economic objectives: Objective 1: to promote London as a city that excels as a world capital of business; Objective 2: to ensure that London has the most competitive business environment in the world; Objective 3: to drive Londons transition to a low carbon economy and to maximise the economic opportunities this will create; Objective 4: to give all Londoners the opportunity to take part in Londons economic success, access sustainable employment and progress in their careers; and Objective 5: to maximise the benefits to London from investment to support growth and regeneration and from the 2012 Olympic and Paralympic Games and its legacy. These objectives have then been reflected in separate chapters of the draft EDS which also contain specific proposals on how the objective will be realised. These themes have been adopted into the structure of the SA to provide a logical frame of reference between the SA and the emerging EDS.
What is a Sustainability Appraisal?

The sustainability appraisal of the EDS has been undertaken in a manner that incorporates the requirements of the European Unions Strategic Environmental Assessment (SEA) Directive (2001/42/EU) and the transposing UK Regulations1. This sustainability appraisal (incorporating the requirements of the SEA Directive (see box)) will be referred to, hereafter, as an SA.
The objective of the European Union Directive 2001/42/EC on the assessment of the effects of certain plans and programmes on the environment (the SEA Directive) is to provide for a high level of protection of the environment and to contribute to the integration of environmental considerations into the preparation and adoption of plans and programs with a view to promoting sustainable development, by ensuring that an environmental assessment is carried out of certain plans and programs which are likely to have significant effects on the environment
In addition to the environmental effects required by the SEA Directive, the aim of the SA is to identify, describe and evaluate the likely social and economic effects of implementing the EDS. Where the SA identifies likely significant adverse effects, it should also detail proposals on how to avoid, manage or mitigate these effects.
European Union Directive 2001/42/EC (known as the SEA Directive) was transposed into UK legislation on the 20th July 2004 as Statutory Instrument No. 1633 The Environmental Assessment of Plans and Programmes Regulations 2004.
Page v
Where positive effects are identified, measures to enhance them may also be proposed. An overview of the key stages of the SA process is presented below:
Figure NTS.1 Overview of the Sustainability Appraisal Process
Appraisal Process
Stage A: Scoping Setting the context, establishing the baseline and deciding the scope of the appraisal Stage B: Appraisal Developing and refining the strategic options for the EDS and appraising the effects
Key Outputs
Development of the revised Economic Development Strategy
Scoping Report (August 2009)
Stage C: Reporting Preparing the Sustainability Appraisal Report
Sustainability Appraisal Report (October 2009)
Stage D: Consultation Consulting on the draft revised EDS and SA Reports
Stage E: Monitoring Monitoring of significant effects from the implementation of the EDS
Post Adoption Statements (Early 2010)
Figure NTS.1 sets out the 5 stages (A to E) of the SA process (as outlined in Government guidance2). The Scoping Report (that reflected the completion of Stage A) was consulted on by statutory consultees in August and
ODPM (2005) Sustainability Appraisal of Regional Spatial Strategies and Local Development Documents
Page vi
September. A summary of the results of this consultation are included in the SA Report and the consultees responses have been considered both in the SA and also within the EDS.
What Approach was Taken to the Appraisal?

The appraisal of the EDS for London has been undertaken using an objectives-led approach. The work undertaken at scoping (the review of the baseline information, the review of plans and programmes and the identification of key issues) has been used to develop 16 SA objectives that cover the key sustainability topics for London. These objectives reflect the following themes:
1. Regeneration and land-use 2. Biodiversity 3. Health and well-being 4. Equalities 5. Housing 6. Employment 7. Stable economy 8. Flood risk and climate change adaptation 9. Climate change mitigation and energy 10. Water quality and water resources 11. Waste 12. Accessibility and mobility 13. Built and historic environment 14. Liveability and place 15. Open space 16. Air quality
Each objective is supported by a series of guide questions. The SA objectives cover all of the topics that the appraisal is required to include information on (as set out in the SEA Directive). In addition, the ODPM guidance indicates that the SA process should also cover social and economic issues such as economy, society, education, skills, transport, equality and diversity. This also reflects the requirement of the Government Office for London Circular 1/2008 (Section 2.7) to have regard to: the effect on the health and health inequality of persons in Greater London; the effect on climate change, and the consequences of climate change; and the achievement of sustainable development in the United Kingdom The SA identifies and appraises those effects arising from the major themes identified in the EDS and the proposals identified to address those themes. Specifically, the SA considers the extent to which the EDS proposals contribute towards achieving the SA objective (e.g. Biodiversity) when considered against the baseline set by the existing EDS. The guide questions have been used to assist the appraisal of the potential effects in a qualitative manner, ensuring consideration is given to relevant influencing factors. The direct, indirect and cumulative effects of each theme have been considered. The EDS is a strategic document for Londons growth and economic development, and as such, makes reference to geographic locations for development and investment, for example in specific areas such as the Central Activity Zone, Inner London, Outer London etc. The more specific proposals in the EDS are with respect to geographic area, the more precise the appraisal process can be in terms of identifying spatial effects. Any such location specific
Page vii
effects within Greater London (for example increased employment for a local community from a regeneration schemes in the Thames Gateway) have been identified and referenced in the appraisal where appropriate. Consideration has also been given, where relevant, to wider areas of effect that extend beyond the boundary of Greater London and across the UK.
Scoping Consultation
Consultation was undertaken on the Scoping Report for a 5 week period from 8th August to 12th September 2009. A number of organisations were invited to comment including the statutory consultees under the SEA Regulations. Four responses were received from the Environment Agency, Natural England and English Heritage as well as from the GLA Sustainable Development Policy team. In addition, the responses received from the consultation on the Scoping Report for the Integrated Impact Assessment (IIA) of the London Plan were also taken into account. Organisations were given the option not to comment on the Scoping Report for the EDS if they had already commented on the IIA for the London Plan and felt their comments sufficiently addressed any issues in the SA of the EDS scoping report.
What Alternatives for Implementing the EDS were Identified?

The SEA Directive states that the Environmental Report should consider reasonable alternatives taking into account the objectives and the geographical scope of the plan or programme and give an outline of the reasons for selecting the alternatives dealt with (Article 5.1 and Annex 1(h)). However, it is the role of decision makers and not the sustainability appraisal to decide which alternative should be chosen. The SA provides information on the relative sustainability performance of the alternatives to inform the decision. A number of potential broad policy proposals are set out in the draft revised EDS. These reflect work that has considered a number of spatial development options along with consideration of different paths to sustainable economic growth. The draft revised EDS states that the Mayor has explored alternative assumptions about where economic development might go, for example through the Outer London Commission, and concluded that a strategy of strengthening and widening growth, particularly in outer London, is desirable, but that it is equally essential to consolidate the unique strengths of central London. The responses to Rising to the Challenge (the earlier Assembly and Functional Bodies consultation draft of this Economic Development Strategy) overwhelmingly endorsed the Mayors proposed strategic approach. In this appraisal and given the context of the existing London economy, the scope of alternatives may be limited to providing differing priorities between a range of proposals to meet the draft revised EDS objectives. Recognising the priority that could be given to climate change from the Stern Review and the Governments Low Carbon Transition Plan, and reflected in the draft revised EDS Objective 3, to drive Londons transition to a low carbon economy, there could be are a number of alternative responses that could effect such a transition at different rates. These are:
Page viii
Option 1 A Transition to Low Carbon Economy (LCE) Strategy This potential option is considered to include a significant focus on proposals that seek to help address climate change. Conceptually this option would concentrate on the types of proposals within Chapter 3 (Transforming to a low carbon economy) of the draft revised EDS with a potential substitution of some of the proposals with significantly different aims. An example might include business support to sectors that can have the greatest effect on the reduction of Londons Carbon Footprint. This might also include a greater transfer of effort towards facilitating domestic and commercial energy efficiency and supporting sectors; Option 2 Economic Strategy with significant LCE proposals This option reflects the current balance of proposals within the draft revised EDS. It is similar to Option 1 as it recognises that the low carbon economy should be a significant part of Londons EDS yet it maintains a greater balance of proposals that include support to of wider economic and social objectives; and Option 3 Continuation of policies and proposals within existing EDS This option includes a continuation of proposals within the existing EDS which does not explicitly recognise the low carbon economy as a key objective. An appraisal of the likely high level (strategic) effects of these reasonable alternatives (Option 1, 2 and 3) against the sustainability themes (environmental, economic, and social), which cover the sixteen SA objectives is presented.
Table NTS 2: Sustainability Theme

Environmental Objectives
Appraisal of Options Option 1: A Transition to Low Carbon Economy (LCE) Strategy

By basing the revised EDS on LCE objectives, it is considered likely that the Strategy will be significantly aligned with the environmental objectives, especially those relating to climate change adaptation and mitigation. The scale of long-term effects might be greater in this Option compared with the other options (Option 1 and 2) if it is assumed that more resources will be focussed on LCE objectives.
Option 2: Economic Strategy with significant LCE proposals

The revised EDS includes a number of similar themes to the existing EDS although it includes a new group of proposals to promote the development of a low carbon economy which are expected to have significant long-term effects on some of the environmental objectives. The effects (and contribution) of this option are not assessed to be as high as those from Option 1 but greater than Option 3.
Option 3: Continuation of policies and proposals within existing EDS

The exiting EDS focussed on four objectives; places and infrastructure, people, enterprise, marketing and promoting London. This included the commitment to consider whether proposals were sustainable, yet did not include as significant proposals to mitigate and address the effects of climate change. This is assessed to have the least contribution compared with Options 1 and 2.
Page ix
Sustainability Theme
Economic Objectives
Option 1: A Transition to Low Carbon Economy (LCE) Strategy

The LCE objectives do support the growth of sectors that will be important to London with commensurate benefits. However, If it is assumed that the focus on low carbon sectors reduces some support to some other higher value added, more resource intensive sectors, this may overlook potential opportunities to create wealth (with associated knock-on benefits) and fail to realise Londons economic potential. Tackling climate change is important to the long-term social welfare of London and, as the Stern Report recognised, there are potential longer term economic benefits where investment in mitigation and adaptation occurs early. However, a revised EDS needs to include a balance of proposals to tackle a range of social issues.

The revised EDS includes a number of similar themes to the existing EDS although these have been revised to take into account the changing roles and the effect of current global economic situation. This Option (2) is expected to have the greatest contribution to economic objective over the short to long-term compared with alternatives (Option 1 and 3).

The existing EDS includes a wide range of proposals that are expected to strongly contribute to economic objectives. However, as the baseline has changed - the UK is in a period of recession and the future roles of different agencies likely to be involved has changed, it is less likely that the proposals would deliver significant benefits without significant revision. This Option (3) therefore is not expected to contribute to the economic objectives as well as Options 1 and 2. The existing EDS includes a wide range of proposals that are expected to strongly contribute to social objectives. However, as the baseline has changed - the UK is in a period of recession and the future roles of different agencies likely to be involved has changed; it is less likely that the proposals would deliver significant benefits without significant revision. This Option (3) therefore is not expected to contribute to the social objectives as well as Options 1 and 2.
Social Objectives
The revised EDS includes a number of similar themes to the existing EDS although these have been revised to take into account the changing roles and the effect of current global economic situation as well as anticipated social issues. This Option (2) is expected to have the greatest contribution to social objectives over the short to long-term compared with alternatives (Option 1 and 3).
The preferred option was Option 2; a revised EDS which includes significant proposals to address the low carbon economy yet retains a wider balance of economic proposals. The Mayor has concluded that the approach of encouraging consolidation of strength in business service and finance, together with some diversification into other growth sectors will be the most effective.
What were the Key Significant Effects?

Proposal Development and Iterations
The development of the draft replacement EDS has been an iterative process involving technical experts advising on the potential effects that may arise and proposing suggestions to improve the early drafts of the policies and liaising with the EDS team at the LDA/GLA. Table NTS 2 records the suggestions made and the responses following their consideration by the EDS authors during the drafting of the replacement plan. Changes suggested included policy amendments and clarification of policies and supporting text. For example it was recommended that reference to social care be included in proposal 2H.
Page x

Table NTS 2: Commentary on Development of EDS
Chapter or subsection
Chapter 1 Proposal 1b 3rd para Proposal 1j Chapter 2 Introductory text 2nd para Proposal 2k Chapter 3
Comment, Query or Recommendation
The current structure of independent agencies with their own funding streams does not incentivise collaborative working. Could this be expanded on? Is this the responsibility of the Major?
More in second draft
Proposal has been modified, but Mayor has a legitimate interest
The introductory text needs to include a sentence on improving quality of life and the link to increased productivity. Link with social care important here, especially in terms of addressing underlying problems faced by London.
Better in next draft
Agree: amended in next draft
Does greening of transport require its own proposal? (or is this in Transport Plan) Should there be a proposal that relates to supporting education and public awareness of climate change and greening the economy? Chapter 4 Key stages described Early years and schooling, gaining and retaining employment, progressing and acquiring higher skills what about re-investing experience through the elderly? 3rd para: This para discusses measures that have been less successful to date how will these measures be tailored or improved upon then to improve their efficacy? This proposal does not discuss measures for removing barriers for all target groups for example does not mention people with disabilities, elderly, or lesbian, gay and transgender people. 2nd to last para: The key agencies also need to work to improve the career progression prospects so that in-work poverty can be cut. is career progression the crux of the issue or is it wages that are too low to support basic standards of living? Last para: If there are fewer jobs available in average pay sectors, this proposal does not describe how it will support making more of these available. Suggestion is that proposals to overcome institutional barriers within businesses to improve employment are addressed e.g. promoting the concept of part time working for single mothers. Proposal 4e The normal presumption of many economists is that higher skills are required in future economy this is important for innovation and technologically demanding employment. It has been suggested by some commentators that it is in fact wider skills that are demanded. Workers in most sectors now have to be able to use ICT, wordprocess documents, use a range of communication and interpersonal skills, etc. As this is not recognised these are not well monitored but is clearly a key barrier to employment for many.
In new draft & MTS Yes in new draft
Yes in new draft
Proposal 4c
See new draft which has made substantial additions
Agree in new draft
Chapter 5 General Seems to avoid mention of sustainable development Amended in new draft
Page xi
Creating the environment for business Appraisal of Draft Revised EDS

This section presents a summary of the appraisal undertaken of the revised EDS. The summary of effects has followed the thematic structure of the EDS and is presented against the five topic chapters of the EDS. In predicting and evaluating the effects of the EDS, all effects have been considered, including those that are minor or nonsignificant, but which could combine to create a significant cumulative or synergistic effect. Where only a minor effect has been predicted this has been noted.
Chapter 1: London: World Capital of Business

The proposals outlined in this chapter will have significant positive effects for the economy and employment through wealth creation and business development. This chapter seeks to position and promote London as the undisputed world capital of business. The proposals aim to achieve this through developing relevant partnerships, marketing and promotion and taking advantage of the opportunities presented by the 2012 Olympic Games. This chapter includes a strong focus on the active marketing and promotion of London worldwide. These actions are important in ensuring that London maintains its current position as one of the foremost places to do business and can facilitate the attraction of further business and visitors to the capital. Drawing further business and visitors will initiate positive socio-economic effects for the capital. Critically, proposals include plans to synchronise various promotional initiatives in a more coordinated and collaborative manner. Better coordination will improve the effectiveness and hence value for money of promotional programmes. The 2012 Olympic Games can serve as a strong promotional tool for London, highlighting it as a place to visit for tourists as well as the business opportunities available here. The Games may also impact on Londoners health and well-being around the time of event and, if successful, include useful lessons for future regeneration projects The development of a trade strategy with China and India can significant to the long-term stability of the economy as the link with economies of China and India will be important to diversify market opportunities for Londons firms as well as potential positive indirect cultural and social benefits. These economies are important global players and there are many strategic opportunities for businesses in London. Trade is an essential component to business growth and development in the global markets and trade strategies typically serve to improve linkages and help identify key opportunities and markets. As well as the economic benefits, there may be wider social benefits. help to promote awareness of and appreciation for different cultures and their diversity. Any positive spin-off effects in this regard, however, would likely be minor. There is some uncertainty regarding the potential success of promotional activities to stimulate the economy in times of recession. Global market factors will be an important influence economic recovery and the economic objectives of the chapter.
Page xii

Chapter 2: Improving Londons Competitiveness
The proposals outlined in this chapter will have significant positive economic effects and positive social effects through its focus on increased productivity and improving the quality of life of Londoners. This chapter seeks to ensure that London has the most productive business environment in the world through supporting increased productivity and competitiveness through innovation, business support and attracting investment, as well as through improving the quality of life for Londoners. Several proposals in this chapter are aimed at fostering innovation among Londons businesses through collaborations, promoting linkages and direct support. There is also a key focus on developing business skills and enterprise capability (i.e. developing the skills that underlie turning an idea into a sellable product) of Londons citizens. Innovation is a crucial to Londons place as a premier place for business and these proposals can have positive economic effects for the city. The focus on increasing skills and knowledge can also have beneficial social effects through improving career progression and incomes but will require some effort to ensure that target groups that are most in need (in terms of skills barriers to participating in the labour market) can be reached by proposals The proposals put forward in this chapter may have both positive and negative environmental effects. Where proposals support innovation in green technologies or creating transport, water or energy infrastructure there can be positive effects, although the significance thereof cannot be ascertained at this stage. However, economic growth (as supported by this chapter) is often associated with negative environmental externalities (such as greater emissions from industrial and power generation activities, increased congestion with associated air quality effects, and increased demand for scarce and stressed resources) and so a positive overall outcome will only result where such growth occurs sustainably. There are several proposals aimed at supporting, strengthening and diversifying the economy including supporting a business friendly regulatory environment and building on opportunities with neighbouring regions. Developing opportunities with other regions can create synergistic and wider beneficial effects for London. Proposals also include a focus on business support, particularly for SMEs. SMEs are important employers in London and supporting their development and survival could have positive employment effects. Where business support is directed at communities and target groups that may experience barriers or exclusion there may also be positive effects for equality. It is noted however that the dual objectives of supporting businesses with the greatest return to the London economy and those that deliver equality objectives may be at odds with one another and it is important that both of these objectives receive attention in design and focus of business support programmes. Proposals in this chapter also focus on improving the quality of life for Londoners on a number of fronts including addressing the quality of health and reducing health inequalities, reducing crime and improving the cultural, sporting and entertainment offer. These proposals, whilst having positive social effects, can also positively contribute to economic objectives, for example higher levels of health and well-being can contribute to reduced rates of absenteeism and increased efficiency of workers. Co-ordinating activities to improve the quality of environment will have positive environmental and social effects and support a range of sustainability objectives including open space, biodiversity, air quality, liveability and place and health and well-being. The focus on
Page xiii
increasing the provision of arts and cultural facilities in Outer London will improve accessibility to these facilities and have positive impacts on equality. Most of these facilities are currently located in central London and expanding their geographic distribution will help make these more accessible to people who currently may experience financial or travel barriers to accessing these.
Chapter 3: Making the Transition to a Low-carbon Economy

The proposals outlined in this chapter will have significant positive effects for the environment and the economy through the promotion of the low-carbon industries and sectors. This chapter is aimed at driving Londons transition to a low-carbon economy through measures to reduce Londons carbon emissions and taking advantage of the economic opportunities that will arise. The investment required to shift London to a low carbon economy (e.g. in the creation of green infrastructure such as the move to a decentralised energy supply) will create direct jobs and business opportunities as well as create wider supply chain and multiplier effects and positively contribute to creating employment opportunities for the city. Proposals which aim at the development of low carbon skills may have positive effects including raising of incomes and facilitating career progression. It will also help to create the supply side conditions necessary to take advantage of economic opportunities. There are significant economic opportunities presented through the growth and development of green sectors and industries. London could benefit from the proposals through the principle of first mover advantage. This refers to the benefits gained with being among the first in a new market segment e.g. through technological leadership. Considering the global trend in moving towards green and low carbon technologies there could be significant wider benefits for London with being seen as a leader in this regard. The establishment of exemplary projects such as the proposed Green Enterprise District in the Thames Gateway and the Low Carbon Zones may have important beneficial impacts through giving boost to new and emerging green industries or sectors that could benefit from increased exposure and support. There is expected to be some increased costs to businesses to upgrade to more energy efficient, water and waste systems driven by increased regulatory encouragement to switch to more efficient systems and low carbon technologies. However, investment in many of these measures will have positive payback over time and it is expected that the long-term effect would be cost-neutral to cost-beneficial. This is especially the case as there are a number of programmes that support businesses, such as the Building Energy Efficiency Programme, which identifies cost neutral means to achieve energy efficient measures. There are wide ranging positive direct and indirect environmental effects arising from the proposals in this chapter. The most significant positive effects relate to climate change mitigation and reducing energy usage through providing the infrastructure to move to a low carbon economy as well as reducing demand for purchased and generated electricity (for example through energy efficiency awareness programmes to businesses). These programmes will contribute to improved resource efficiency and more sustainable development patterns.
Page xiv
There are also significant positive effects from proposals in reducing water consumption and diverting waste from landfill. Other positive effects include improvements in local air quality from reductions in emissions and climate change adaptation through the Mayors work with businesses on improving building design and business continuity plans.
Chapter 4: Extending Opportunity to all Londoners

The proposals outlined in this chapter will have significant positive economic and social effects by extending the economic opportunities to all Londoners. This chapter aims at giving opportunity to all Londoners to participate in the economy and take advantage of Londons economic success by addressing issues such as housing, skills and training and removing barriers in the labour market. The proposal seeks to address issues relating to child poverty and help give children the best start in life through continued lobbying and raising awareness for this cause. Where these actions increase funding for or enhance the efficacy of the work of the London Child Poverty Commission there will be positive social effects in poverty reduction and equality. Another focus area of this chapter is the provision of housing, including affordable housing. This can contribute to enhancing the liveability and sense of place in local areas where there are reductions in overcrowding and poor quality housing. This proposal can also contribute to regeneration of areas, although the extent of this effect is dependent on specific projects. New housing may also positively contribute to environmental objectives such as energy and water through better design and altering consumption patterns in the home as promoted by policies such as the London Plan and the Code for Sustainable Homes. A major focus in this chapter is on the labour market and more specifically on removing barriers and encouraging greater participation by all groups in society. Despite London being one of the top business centres in the world, it still experiences relatively high levels of unemployment in comparison to the rest of England. There currently exist barriers that prevent certain segments of the population, for example Black, Asian and minority ethnic groups, disabled and single parents from effectively participating. This chapter includes proposals that will focus on increasing participation of young people, removing barriers and disincentives and improving training and employability support. These proposals can initiate a range of positive effects including increased employment participation rates, improved incomes from improving the skills set and improved productivity. Quality of life can be affected by issues such as having access to adequate housing and rewarding jobs which can help improve self esteem, protect mental health and give individuals a sense of empowerment. Policies in this chapter which address provision of adequate and affordable housing and employment and skills development can therefore indirectly contribute to improved general levels of health and well-being. Proposals that seek to promote volunteering can contribute to social cohesion and sustainable communities through creating a network of social relationships among people in their own communities and help connect people from different backgrounds.
Page xv

Chapter 5: Investing in Londons Future
The proposals outlined in this chapter will have significant positive social and economic effects through enhancing the effectiveness of investment to support growth and regeneration. This chapter seeks to maximise the benefits to London from investment to support economic growth, competitiveness and regeneration. The proposals aim at directing investment that creates supply side conditions to enable the further growth and development of the city. The proposals seek to direct development towards Outer London and improve the effectiveness of hubs in outer London (identified in the London Plan as Strategic Outer London Development Centres). This will seek to reduce the disparities that currently exist in the economies of Inner and Outer London, promoting equality by ensuring a greater spread of economic benefits (e.g. jobs and services) to areas and communities that may currently find experience barriers such as accessibility and affordability that prevent them from accessing these. These proposals will also have positive effects for the economy and employment. Improving hubs incorporates the provision of a range of activities including employment, retail, housing and leisure, thereby helping to create sustainable and mixed-use communities. More accessible employment opportunities in local areas can help create the potential for reduced commuting and more sustainable travel patterns. These proposals will have positive effects for housing and regeneration of strategic areas as well as the economy and employment. New housing may indirectly support water and energy objectives through compliance with legislation which seeks to reduce energy and water consumption in new homes. New construction activity may negatively contribute to waste generation in the capital although this is not considered to be significant as it will be covered by planning legislation. The chapter also seeks to promote the relative strengths of Central London through maintaining sufficient quality workspaces and improving the capacity of transport systems into and out of the City. According to the 2008 European Cities Monitor availability of and value for money for office space are both areas in which London is not currently a leader. The provision of more and quality workspace may therefore have positive benefits in attracting more businesses to locate in London. In addition to advancing London as a premier business location where support may allow for provision of premises demanded by businesses or the development of key infrastructure (including green infrastructure). This will have associated impacts on wealth creation and employment. The success of proposals in contributing to the economy will, however, ultimately be determined by wider macroeconomic factors affecting the global slowdown in economic activity. The proposals also support coordination with Transport for London for delivery of transport networks both within London and with neighbouring regions, particularly in relation to the freight and logistics sector. This will positively support the growth of London and enable the city to take advantage of economic opportunities. The proposals also focus on encouraging more journeys by foot and by bicycle. This can help reduce congestion and the associated negative effects for businesses, quality of life and air quality. There may also be benefits in terms of increased health and wellbeing for Londoners.
Page xvi
Health and well-being is supported by a variety of policies in this chapter, including those that will affect reductions in poverty or improved access to services, encouraging more journeys by foot, bicycle, result in improvement in local air quality through reduced vehicle usage. In addition the 2012 Olympic Games can serve as a catalyst to increasing participation in sporting and recreation activities and more active lifestyles in general. What are the conclusions and key findings of the appraisal? Overall the appraisal of the draft revised Economic Development Strategy has found the proposals to be broadly positive when considered against the 16 sustainability appraisal objectives. In addition, no proposals were considered in the appraisal to contribute negatively to the objectives. Not unexpectedly, the promotion of a stable economy as well as employment objectives receive strong support in the proposals of the revised EDS as does climate change with significant positive effects are expected against both of these objectives. Other key areas where positive effects are expected are employment, equalities, health and well-being and accessibility. Some of the key strengths of the revised Economic Development Strategy include: Strong support for maintaining a strong and diverse economy that creates the conditions for supporting economic growth and achieving the objectives of the revised EDS. A strong, comprehensive approach to tackling climate change notably through mitigation of emissions and creation of green infrastructure. The proposals include actions to taking advantage of the economic opportunities presented by these activities. A wider approach to economic development that includes a commitment to improving the quality of life of Londoners that addresses key aspects of poverty and exclusion. However, there remained some uncertainty regarding the potential effects of a number of proposals where specific details of measures that would be undertaken to fulfil the proposals are to be defined in later local policy or where proposals relate to the Mayors success in influencing national policy. More generally, the revised EDS did not include many proposals to address demand side stimulus measures to boost the economy, which might be expected in response to the current recessionary period. This may reflect the plan period. Proposals to address housing needs and delivery were not covered in detail here and it was recognised that this may lie more fully under the remit of other agencies such as the relatively newly formed HCA or be more fully addressed at local development plan policy making level. In addition, a greater focus on regeneration might have been expected, but it is recognised that the specific details of different regeneration proposals will be defined out at a local level. Whilst proposals (especially in Chapter 3) are generally very supportive of the broader climate change goals to (reduce emissions) it is not possible to appraise whether these contributions will be sufficient to meet the broader requirements to reduce emissions by 80% by 2050 (as specified in the Climate Change Act 2008). It is understood that specific recommendations may be set within an Implementation Plan for the revised EDS and it is
Page xvii
recommended that these are appraised to consider the potential contribution of proposals to Climate Change, and sustainability, objectives and regional targets. It would be helpful if the implementation plan also sets out potential intended outputs and outcomes to aid future evaluation. There were a limited number of proposals addressing specific environmental issues such as biodiversity, reducing flood risk and improving water efficiency but as these are outside the scope of the objectives of the revised EDS and included within other policy at this and more local levels (particularly the London Plan), this is not a concern. The draft revised EDS makes clear steps towards a Sustainable London which, given that any major conurbation is inherently unsustainable (with inherited patterns of infrastructure, resource consumption and waste creation) is important. The draft revised EDS, together with the Mayors Transport Strategy and London Plan, can help ensure that London will be considered to be more sustainable in the future than it is at present. A significant challenge will remain to be addressed through the monitoring and implementation of the final EDS to move London further given its over all contribution to the UK environmental and carbon footprint.
How will any Effects be Monitored?

It is a requirement of the SEA Directive to establish how the significant sustainability effects of implementing the EDS will be monitored. However, as ODPM Guidance (ODPM, 2005) notes, it is not necessary to monitor everything, or monitor an effect indefinitely, instead monitoring needs to be focused on significant sustainability effects. Monitoring the EDS for sustainability effects can help to answer questions such as: Were the appraisals predictions of the sustainability effects accurate? Is the EDS contributing to the achievement of the desired SA objective? Are mitigation measures performing as well as expected? Are there any adverse effects? Are these within acceptable limits or is remedial action desirable? Monitoring should therefore be focussed upon: Significant effects that may give rise to irreversible damage, with a view to identifying trends before such damage is caused. Significant effects where there was uncertainty in the SA and where monitoring would enable preventative or mitigation measures to be undertaken. Proposals are presented in the SA Report that outline the proposed indicators to be measured to enable the effects of the revised EDS to be assessed in future years.
Page xviii
What are the Next Steps?

This Non-Technical Summary of the SA Report for the draft revised EDS provides a summary of the information presented in the SA Report. The full SA report should be referred to for more detailed information. The SA Report and the consultation on it fulfil the requirements of Stage C of the SEA process and sets out the assessment of the EDS. This SA Report will be presented for consultation alongside the EDS and will run till 12 January 2010. Feedback received from consultees in relation to the SA will be documented and considered. The EDS may be amended and revisions to the SA may be made. A post adoption statement will be produced to highlight how any recommendations of the SA were integrated into the EDS.
How to give us Your Views?

We would welcome your views on this Sustainability Appraisal Report for the draft revised EDS for London. This SA Report supports the consultation on the draft revised EDS and needs to be read in conjunction with the draft revised EDS. All responses on the draft revised EDS and /or the SA Report must be received by 5pm on Tuesday 12th January 2010. If you decide to respond in this way, the form can be submitted by letter, fax or email to:
Letter: Philippa Venables London Development Agency Palestra 197 Blackfriars Road SE1 8AA Email: PhilippaVenables@lda.gov.uk with SA of Revised EDS as the title. Please note that if you send a response by email it is not necessary for you to also send a hard copy. If your response only covers the SA Report please make this clear in the subject line of your response. All responses will be made available for public inspection.
Page xix
Contents
1. 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 2. 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 3. 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 4. 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9
Introduction Context Purpose of this Sustainability Appraisal Report Sustainability Appraisal Report Structure Consultation and Stakeholder Engagement The Mayors Draft Revised Economic Development Strategy for London Introduction and Context The Need for a Review Aim of the Revised EDS Reasonable Alternatives Methodology Overview Scope of the Appraisal Establishing the Context Appraisal Objectives and Guide Questions Completing the Appraisal Assumptions and Technical Difficulties HRA Appraisal and Reporting Introduction Reasonable Alternatives Revised EDS Vision and Objectives Chapter 1 - London: World Capital of Business Chapter 2 Improving Londons Competitiveness Chapter 3 Transforming to a Low Carbon Economy Chapter 4 Extending Opportunity to all Londoners Chapter 5 Investing in Londons Future
1 1 2 3 5 6 9 9 9 10 13 17 17 17 20 21 25 26 26 28 28 28 30 32 38 48 55 64
Page xx

4.10 4.11 4.12 5. 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5
Cumulative Effects of EDS Health Impact Assessment Community Safety Impact Assessment Conclusion Key findings from Sustainability Appraisal Monitoring of Significant Effects Quality Assurance Next Steps
73 75 76 77 77 78 81 81
Table 2.1 Table 3.1 Table 4.1 Table 4.2 Table 4.3 Table 4.4 Table 4.5 Table 4.6 Table 4.7 Table 4.8 Table 5.1 Figure 1.1 Figure 3.1
Revised EDS Objective, Themes and Proposals Scope of Annex I Issues and SA Objectives High Level Strategic Appraisal of the Reasonable Alternatives Compatibility between EDS Objectives and the SA Objectives Appraisal of Proposals in Chapter 1 in comparison with SA Objectives Appraisal of Proposals in Chapter 2 in comparison with SA Objectives Appraisal of Proposals in Chapter 3 in comparison with SA Objectives Appraisal of Proposals in Chapter 4 in comparison with SA Objectives Appraisal of Proposals in Chapter 5 in comparison with SA Objectives Cumulative Effects Assessment of the London Plan, the Economic Development Strategy and the Mayors Transport Strategy Proposed Monitoring Measures Overview of the Sustainability Appraisal Process Central Activities Zone, Inner and Outer London
11 17 29 31 37 46 54 62 71 74 79 4 19
Appendix A Appendix B Appendix C Appendix D Appendix E Appendix F Appendix G Appendix H
List of Abbreviations Review of Policies, Plans and Programmes Response to Scoping Consultation Iterative Comments and Responses Health Impact Assessment Community Safety Impact Appraisal Detailed Assessment Matrix Quality Assurance Checklist
Page xxi
1.
1.1
Introduction
Context
The Economic Development Strategy (EDS) is one of the Mayoral strategies which is required under the Greater London Authority Act 1999 (GLA Act) and the Regional Development Act 1998 (RDA Act). The London Development Agency (LDA) is responsible for preparing a draft for publication on behalf of the Mayor. The EDS sets out a strategic direction, clear medium term priorities and proposals for interventions and proposed strategic partnerships that will collectively support sustainable economic growth for London. The last revision of the EDS was published in January 2005. There is now a need to revise the EDS to reflect a number of changes including a new Mayoral administration, a very different economic climate, an increased emphasis on climate change and the progress towards the Olympic and Paralympic Games and Crossrail. In addition, the Mayors Spatial Development Strategy The London Plan and the Mayors Transport Strategy are also being revised, so there is a significant opportunity to fully align and optimise the synergies between these three strategies.
1.1.1
Requirement for Appraisal
The LDA (on behalf of the Mayor of London) is required to undertake a Strategic Environmental Assessment (SEA) of its plans and programmes3. The SEA main aim is to contribute to the integration of environmental considerations in the preparation and adoption of plans to promote sustainable development. Sustainability Appraisal (SA) is an appraisal process based on the principles of SEA but with a wider focus that in addition to environmental issues includes consideration of the social and economic aspects of sustainability. The (then) Office of the Deputy Prime Minister (ODPM)4 produced guidance5 for regional and local planning authorities on how to undertake SA which integrates the process of appraisal with the requirements for SEA. This SA for the Mayor of Londons revised EDS adopts this integrated approach. This is also in line with the approach that has been undertaken for alterations to the London Plan.
Under the European Directive 2001/42/EC (known as the SEA Directive) which has been transposed into UK Law through the Environmental Assessment of Plans and Programmes Regulations 2004 (Statutory Instrument 1633). These regulations apply to a wide range of plans and programmes, focusing on those that are considered to have potentially significant effects on the environment. 4 Now known as Communities and Local Government (CLG). 5 ODPM (2005) Sustainability Appraisal of Regional Spatial Strategies and Local Development Documents.
Page 1
SA also assists the Mayor in fulfilling the duties under the GLA Act to promote social development, environmental improvement and contribute to the achievement of sustainable development, within the UK. The Mayor also has a duty under the GLA Act (2007) to promote the reduction of health inequalities and to have regard to the effects of Mayoral strategies on reducing health inequalities in London. Health Impact Assessment (HIA) provides the basis for considering health issues in policy development in London in a stand alone manner; however, there are clear benefits to integrating the approach to HIA with the existing SA to ensure that cumulative effects on health are comprehensively considered. The approach taken in this SA has sought to include HIA, where appropriate. There is a statutory requirement for the GLA to follow Section 17 of the Crime and Disorder Act (1998). The newly enacted Police and Justice Act (2006) has broadened the scope of Section 17 to encompass misuse of drugs, alcohol and other substances, anti-social behaviour and behaviour adversely affecting the environment. As part of the completed SA, a specific Community Safety Impact Assessment (CSIA)6 has been undertaken and which is integrated in the SA to achieve these duties. The GLA Act also requires the Mayor to ensure that potential equality impacts are considered in the development of plans and strategies. An Equalities Impact Assessment (EqIA) is the method employed to consider the impacts of any policies upon a number of specific groups7. A full EqIA of the EDS has been undertaken separately by the LDA, the conclusions of which will be considered as part of the SA for consistency and to ensure that the requirements of the Race Relations Act 1976 (statutory duties) Order 2001, Disability Discrimination Act (2005) and Equality Act (2006) to promote race, disability and gender equality are met.
1.2
Purpose of this Sustainability Appraisal Report
The purpose of this Sustainability Appraisal (SA) Report is to present the findings of the appraisal of the Mayors draft revised EDS for London against a range of social, economic, environmental, health and equality objectives. Where any significant adverse effects are identified, mitigating measures have been proposed, along with an
6 CSIA is a specific assessment to determine the effectiveness of a strategy in preventing crime and disorder and thus improving community safety. The Crime and Disorder Act (as amended by the Police and Justice Act 2006) places an obligation on the LDA to do all they reasonably can to prevent crime and disorder. The LDAs Community Safety and Crime Reduction Policy Statement sets out how this duty is fulfilled through promoting community safety (for example, by embedding Secure by Design principles in development, delivery and evaluation processes, with commensurate guidance and training for staff to help them evaluate the impacts of programmes on community safety). The CSIA as part of this SA will identify the methods by which the LDA seeks to fulfil its duty through the revised EDS and assess the effectiveness of those methods in meeting the statutory duty. 7 The following groups are included in the EqIA: women; Black, Asian and minority ethnic people; disabled people; children and young people; older people; faith groups; and lesbians, gay men, bisexual and trans gendered people.
Page 2
indicative monitoring framework. The SA Report supports the public consultation process on the Mayors draft revised EDS for London. In consequence, this report has the following aims: to provide information on the Mayors draft revised EDS for London; to provide a summary of relevant contextual sustainability information drawing on a review of relevant plans and programmes, baseline information and consultees views; to outline the process of appraisal, the results of the scoping stage consultation and any difficulties encountered during the completion of the appraisal; to identify, describe and evaluate the likely significant effects of the Mayors draft revised EDS for London and its reasonable alternatives; to provide potential measures to avoid, reduce, mitigate or offset any potentially significant adverse effects and, where appropriate, to suggest potential measures to enhance the contribution of the Mayors revised EDS for London to the achievement of environmental and sustainability objectives; and to provide an opportunity for the consultation authorities and the public to offer views on the findings of the assessment of the Mayors draft revised EDS for London.
1.3
Sustainability Appraisal
Figure 1.1 sets out the five stages of the SA process, as outlined in Government guidance8. The Scoping Report for this SA Report (the output from Stage A) was issued and consulted on by statutory consultees in August 2009. A summary of the results of the consultation are presented in Appendix C and the consultees responses have been considered both in this SA and also within the EDS. This SA Report for the Mayors draft Revised EDS for London is the output from Stages B and C. It is published alongside the draft EDS for consultation. The consultation on the SA and draft revised EDS represents Stage D of the appraisal process.
ODPM (2005), Sustainability Appraisal of Regional Spatial strategies and Local Development Documents: Guidance for Regional Planning Bodies and Local Planning Authorities
Page 3

Figure 1.1 Overview of the Sustainability Appraisal Process
Appraisal Process
Stage A: Scoping Setting the context, establishing the baseline and deciding the scope of the appraisal Stage B: Appraisal Developing and refining the strategic options for the EDS and appraising the effects
Key Outputs
Development of the revised Economic Development Strategy
Scoping Report (August 2009)
Stage C: Reporting Preparing the Sustainability Appraisal Report
Sustainability Appraisal Report (October 2009)
Stage D: Consultation Consulting on the draft revised EDS and SA Reports
Stage E: Monitoring Monitoring of significant effects from the implementation of the EDS
Post Adoption Statements (Early 2010)
The SA process is an iterative one with the interactions between the Scoping Report, SA and EDS intended to identify, characterise and assess the contribution of the EDS to a range of sustainability objectives. There has been early and regular interaction between the EDS authors and the appraisal team to ensure that the draft EDS benefits from timely input regarding the potential sustainability effects of alternatives and proposals. This is reflected in commentary in this report. In order to demonstrate compliance with the requirements of the government guidance on sustainability appraisal, a completed Quality Assurance checklist is included in Appendix H of this Sustainability Appraisal Report.
Page 4
1.4
Report Structure
This Report covers Stages B and C of the SA process (see Figure 1.1). Stage B involves developing and refining options and assessing the effects. It is of note that this stage may include elements that need to be carried out more than once in the course of the Strategys development. The SA Report presents the testing of the objectives of the revised EDS against the sustainability appraisal framework. Next the SA Report provides comment on the development of the revised EDS by considering the performance of the strategic alternatives against the sustainability appraisal objectives. An important part of this process is predicting the effects of the revised EDS. This involves identifying the changes to the social, economic and environmental baseline which are predicted to arise from the revised EDS. Furthermore, these changes are described in terms of their magnitude, their geographical scale, the time period over which they will occur, whether they are permanent or temporary, positive or negative, probable or improbable, frequent or rare, and whether or not there are secondary, cumulative and/or synergistic effects. Next the SA Report presents the evaluation of the effects of the draft revised EDS. Where appropriate, the baseline information and indicators defined at Stage A are referred to at this point as this aids understanding of the evaluation of whether or not a predicted effect will be significant. The appraisal of the effects also includes consideration of the short, medium and long-term as well as considering the permanence of such effects. Following the evaluation, the SA Report considers ways of mitigating the adverse effects identified. Finally measures are proposed to monitor the effects of the revised EDSs implementation. With reference to the above text, the SA Report is structured into the following sections: Section 2 Overview of the Mayors Revised Economic Development Strategy - Provides a summary of the Mayors revised EDS and sets out a number of reasonable alternatives to the published version. Section 3 Methodology - Sets out the methodology for how the appraisal has been undertaken. This includes the appraisals scope, a baseline for the appraisal and the appraisals objectives. Section 4 Appraisal and Reporting - Provides an appraisal of the revised EDSs Vision and Objectives, draft revised EDSs chapters and their effects, as well as reasonable alternatives: Section 4.2 Section 4.3 Section 4.4 Section 4.5 Section 4.6 Section 4.7 Section 4.8 - Reasonable alternatives; - EDS Vision and Objectives; - Chapter 1, London: business capital of the world; - Chapter 2, Improving Londons competitiveness; - Chapter 3, Transforming to a low carbon economy; - Chapter 4, Extending opportunity to all Londoners; - Chapter 5, Investing in Londons future.
Page 5
Section 4.9
- Cumulative effects of EDS
Section 4.10 - Summary of findings of HIA Section 4.11 - Summary of findings of CSIA Section 5 Conclusion - Includes the key findings from the appraisal process, how significant effects should be monitored and the next steps for the revised EDS.
1.5
Consultation and Stakeholder Engagement
Consultation and stakeholder engagement are fundamental to the SA process. It reflects the principle that lies at the heart of the SEA process that plan and programme making is better where it is transparent, inclusive and uses information that has been subject to public scrutiny. The SA process aims to ensure that the key stakeholders, those parties who could be affected and the wider public have the opportunity to present their views on the revised EDS for London.
1.5.1
Previous Consultation
The SA Scoping Report produced was subject to a five week consultation period between 8th August and 12th September 2009. A number of organisations were invited to comment including the statutory consultees under the SEA Regulations (namely: Environment Agency, English Heritage, Natural England, GLA, LDA, and Transport for London, and Government Office for London). Four responses were received from; the Environment Agency, Natural England and English Heritage as well as from the GLA Sustainable Development Policy team. In addition, the responses received from the consultation on the Scoping Report for the Integrated Impact Assessment (IIA) of the London Plan were also taken into account.. Organisations were given the option not to comment on the Scoping Report for the EDS if they had already commented on the IIA for the London Plan and felt their comments sufficiently addressed any issues in the SA of the EDS scoping report. The scoping comments received relating to the EDS have been tabulated and are included in Appendix C. The responses to the scoping on the IIA of the London Plan are held by the GLA.
Page 6
1.5.2
Consultation on this SA
This SA Report is being issued for public consultation alongside the draft EDS. In addition to seeking views from the public on the draft revised EDS and the appraisal of its sustainability, a wider range of stakeholders have been notified and invited to comment on the SA Report (those include a number of specific consultees set out in Box 1). The consultation period will run for 12 weeks from the 12 October 2009 to the 12 January 2010.
Box 1
Consultees
HIA Specific Consultees: London Health Commission; NHS London; Healthy Urban Development Unit; GLA; Regional Public Health Group; London Councils; Government Office for London; London Sustainability Exchange; NHS Innovations; London Health Forum; Healthcare for London; Kings Fund; London Mental Health CEO Group; London Health Observatory; London Food; London Sustainable Development Commission; and London Ambulance Service. CSIA Specific Consultees: London Met Police / Met Police Authority; London Fire Brigade; London Councils; Relevant GLA team; Community Safety Teams / Drug Action Response Teams in boroughs; London Action Trust; London Probation Service; London Voluntary Services Council; Government Office for London; and Community Safety Advisory Service.
Natural England (statutory); Environment Agency (statutory); English Heritage (statutory); Homes and Communities Agency; Government Office for London; Greater London Authority; Mayors Office; London Assembly; Transport for London; London Development Agency; London Councils; London Sustainable Development Commission; London Health Commission; London First; Friends of the Earth; The London Civic Forum; London Community Recycling Network; Social Enterprise London; NHS London; Healthy Urban Development Unit; London Sustainability Exchange; London Remade; Big Lottery Fund; Regional Public Health Group; Environment Council; London Voluntary Services Council; Sustain; Centre for Safety, Environmental Management for Business (Middlesex University); Envirowise; Carbon Trust; Merton Chamber; Business Link in London; The Work Foundation; Institute for Sustainability; Julie's Bicycle; North London Strategic Alliance; and The neighbouring regions (EEDA and SEEDA)
Page 7

How to give us your views
We would welcome your views on this Sustainability Appraisal Report for the draft revised EDS for London. This SA Report supports the consultation on the draft revised EDS and needs to be read in conjunction with the draft revised EDS. All responses on the draft revised EDS and /or the SA Report must be received by 5pm on Tuesday 12th January 2010. If you decide to respond in this way, the form can be submitted by letter, fax or email to:
Letter: Philippa Venables London Development Agency Palestra 197 Blackfriars Road SE1 8AA Email: PhilippaVenables@lda.gov.uk with SA of Revised EDS as the title. Please note that if you send a response by email it is not necessary for you to also send a hard copy. If your response only covers the SA Report please make this clear in the subject line of your response. All responses will be made available for public inspection.
Page 8
2.
The Mayors Draft Revised Economic Development Strategy for London

Introduction and Context
2.2
This section provides an overview of the draft Revised Economic Development Strategy (EDS). It highlights the need for a review of the existing EDS (Section 2.2) and how that process has been undertaken. It also provides a summary of the structure of the draft revised EDS and its associated content (Section 2.3).
2.3
The Need for a Review
The EDS is one of the Mayoral strategies which is required under the Greater London Authority Act 1999 (GLA Act) and the Regional Development Act 1998 (RDA Act). Section 7A(4) of the Regional Development Agency Act (1998), as amended by the Greater London Authority Act (1999), requires the LDA to keep the EDS under review, and empowers it to submit proposed revisions to the Mayor. In consequence, the LDA is working with GLA to prepare a second revision for publication on behalf of the Mayor. The EDS describes the London economy and how it is performing; indicates areas of strength and weakness and also will provide recommendations for the GLA functional bodies and other agencies, in terms of direction, strategic partnerships and interventions, through an implementation plan. The last revision of the EDS was published in January 2005. With a number of fundamental changes such as a new Mayoral administration in place, a different economic climate, an increased emphasis on climate change and the need to move to a low carbon economy, progress towards the Olympic and Paralympic Games and Crossrail, there is a need to revise this document. The Mayors Spatial Development Strategy The London Plan and the Mayors Transport Strategy are also being revised so there is a drive to fully align these three strategies. Health (including health and health inequalities), sustainability (including environmental, social and economic impacts) and the promotion of community safety (including the reduction in crime and the fear of crime) are all statutory duties of the Mayor and the GLA Group, including the LDA. The GLA Group is required to have regard to the achievement of health, equality of opportunity and sustainable development in all its activities under the GLA Act. In addition, promoting the improvement of the environment in Greater London is one of the principal purposes of the GLA (GLA Act 30 2c) and the statutory purpose of the LDA, under the RDA Act (1998), is to contribute to sustainable development. Also, under the Natural Environment and Rural Communities Act (2006), every public authority must, in exercising its functions, have regard, so far as is consistent with the proper exercise of those functions, to the purpose of conserving biodiversity. In line with these requirements, the GLA Group takes a holistic approach to sustainable economic development which aims to achieve positive social, economic and environmental outcomes. Furthermore, the GLA Act (2007)
Page 9
gave new health responsibilities to the Mayor in addition to his existing duty to promote health, specifically a duty to work to reduce health inequalities. The Mayor is now required to develop and lead a London-wide Health Inequalities Strategy, working with health partners. The GLA Act (2007) also gave the Mayor new duties to produce climate change mitigation and energy and climate change adaptation strategies for London. The EDS will have a key role in shaping and delivering these strategies, particularly in terms of the Capitals transition to a low carbon economy. GLA, TfL and the LDA have a duty under section 17 of the 1998 Crime and Disorder Act (as amended by the Police and Justice Act 2006) with regard to various strategic planning and policy functions. Section 17 requires that due regard is given to both the likely effect of the exercise of those functions on crime and disorder in their area (including anti-social and other behaviour adversely affecting the local environment); and the misuse of drugs, alcohol and other substances in its area. The Mayor and the GLA Group also have obligations as set out under the Compact with the Voluntary and Community Sector (VCS), Working Together. Whilst these obligations do not confer a statutory duty, they are viewed as part of best practice by public sector bodies in working with the VCS. As such, they should be taken into account across all areas of the GLA Group, to ensure that in this area as in others, the GLA Group are using this as one of a suite of tools to deliver sustainable benefits to all Londoners, including those sometimes termed hard-toreach, and who may be disengaged from other public or private sector provided services. The Mayor agreed that setting a revised EDS as early as possible would not be possible with further alterations and subsequently announced a full review of the Greater London EDS. In May 2009, the Mayor published an issues paper Rising to the Challenge which set out the Mayors broad intentions for building Londons economic future. Consultation on the proposals lasted until mid July 2009, the findings of which were fed into the development of the replacement EDS.
2.4
Aim of the Revised EDS
The draft revised EDS sets out the following vision for London: Over the years to 2031, and beyond, London should excel among global cities, expanding opportunities for all its people and enterprises, achieving the highest environmental standards and quality of life and leading the world in its approach to tackling the urban challenges of the 21st century, particularly that of climate change. Achieving this vision will mean making sure London makes the most of the benefits of the energy, dynamism and diversity that characterise the city and its people; embraces change while promoting its heritage, neighbourhoods and identity; and values responsibility, compassion and citizenship. The chosen strategy seeks to enable the London economys strengths to flourish and address weaknesses. As a result, the revised EDS proposes five economic objectives:
Page 10
Objective 1: to promote London as a city that excels as a world capital of business; Objective 2: to ensure that London has the most competitive business environment in the world; Objective 3: to drive Londons transition to a low carbon economy and to maximise the economic opportunities this will create; Objective 4: to give all Londoners the opportunity to take part in Londons economic success, access sustainable employment and progress in their careers; and Objective 5: to maximise the benefits to London from investment to support growth and regeneration and from the 2012 Olympic and Paralympic Games and its legacy. The draft revised EDS also sets out the key themes around which the LDA wishes to build Londons economic future. These themes have been adopted into the structure of the SA to provide a logical frame of reference between the SA assessments and the emerging EDS. Table 2.1 below sets out the draft revised EDS themes, together with the theme objectives and the draft proposals for achieving each objective.
Table 2.1
Revised EDS Objective, Themes and Proposals
EDS Theme
London: business capital of the world
EDS Objective
1. To promote London as a city that excels as a world capital of business.
EDS Proposals
The Mayor will work with partners to strengthen the promotion of London as a global leader and will encourage promotional agencies to work collaboratively. The Mayor and GLA Group will work with London Organizing Committee for the Olympic Games (LOCOG) to promote London to the world, taking full advantage of the 2012 Games opportunity. The Mayor will work with partners to develop a comprehensive international trade strategy to increase Londons exports, particularly in rapidly developing markets such as India and China. The Mayor will work with partners to further develop Londons capacity for innovation, particularly for SMEs, by encouraging collaboration across sectors, promoting more productive links between business and academia, providing support for innovative activities, promoting entrepreneurial skills and helping in accessing funding. The Mayor will promote cost effective business support programmes for Londons businesses, and especially its SMEs, working with central government, the LDA, local authorities and business representative organisations in London. The Mayor will monitor the factors affecting Londons competitiveness so as to identify where corrective action is needed to address factors having a negative effect. The Mayor will continue to be an active champion of business and will lobby government and encourage an open and competitive business-friendly environment and a flexible and skilled labour market. The Mayor will work with partners to ensure costs to business are kept as low as realistically possible.
Improving Londons competitiveness
2. To ensure that London has the most competitive business environment in the world.
Page 11
EDS Theme
EDS Objective
EDS Proposals
The Mayor will work with the neighbouring regions to achieve mutual economic benefits. The Mayor will work with boroughs and other partners to improve the quality of the environment in London. The Mayor will work with the NHS and partners to improve health in London and reduce health inequalities. The Mayor will work with partners to improve and promote Londons overall cultural, sporting and entertainment offer. The Mayor will work with the Metropolitan Police, boroughs and other partners to drive down crime and particularly to counter business crime in the capital. The Mayor will lead by example and will work with partners to ensure that London realises the great economic opportunities associated with the move to a low carbon economy. The Mayor will work with partners and lobby government to develop the scale of investment and environmental infrastructure needed to support a low carbon London. The Mayor will encourage business to participate in exemplary projects to cut carbon such as the creation of a showcase Green Enterprise District and of Low Carbon Zones. The Mayor will work with partners to ensure Londons workforce has the right skills so businesses fully realise the employment opportunities from the global move to a low carbon economy. The Mayor will create a policy framework to address climate change and will work with private, public and voluntary sector partners to improve their environmental performance. The Mayor will work with partners to help to ensure that all Londons children get a good start in life, and encourage relevant agencies to work towards the governments target to end child poverty being achieved in London by 2020. The Mayor will work with partners to ensure that all London's young people have appropriate opportunities to gain the knowledge, skills and confidence to succeed in London's labour market. The Mayor will work with partners, particularly through the LSEB, to raise Londons employment rate and to reduce the employment rate gap for disadvantaged groups by removing barriers and disincentives to work and providing more personalised and joined up services to help people into employment and career progression. The Mayor will work with the LSEB and other partners to significantly improve training and employability support so as to help people secure and retain a job with a particular focus on neighbourhoods with high concentrations of worklessness. The Mayor will work with the LSEB and other partners to help meet the aspirations of Londoners to acquire relevant skills and qualifications to progress in their careers. The Mayor will work with the Homes and Communities Agency, boroughs and other partners to ensure there is sufficient and suitable housing to meet the needs of Londons growing population and workforce, and to address problems of homelessness and overcrowding. The Mayor will work with partners to strengthen the economy across London including removing barriers to outer London fulfilling its potential, and to support the
Making the Transition to a Low Carbon Economy
3. To drive Londons transition to a low carbon economy and to maximise the economic opportunities this will create.
Extending Opportunity to All Londoners
4. To give all Londoners the opportunity to take part in Londons economic success, access sustainable employment and progress in their careers.
Investing in
5. To maximise the benefits to London from
Page 12
EDS Theme
Londons future
EDS Objective
investment to support growth and regeneration.
EDS Proposals
development of town centres in outer and inner London as hubs for their communities and local economies. The Mayor will work with partners to ensure that investment sustains and increases Central Londons ability to be competitive, productive and innovative. The Mayor and LDA will work with the Olympic Park Legacy Company and other partners to fully seize the unique regeneration opportunity offered by the 2012 Olympic and Paralympic Games. The Mayor will work with boroughs, developers and other partners to identify capacity to accommodate large-scale employment and housing development, including in the London Plans Opportunity Areas, through the planning system, transport proposals and investment support. The Mayor and LDA will work with partners to take a co-ordinated and targeted approach to regeneration across London. The Mayor will encourage the further development of diverse and attractive neighbourhoods throughout London and will encourage local economic development as an essential ingredient in this. The Mayor will work with LDA, TfL and partners to achieve the full economic development benefits of Londons transport schemes and to bring forward the necessary further investment in Londons infrastructure. The Mayor will work with partners in the wider South East to achieve mutual economic benefits from investment.
2.5
Reasonable Alternatives
A number of potential broad policy proposals are set out in the draft revised EDS and are described in Table 2.1 above. Work to consider alternative development strategies to meet and deliver different potential future economic and population growth scenarios is strongly linked. This has resulted in an integrated approach to the development of strategic policy / proposals that has been shared by the revised EDS, London Plan and Transport Strategy. Of relevance here are the spatial options developed for the London Plan as well as different potential economic objectives developed for the revised EDS.
Spatial options considered in the London Plan

As taken directly from the draft revised EDS, the Mayor has explored alternative assumptions about where economic development might go, for example through the Outer London Commission, and concluded that a strategy of strengthening and widening growth, particularly in outer London, is desirable, but that it is equally essential to consolidate the unique strengths of central London. The responses to Rising to the Challenge (the
Page 13
earlier Assembly and Functional Bodies consultation draft of this Economic Development Strategy) overwhelmingly endorsed the Mayors proposed strategic approach. These spatial options, which impact on the distribution of economic growth and distribution of associated benefits, have been assessed in the IIA of the London Plan. Given the integrated nature of the different plans and strategies some more detail of the assessment of spatial options and its findings is presented here with more available in the associated IIA: Strategic Spatial Development Option 1: No change, business as usual scenario This option represents continuation of the existing London Plan strategy (devised in 2004) of addressing issues and encouraging growth concentrated in central and inner London. In particular, considerable employment growth is expected to occur within the Central Activity Zone (CAZ) and inner London, and there is a degree of emphasis on growth in east London (particularly within the Thames Gateway area). Growth is planned for specific centres in outer London and specific Opportunity Areas and Areas of Intensification. This option represents the business as usual scenario'.
Strategic Spatial Development Option 2: Current London Plan direction plus enhanced growth in metropolitan town centres This option recognises that there will still be a need for substantial growth in the Central Activity Zone and inner London. Employment growth would continue to be largely focused in inner and central London, although metropolitan town centres in outer London will become a key spatial priority. The option promotes the enhanced growth of a number of important metropolitan town centres to act as a focus for economic growth outside of central London, which would also include an intensification of residential development. It is expected that in this option, town centres will provide an important role in accommodating long-term growth pressures and satisfying Londoners needs for more localised services and facilities.
Page 14
Strategic Spatial Development Option 3: Current London Plan direction plus enhanced growth in new Strategic Outer London Development Centres This option also recognises that there will continue to be a substantial level of growth within central and inner London, particularly in terms of employment growth. It also recognises that town centres will be important growth points in outer London, as recognised in the exiting London Plan. However, it promotes substantial growth in outer London around four key strategic development centres. These locations would become strategic development centres, which will act as a focus for employment growth, including a focus on industries not currently prevalent in outer London. It is intended that such areas would bring in new development and investment rather than divert that already occurring in central London and in doing so, broaden the range of opportunities in outer London. They would also result in an intensification of residential development around such areas. The appraisal in the IIA highlighted that, generally, of the options considered, the second was most likely to contribute most towards meeting the IIA objectives. This was predominantly as it built upon the existing London Plans focus on inner London and promotes an improved distribution of development in outer London by focussing on enhancing growth at metropolitan town centres. This is anticipated to build upon local economies and maximise the availability of opportunities in outer London.
Balance of proposals to meet different economic objectives

The draft revised EDS indicates that the LDA has explored whether there might be significant alternative approaches to the London economy over the next 20 years. The draft revised EDS points to advice that has been received from four consultants on economic projections and states that all the resulting forecasts show similar potential future trends in employment sector growth and would appear to be quite firmly established. In this appraisal and given the context of the existing London economy, it is recognised that the scope of alternatives may be limited to a particular balance and scope of proposals to meet the draft revised EDS objectives for example, the relative degree that the LDA works towards the transition to a low carbon economy (LCE) is used as a key variation between the alternatives appraised. This is considered to be a reasonable alternative as whilst a broad continuation of existing LDA economic development policy may remain successful in the short to medium term, there is a need, highlighted in the draft revised EDS, to have regard to the recommendation of the Stern Review. The draft revised EDS also highlights that a revision to the existing EDS was required to take account of most recent global economic conditions (baseline information is summarised in the detailed appraisal matrices to the SA report, see Appendix G). This information has been used to develop three strategic alternatives, which have then been appraised as part of the draft revised EDS development. These are:
Page 15
Option 1 A Transition to Low Carbon Economy Strategy; Option 2 Economic Strategy with significant LCE objectives; Option 3 Continuation of policies and proposals within existing EDS. The sustainability implications of these options are explored with Section 4 of this report. At this stage the Mayors proposals as set out in Table 2.1 are open to consultation and will be amended or removed following feedback over the next consultation phase.
Page 16
3.
3.2
Methodology
Overview
The approach adopted in this SA is consistent with the requirements of SEA and has been expanded to include the requirements of the HIA and CSIA. This section sets out the methodology, including the scope of the appraisal (Section 3.2), the method for collecting and presenting baseline information (Section 3.3), the objectives and issues addressed in this SA (Section 3.4), the approach to completing the appraisal (Section 3.5), technical difficulties encountered during the assessment (Section 3.6) and screening for appropriate assessment (Section 3.7).
3.3
Scope of the Appraisal

Thematic scope of the proposed appraisal
3.3.1
The thematic topics which have been included in this report have been informed by the topics identified in Annex 1 of the SEA Directive. Table 3.1 highlights how the topics from the SEA Directive relate to the themes covered by the SA objectives used within this SA Report (and previously consulted upon in the Scoping Report). Following consultation, all of the Annex 1 issues identified in the Scoping Report have been scoped in to this appraisal.
Table 3.1
Scope of Annex I Issues and SA Objectives
Annex I Issues
Scope in ( ) or out ( )
SA Objective Themes
Biodiversity Population Human Health Fauna Flora Soil Water Air Climatic Factors Material Assets Human Health
2. Ecology (Flora and Fauna) 4. Economy and Skill; 7. Traffic and Transport; 8. Noise; 9. Landscape, Townscape and Visual; 13. Health and Wellbeing; 14. Equality 13. Health and Wellbeing; 14. Equality; 8. Noise; 11. Air Quality; 14. Equality 2. Ecology (Flora and Fauna); 8. Noise; 11. Air Quality 2. Ecology (Flora and Fauna); 11. Air Quality 12. Soil and Geology 1. Climate Change; 5. Flood Risk; 6. Water Quality 11. Air Quality 1. Climate Change; 5. Flood Risk; Water Quality; 7. Traffic and Transport; 3. Material Assets and Resource Use; 12. Soil and Geology 9. Landscape, Townscape and Visual; 10. Archaeology and Cultural Heritage
Page 17
Annex I Issues
Scope in ( ) or out ( )
SA Objective Themes
Cultural Heritage (including architectural and archaeological heritage) Landscape
9. Landscape, Townscape and Visual
2. Ecology (Flora and Fauna)
In addition to those issues identified by the SEA Directive, the ODPM guidance indicates that the SA process should also cover social and economic issues such as economy, society, education, skills, transport, equality and diversity. This also reflects the requirement of the Government Office for London Circular 1/2008 (Section 2.7) to have regard to: the effect on the health and health inequality of persons in Greater London; the effect on climate change, and the consequences of climate change; and the achievement of sustainable development in the United Kingdom. These are also effectively captured within the SA objectives used to complete this appraisal.
3.3.2
Geographic Scope of the Proposed Appraisal
The EDS is a strategic document for Londons growth and economic development, and as such, makes reference to geographic locations for development and investment, for example in specific areas such as the Central Activity Zone, Inner London, Outer London etc. The more specific proposals in the revised EDS are, with respect to geographic area, the more precise the appraisal process can be in terms of identifying spatial effects. Any such location specific effects within Greater London (for example increased employment for a local community from a regeneration schemes in the Thames Gateway) have been identified and are referenced in the appraisal where appropriate. Consideration has also been given, where relevant, to wider areas of effect that extend beyond the boundary of Greater London and across the UK. The key geographic areas within the Greater London boundary are defined by the areas of central, inner and outer London (depicted in Figure 3.1 below).
Page 18

Figure 3.1 Central Activities Zone, Inner and Outer London
Source: GLA
3.3.3
Temporal Scope of the Appraisal
The effects of a policy, plan or programme may change over time (in the short, medium and long term) for a number of reasons. The temporal effects of the revised EDS have been considered in the appraisal, where this is appropriate. Where clear temporal effects have been identified, these have been highlighted, especially where there may be a difference between short, medium and long term. For the purposes of the appraisal, where used, the short term is defined as the effects arising from implementation up to 5 years, the medium term as between 5 and 10 years and the long term as beyond 10 years.
Page 19
3.4
Establishing the Context

Review of Policies, Plans and Programmes
3.4.1
The SEA Directive requires: an outline of the contents, main objectives of the plan or programme and relationship with other relevant plans and programmes. (Annex 1(a)) The environmental protection objectives, established at international (European) Community or Member State level, which are relevant to the plan or programme and the way those objectives and any environmental considerations have been taken into account during its preparation. (Annex 1(e))
The SEA Directive requires a review of the plan or programmes (i.e. the EDS relationship with other relevant plans and programmes). These may be policies, plans and programmes at an international, European and national level. A review of policies, plans and programmes is provided within Appendix B and is sub divided into topic sections which aim to identify the relationships between the revised EDS for London and these other documents i.e. how the EDS might be affected by the published plans aims, objectives and/or targets, or how the revised EDS could contribute to the achievement of any environmental and sustainability objectives. An understanding of policies, plans and programmes alongside which the EDS sits is important in developing the appraisal of the EDS.
3.4.2
Baseline information and key issues
The SEA Directive requires: the relevant aspects of the current state of the environment and the likely evolution thereof without implementation of the plan or programme. (Annex 1 (b)) the environmental characteristics of areas likely to be significantly affected. (Annex 1 (c)) the existing environmental problems which are relevant to the plan or programme including, in particular, those relating to any areas of particular environmental importance, such as areas designated pursuant to Directive 79/409/EEC and 92/43/EEC. (Annex 1 (c)) An essential part of the SA process is to identify the current baseline social, economic and environmental conditions and their likely evolution following a business as usual scenario. It is only with sufficient knowledge of the existing conditions that the key issues may be identified and addressed through the appraisal process. The SA also requires that the subsequent effects of implementation of the revised EDS on the baseline are monitored.
Page 20
This is considered when determining significance, particularly with regards to baseline conditions that may already be improving or worsening. Sixteen key issues were identified and consulted upon in the Scoping Report. An overview of baseline conditions for each of the topic sections is presented within detailed appraisal matrices (Appendix G) which has helped to inform the appraisal. These key issues are linked with the SA Objectives identified in Table 3.2.
1. Regeneration and land-use 2. Biodiversity 3. Health and well-being 4. Equalities 5. Housing 6. Employment 9. Climate change mitigation and energy 10. Water quality and water resources 7. Stable economy 8. Flood risk and climate change adaptation 11. Waste 12. Accessibility and mobility 13. Built and historic environment 14. Liveability and place 15. Open space 16. Air quality
3.5
Appraisal Objectives and Guide Questions
The establishment of appropriate objectives and guide questions is central to the appraisal process and provides a method to enable the consistent and systematic assessment of the effects of the draft revised EDS. The appraisal objectives described in this section have been informed by: the examination of the baseline evidence, incorporating the identification of key issues; the review of plans and programmes; and comments received during the consultation on the Scoping Report (Appendix C). Their development also reflects national guidance on SEA and SA practice. Broadly, the objectives present the preferred social, economic or environmental outcome which typically involves minimising detrimental effects and enhancing positive effects where relevant. Guide questions have been developed for each objective, providing a detailed framework against which the draft revised EDS has been appraised. A general assumption that underpins the proposed objectives is that all existing legal requirements will be met, and as such, statutory compliance has not been reflected individually in the objectives or guide questions. The objectives and questions used in the appraisal are listed in Table 3.2
Page 21
Table 3.2
SA Objectives and Guide Questions
Key Sustainability Objectives
Guide Questions
Link with SEA Topic Requirement
1. Regeneration & Land-Use. To stimulate regeneration and urban renaissance that maximises benefits to the most deprived areas and communities. Relates to Issue*: Community Safety; Land Use; Soil; Cultural Heritage; and Landscape
Will it have immediate and long-term benefits for deprived areas? Will it help facilitate regeneration in wider areas? Will it help to make people feel positive about the area they live in? Will it help to create a sense of place and vibrancy? Will it help reduce the number of vacant and derelict buildings? Will it minimise the loss of soils to development? Will it improve soil quality? Will it raise the future net value of social and community assets? Material Assets
2. Biodiversity. To protect, enhance and promote the natural biodiversity of London. Relates to Issue*: Biodiversity, flora and fauna; Water; and Air
Will it conserve and enhance habitats and species and provide for the long-term management of natural habitats and wildlife (in particular will it avoid harm to national or London priority species and designated sites)? Will it improve the quality and extent of designated and non-designated sites? Will it provide opportunities to enhance the environment and create new conservation assets (or restore existing wildlife habitats)? Will it protect and enhance the regions water bodies to achieve a good ecological status? Will it promote, educate and raise awareness of the enjoyment and benefits of the natural environment? Will it bring nature closer to people, especially in the most urbanised parts of the city? Will it promote respect and responsibility for its wise management? Will it improve access to areas of biodiversity interest? To enhance the ecological function and carrying capacity of the greenspace network? Biodiversity, Fauna, Flora, Soil, Water, Landscape
3. Health and Well-being. To maximise the health and wellbeing of the population and reduce inequalities in health. Relates to Issue*: Health; Equality; and Air. 4. Equalities. To ensure equitable outcomes for all communities, particularly those most at risk to experience discrimination, poverty and social exclusion. To also promote the cultural, ethnic, faith and racial diversity of London. Relates to Issue*: *: Equality; Population; and Community Safety.
Will it reduce poverty and health inequalities? Will it improve mental and emotional health? Will it improve access to high quality public services (including health facilities)? Will it encourage healthier lifestyles (for example through access to sport or recreation, better education or safer / sustainable transport modes)? Will it reduce poverty and social exclusion in those areas and communities most affected? Will it promote a culture of equality, fairness and respect for people and the environment? Will it promote equality for black and minority ethnic communities, women, disabled people, lesbians, gay men, bisexual and transgender people, older people, young people, children and faith groups? Will it benefit the equality target groups listed above? Will it help address institutional or business practices/cultures that may represent barriers to participation or access? Will it help reduce perception of or numbers of incidents of hate crime or perceptions of personal safety? Population, Human Health Population, Human Health
5. Housing. To ensure that all Londoners have
Will it reduce homelessness? Will it reduce the number of unfit homes and overcrowding?
Population, Human Health,
Page 22
Guide Questions

Material Assets
access to good quality, well-located, affordable housing. Relates to Issue*: Population; Land Use; Equality; and Landscape.
Will it increase the range and affordability (both upfront and over its lifetime) of housing (taking into account different requirements and preferences of size, location, type and tenure)? Will it help stimulate the supply of appropriate housing to meet Londons needs? Will it ensure that appropriate services and facilities are in place for the new population? Will it provide housing that ensures a good standard of living and promotes a healthy lifestyle? Will it improve the quality of housing? Will it increase use of sustainable design and sustainable building materials in construction? Will it improve energy efficiency and insulation in housing to reduce fuel poverty and ill-health? Will it provide housing that encourages a sense of community and enhances the amenity value of the community?
6. Employment To offer everyone the opportunity for rewarding, well-located and satisfying employment. Relates to Issue*: Economy; Population; and Equality.
Will it help to provide employment in the most deprived areas and stimulate regeneration? Will it reduce overall unemployment, particularly long-term unemployment and worklessness? Will it help Londons local labour supply match skills demanded by businesses? Will it help to improve levels of income and help to deliver a living wage to all? Will it encourage flexibility of work, including voluntary and part-time work? Will it encourage volunteering and promote the value of unpaid work? Will it generate satisfying and rewarding new jobs? Will it encourage the development of healthy workplaces? Will it support key workers in London? Population, Material Assets
7. Stable Economy To encourage a strong, diverse and stable economy and to improve the resilience of businesses. This should also support the development of an efficient, low carbon economy (including new green technologies). Relates to Issue*: Economy
Will it improve sustainable business development? Will it improve the resilience of business and the economy? Will it help to diversify the economy? Will it support growth in sectors that are important for Londons long term future? Will it prevent the loss of indigenous businesses? Will it encourage business start-ups and support the growth of businesses? Will it encourage ethical and responsible investment? Will it reduce levels of deprivation? Will it encourage healthy competition? Will it have positive economic impacts in wider regions? Population, Material Assets,
8. Flood Risk and Climate Change Adaptation. To ensure London adapts to the effects of climate change (both now and in the future). The effects on London particularly concern flooding, drought and overheating. Relates to Issue*: Climate Change and Energy Use; and Water.
Will it protect London from climate change impacts? Will it minimise the risk of flooding from rivers and watercourses to people and property? Will it manage existing flood risks appropriately and avoid new flood risks? Climatic Factors
Page 23
Guide Questions
9. Climate Change Mitigation and Energy To ensure London contributes to global climate change mitigation, achieve greater energy efficiency and reduces its reliance on fossil fuels. Relates to Issue*: Climate Change and Energy Use; and Water.
Will it minimise emissions of greenhouse gases? Will it help London meet its emission targets? Will it avoid exacerbating the impacts of climate change? Will it increase the proportion of energy both purchased and generated from renewable and sustainable resources. Will it reduce the demand and need for energy? Will it promote and improve energy efficiency (e.g. buildings)? Will it promote security of energy supply? Will it help reduce fuel poverty? Climatic Factors, Material Assets
10. Water Quality and Water Resources To protect and enhance Londons water bodies and the Blue Ribbon network. Relates to Issue*: Soil; and Water.
Will it improve the quality of water bodies? Will it reduce discharges to surface and ground waters? Will it support sustainable urban drainage? Will it improve the water systems infrastructure (e.g. water supply/sewerage)? Will it reduce abstraction form surface and ground water sources? Will it reduce water consumption? Will it help to meet the objectives of the Water Framework Directive? Water
11. Waste To minimise the production of waste across all sectors and increase reuse, recycling, remanufacturing and recovery rates. Relates to Issue*: Waste 12. Accessibility and Mobility To maximise the accessibility for all in and around London and increase the proportion of journeys made by sustainable transport modes (particularly public transport, walking and cycling). Relates to Issue*: Health; Transport; and Equality.
Will it minimise the production of waste and promote resource efficiency? Will it promote reuse and recycling (e.g. in the design of housing etc)? Will it help to promote a market for recycled products? Will it help to promote waste reduction/minimisation? Population, Material Assets
Will it encourage a modal shift to more sustainable forms of travel as well as encourage greater efficiency (e.g. through car-sharing)? Will it reduce the overall need for people to travel by improving their access to the services, jobs, leisure and amenities in the place in which they live? Will it reduce traffic volumes and traffic congestion? Will it reduce the length of commuting journeys? Will it help to provide a more integrated transport service from start to finish i.e. place of residence to point of service use or place of employment? Will it increase the number of sub-regional and orbital public transport routes that facilitate locally-based living? Will it improve accessibility to work by public transport, walking and cycling? Will it improve reliability and stability of public transport services? Will it help ensure affordability of public transport services? Will it reduce road traffic accidents? Population
13. Built and Historic Environment To enhance and protect the existing built environment (including the architectural distinctiveness, townscape/landscape and archaeological heritage) and landscapes, and ensure new buildings and spaces are appropriately designed.
Will it protect and enhance sites, features and areas of historical, archaeological and cultural value/potential? Will it conserve and enhance the townscape/cityscape character? Will it promote high quality design and sustainable construction methods? Will it respect visual amenity and the spatial diversity of communities? Will it enhance the quality of the public realm? Will it improve the wider built environment and sense of place?
Cultural Heritage (including architectural and archaeological heritage), Landscape
Page 24
Guide Questions
Relates to Issue*: Cultural Heritage. 14. Liveability and Place To create sustainable, mixed use environments that promote long-term social cohesion, sustainable lifestyles, safety and security, and a sense of place. Relates to Issue*: Population; Health; Community Safety; Transport; Land Use; and Landscape.
Will it encourage access / use of Londons assets? Will it support and enhance cultural heritage? Will it create and sustain vibrant and diverse communities and encourage increased engagement in recreational, leisure and cultural activities? Will it increase the provision of culture, leisure and recreational activities: this could include quality, affordable and healthy food, as well as cultural, sporting, or leisure opportunities. Will it provide opportunities for people to choose an active, fulfilling life? Will it increase the provision of key services, facilities and employment opportunities? Will it positively enhance and promote the perceived sense of place held by the community? Will it promote safety through, for example; design or education? Will it reduce risk of accidents, casualties or property loss? Will it reduce actual levels of crime? Will it reduce the fear of crime? Will it reduce antisocial behaviour? Will it reduce actual noise levels and disturbances from noise? Will it reduce the risk of terrorist attack? Population, Human Health, Material Assets, Landscape, Cultural Heritage (including architectural and archaeological heritage)
15. Open Space To protect and enhance natural open space in London. Relates to Issue*: Landscape; and Cultural Heritage 16. Air Quality To improve Londons air quality. Relates to Issue*: Air; Health; Transport.
Will it protect and enhance areas of open and public space? Will it improve access to open space and improve the quality and quantity of publicly accessible greenspace? Biodiversity, Flora, Fauna, Landscape
Will it improve air quality? Will it reduce emissions of greenhouse gases by reducing energy consumption? Will it help to reduce emissions of PM10 and NO2? Will it reduce emissions of ozone depleting substances? Will it help to achieve national and international standards for air quality (for example, those set out in the Air Quality Regulations 2000 and (Amendment) Regulations 2002? Air
3.6
Completing the Appraisal
The appraisal of the draft revised EDS was undertaken in 2009 by sustainability and technical consultants at Entec with specialist health input provided by the Institute of Occupational Health. Support and input was also provided by the LDA, where necessary. This SA was undertaken using the objectives identified in Table 3.2. The appraisal examined the proposals presented under each of the chapters in the draft revised EDS against each of the 16 SA objectives. These are included in detailed appraisal matrices within the appendix (Appendix G) with a summary of the appraisal
Page 25
highlighting key effects for each chapter described in Section 4. In line with the ODPM (now CLG) Practical Guide to the SEA Directive, this process has been used to predict the significant effects of the revised EDS. In predicting the effects, changes are identified in the baseline which would occur as a result of the implementation of the revised EDS. These changes are then described, where possible, in terms of their geographic scale, the timescale over which they could occur, whether the effects would be temporary of permanent, positive or negative, likely or unlikely, frequent or rare and whether or not they are secondary, cumulative or synergistic. The cumulative effects of implementing the revised EDS have also been considered (see Section 4.10). However, due to the strategic and forward-looking nature of the document, quantitative information is not always available to inform the prediction of effects for all the proposals within the revised EDS. Where this is the case, the effects have been identified based on professional judgement by experienced technical experts and with consideration to relevant best practice guidance. In consequence, this SA report presents the appraisal of the proposals within the final draft of the draft revised EDS.
3.6.1
Proposal development and iterations
The development of the draft revised EDS has been an iterative process involving technical experts advising on the potential effects that may arise and proposing suggestions to improve the early drafts of the policies and liaising with the EDS team at the LDA/GLA. Appendix D records the suggestions made and the responses following their consideration by the EDS authors during the drafting of the replacement plan. Changes suggested included policy amendments and clarification of policies and supporting text. For example it was recommended that reference to social care be included in proposal 2H.
3.7
Assumptions and Technical Difficulties
As identified in Section 3.4, it is assumed that all relevant legal requirements will be met as necessary and as such specific reference to the compliance of the draft revised EDSs implementation with statutory limits and targets has not been made in the assessment or the SA objectives. Where the terms minimise or maximise are used, this refers to minimisation or maximisation subject to the consideration of the potential costs and benefits, as opposed to absolute minimisation or maximisation (i.e. regardless of costs). If any definition of these terms, other than that assumed, it will be clearly stated. No technical difficulties were encountered in compiling the required information for this report.
3.8
HRA
The proposals within this EDS broadly relate to measures to help address economic development objectives. For example, these include proposals such as: the coordination of marketing of London as a business location to international businesses; programmes to help develop skill of employees from less well represented groups; and business support to firms that may be important to the low carbon economy. However, there are a number of spatial
Page 26
proposals from the London Plan that are referenced in the strategy as they are important to help meet some development objectives (for example investment in development and infrastructure to support growth and regeneration described in Chapter 5 of the draft revised EDS). A Habitats Regulations Assessment (HRA) screening report has been undertaken on the policies within the London Plan as required by the European Habitats Directive, enacted by the Conservation (Natural Habitats and c) Regulations 1994 (the Habitats Regulations) and is published separately. The screening assessment found that on the whole, the draft replacement London Plan policies are unlikely to have any significant effects and therefore a full habitats assessment is not required. However, in some cases significant effects of some of the London Plan policies cannot be ruled out as at subsequent stages of implementation (e.g. through specific projects) there may be effects. As the EDS encapsulates the London Plan policies within its proposals, the potential effects will need further consideration at a lower tier of assessment prior to implementation. Two policies were identified in the assessment of the London Plan that could potentially have significant direct or indirect detrimental effects on European designated sites (Policy 2.13 Opportunity Areas and Policy 2.17 Strategic Industrial Locations). These London Plan policies relate to a number of proposals within Chapter 5 of the draft revised EDS, namely; 5A (paragraph 5.16) which refers to Strategic Industrial Locations; and 5D which refers explicitly to Opportunity Areas within its title. The HRA proposed wording changes to mitigate the effects to avoid potential effects on designated sites.
Page 27
4.
4.2
Appraisal and Reporting

Introduction
This section sets out the appraisal undertaken. Section 4.2 provides an overview of the reasonable alternatives considered as part of the revised EDS followed by a summary of the revised EDS vision and objectives (Section 4.3). Thereafter, an appraisal of each of the five draft revised EDS chapters has been undertaken. Each draft chapter and associated key proposals have been summarised followed by an appraisal of the potential effects against the 16 sustainability appraisal objectives (see Table 3.2). A more detailed appraisal of each chapter is contained in Appendix G. Within this section, further information is provided for the appraisal of each proposal in relation to the sustainability objectives. The contribution of each proposal to each of the 16 objectives is considered using the key below:
Key
++ + 0 -?
Strongly Positive: This proposal is strongly positive in relation to the objectives of the sustainability theme Positive: This proposal is positive in relation to the objectives of the sustainability theme Neutral Impact: This proposal is neutral in relation to the objectives of the sustainability theme Negative: This proposal is negative in relation to the objectives of the sustainability theme Strongly Negative: This proposal is strongly negative in relation to the objectives of the sustainability theme Uncertain: The impact on the objectives of the sustainability theme is uncertain and may be dependant on the way the aspect is managed. It might be that insufficient information is available to enable an assessment to be made
4.3
Reasonable Alternatives
The SEA Directive requires the identification, description and evaluation of the likely significant effects of reasonable alternatives, as well as the reasons for selecting such alternatives. The development of the draft revised EDS has been integrated with the development of the revision to the London Plan and the results of an appraisal of key spatial alternatives as part of the IIA was presented in Section 2.4. In addition, Section 2.4 looked at other reasonable strategic alternatives to address the EDS objectives. These options, which explore differing responses to the challenge of the transition to a low carbon economy, are as follows: Option 1 A Transition to Low Carbon Economy (LCE) Strategy This potential option is considered to include a significant focus on proposals that seek to help address climate change. Conceptually this option would concentrate on the types of proposals within Chapter 3 (Transforming to a low carbon economy) of the draft revised EDS with a potential substitution of some of the proposals with significantly different aims. An example might include business support to sectors that can have the greatest effect on the reduction of Londons Carbon Footprint. This might also include a
Page 28
greater transfer of effort towards facilitating domestic and commercial energy efficiency and supporting sectors. Option 2 Economic Strategy with significant LCE proposals This option reflects the current balance of proposals within the draft revised EDS. It is similar to Option 1 as it recognises that the low carbon economy should be a significant part of Londons EDS yet it maintains a greater balance of proposals that include support to of wider economic and social objectives. Option 3 Continuation of policies and proposals within existing EDS This option includes a continuation of proposals within the existing EDS which does not explicitly recognise the low carbon economy as a key objective. An appraisal of the likely high level (strategic) effects of these reasonable alternatives (Option 1, 2 and 3) against the sustainability themes (environmental, economic, and social), which cover the sixteen SA objectives is presented in Table 4.1:
Table 4.1
High Level Strategic Appraisal of the Reasonable Alternatives Option 1: A Transition to Low Carbon Economy (LCE) Strategy
By basing the revised EDS on LCE objectives, it is considered likely that the Strategy will be significantly aligned with the environmental objectives, especially those relating to climate change adaptation and mitigation. The scale of long-term effects might be greater in this Option compared with the other options (Option 1 and 2) if it is assumed that more resources will be focussed on LCE objectives. The LCE objectives do support the growth of sectors that will be important to London with commensurate benefits. However, If it is assumed that the focus on low carbon sectors reduces some support to some other higher value added, more resource intensive sectors, this may overlook potential opportunities to create wealth (with associated knock-on benefits) and fail to realise Londons economic potential.

The revised EDS includes a number of similar themes to the existing EDS although it includes a new group of proposals to promote the development of a low carbon economy which are expected to have significant long-term effects on some of the environmental objectives. The effects (and contribution) of this option are not assessed to be as high as those from Option 1 but greater than Option 3.

The exiting EDS focussed on four objectives; places and infrastructure, people, enterprise, marketing and promoting London. This included the commitment to consider whether proposals were sustainable, yet did not include as significant proposals to mitigate and address the effects of climate change. This is assessed to have the least contribution compared with Options 1 and 2. The existing EDS includes a wide range of proposals that are expected to strongly contribute to economic objectives. However, as the baseline has changed - the UK is in a period of recession and the future roles of different agencies likely to be involved has changed, it is less likely that the proposals would deliver significant benefits without significant revision. This Option (3) therefore is not expected to contribute to the economic objectives as well as Options 1 and 2.
Economic Objectives
The revised EDS includes a number of similar themes to the existing EDS although these have been revised to take into account the changing roles and the effect of current global economic situation. This Option (2) is expected to have the greatest contribution to economic objective over the short to long-term compared with alternatives (Option 1 and 3).
Page 29
Social Objectives
Option 1: A Transition to Low Carbon Economy (LCE) Strategy

Tackling climate change is important to the long-term social welfare of London and, as the Stern Report recognised, there are potential longer term economic benefits where investment in mitigation and adaptation occurs early. However, a revised EDS needs to include a balance of proposals to tackle a range of social issues.

The revised EDS includes a number of similar themes to the existing EDS although these have been revised to take into account the changing roles and the effect of current global economic situation as well as anticipated social issues. This Option (2) is expected to have the greatest contribution to social objectives over the short to long-term compared with alternatives (Option 1 and 3).

The existing EDS includes a wide range of proposals that are expected to strongly contribute to social objectives. However, as the baseline has changed - the UK is in a period of recession and the future roles of different agencies likely to be involved has changed; it is less likely that the proposals would deliver significant benefits without significant revision. This Option (3) therefore is not expected to contribute to the social objectives as well as Options 1 and 2.
The preferred option was Option 2; a revised EDS which includes significant proposals to address the low carbon economy yet retains a wider balance of economic proposals. The Mayor has concluded that the approach of encouraging consolidation of strength in business service and finance, together with some diversification into other growth sectors will be the most effective.
4.4
Revised EDS Vision and Objectives
The draft revised EDS sets out the following vision for London: Over the years to 2031, and beyond, London should excel among global cities, expanding opportunities for all its people and enterprises, achieving the highest environmental standards and quality of life and leading the world in its approach to tackling the urban challenges of the 21st century, particularly that of climate change. Achieving this vision will mean making sure London makes the most of the benefits of the energy, dynamism and diversity that characterise the city and its people; embraces change while promoting its heritage, neighbourhoods and identity; and values responsibility, compassion and citizenship. The chosen strategy seeks to enable the London economys strengths to flourish and address weaknesses. As a result the Mayor proposes five economic objectives. A compatibility matrix is provided in Table 4.2 to highlight the compatibility of the five EDS objectives with those of the SA. It shows that there are no identified incompatible objectives. Note that the matrix shows only potential high level relationships between objectives; therefore, blank boxes indicate where there is broadly no direct or significant relationship between the objectives. Where the matrix indicates compatibility there is a potential for there to be a positive effect. At this high level, the appraisal of potential effects is uncertain and depends on the specific nature of the proposals and measures that are put forward
Page 30
to address the EDS objectives. The more detailed consideration of the draft proposals is the subject of the appraisal in presented the remainder of Section 4.
Table 4.2 Compatibility between EDS Objectives and the SA Objectives
4: give all Londoners the opportunity to take part in Londons economic success, access sustainable employment and progress in their careers
Mayors Objectives
Sustainability Objectives
1: promote London as a city that excels as a world capital of business
2: ensure that London has the most competitive business environment in the world
3: drive Londons transition to a low carbon economy and to maximise the economic opportunities this will create
5: maximise the benefits to London from investment to support growth and regeneration
1.
Regeneration and Land-Use Biodiversity Health and Well-being Equalities Housing Employment Stable Economy Flood Risk and Climate Change Adaptation Climate Change Mitigation and Energy
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
9.
10. Water Quality & Water Resources 11. Waste 12. Accessibility and Mobility 13. Built and Historic Environment 14. Liveability and Place 15. Open Space 16. Air Quality - Compatible. The Mayors objective is compatible with the SA objective and may help achieve it.
Compatibility Key:
A blank box indicates that the Mayors objective is unrelated to the SA objective.
Page 31
4.5
Chapter 1 - London: World Capital of Business

Summary of Chapter 1
4.5.1
The chapter contains proposals primarily intended to deliver the first objective of the revised EDS: Objective 1: to promote London as a city that excels as a world capital of business. The chapter recognises Londons relative position and its advantages in the global economy and includes proposals to build on the position with potential commercial and wider economic benefits. The proposals aim to achieve this through developing relevant partnerships, marketing and promotion and taking advantage of the opportunities presented by the 2012 Olympic Games. The specific proposals include:
Proposals in Chapter 1
Proposal 1A: The Mayor will work with partners to strengthen the promotion of London as a global leader and will encourage promotional agencies to work collaboratively; Proposal 1B: The Mayor and GLA Group will work with the London Organising Committee of the Olympic Games (LOCOG) to promote London to the world, taking full advantage of the 2012 Games opportunity; and Proposal 1C: The Mayor will work with partners to develop a comprehensive international trade strategy to increase Londons exports, particularly in rapidly developing markets such as India and China.
4.5.2
Appraisal of Chapter 1 compared with sustainability objectives
This section sets out the appraisal of the chapter in relation to the sustainability objectives. A detailed appraisal of each proposal set within the chapter against the sustainability objectives is provided in Table 4.3.
1. Regeneration & Land-Use: To stimulate regeneration and urban renaissance that maximises benefits to the most deprived areas and communities.
The proposals in this chapter are not primarily aimed at addressing regeneration or land-use issues as these issues are covered in Chapter 5. It is noted in the revised EDS that the attraction of high class businesses to different locations in the capital can contribute positively to regeneration of a local area. However the extent to which this will happen cannot be determined here and will be influenced by other proposals in the revised EDS which focus on creating quality urban areas to attract businesses.
KEY EFFECTS: Neutral

The attraction of business to a local area could contribute to regeneration initiatives. However this is dependent on the influence of other regeneration proposals in the EDS and the effect here is likely to be neutral.
Page 32
2. Biodiversity: To protect, enhance and promote the natural biodiversity of London.
The proposals listed in this chapter do not address biodiversity issues and are not expected to contribute to this objective.

There are no key effects associated with this objective.
3. Health and Well-being: To maximise the health and well-being of the population and reduce inequalities in health.
Proposal 1B may indirectly and positively contribute to the overall sense of pride and wellbeing of Londoners during the 2012 Olympic Games. This would be short term and not significant. In addition, the promotion of sporting events is expected to have beneficial effects on communities from increased and sustained involvement in sporting and recreational activities.
KEY EFFECTS: Minor positive

Positive effects on the health and wellbeing of Londoners from increased participation in sporting and recreational activities as promoted by the 2012 Olympic Games
4. Equalities: To ensure equitable outcomes for all communities, particularly those most at risk to experience discrimination, poverty and social exclusion. To also promote the cultural, ethnic, faith and racial diversity of London.
Proposal 1C seeks to develop a comprehensive trade strategy, particularly with KEY EFFECTS: Minor positive India and China. For businesses to be effective internationally, it is important Trade strategies with India and China that cultural differences such as language, culture and social institutions are may indirectly promote awareness and more fully appreciated. The development of trade alliances with India and appreciation of these cultures and communities living in London and can China could help to promote awareness of and appreciation for these different positively affect equality. cultures and their diversity, especially of those communities from these countries resident in London with whom the Mayor has stated his intention to engage in dialogue. Londons population can speak up to 300 languages, and is representative of over 150 countries (State of Equality in London, GLA,2007) and integration and understanding of these communities is very important to the overall social cohesion of the City. It is expected that the development of such a trade strategy could indirectly positively contribute to promoting equality through instilling respect and appreciation for these cultures and addressing institutional and business practices, particularly where there is greater interaction between businesses at different locations.
5. Housing: To ensure that all Londoners have access to good quality, well-located, affordable housing.
The proposals listed in this chapter do not relate to housing and this chapter is not expected to contribute to this objective.

Page 33
6. Employment: To offer everyone the opportunity for rewarding, well-located and satisfying employment.
The proposals in this chapter aim at maintaining and improving London as a premier business location. This does not include specific proposals to create new jobs but can further enhance Londons capability to attract world class employees with skills in a broad range of sectors. This may help provide Londoners with a wider range of employment opportunities and contribute positively to creating rewarding and satisfying employment.

There may be positive effects in the form of rewarding and stimulating job opportunities from the promotion of London as a top business location.
7. Stable Economy: To encourage a strong, diverse and stable economy and to improve the resilience of businesses. This should also support the development of an efficient, low carbon economy (including new green technologies) that minimises unsustainable resource use.
It is reported that London is ranked the top city to do business in the 2008 European Cities Monitor (Cushman and Wakefield) and is a leading location for a wide range of sectors, particularly; financial and banking services. In an increasingly competitive global market place, where business and capital is highly mobile, it is crucial to maintain this position in order to retain the benefits it provides. Proposals 1A, 1B and 1C outline the Mayors intentions to further lobby and promote the capital and its businesses. Such actions are expected to help London maintain its position as a key global business location in the short to medium term.
KEY EFFECTS: Major positive

Proposals which seek to promote London can contribute to the city maintaining its premier status as a place to do business in an increasingly globally competitive business environment. The development of trade strategies, especially those that also focus on trade opportunities for SMEs will have positive economic effects. It is noted that the success of these policies are dependent on wider global factors that are affecting the current global slowdown in economic activity.
It can be difficult to recognise the cost effectiveness of marketing and promotion activities which can include funding marketing agencies (e.g. Visit London, Think London, Film London, Study London). Critically, in this regard, proposal 1A seeks to establish effective monitoring of the return on investment (ROI) from marketing expenditure. The proposal also includes the intention to better align various promotional initiatives in a more coordinated and collaborative manner. These actions will help to improve the value for money of these activities and can help identify which activities are more or less effective and therefore focus more resources on more effective marketing strategies. Consequently, this will help ensure that the proposal may help positively contribute to the attraction of inward investment and economic growth. The development and promotion of trade strategies together with associated activities are likely to have significant beneficial effects for businesses in the capital. There are likely to be continued strategic opportunities for businesses in London at such locations. Proposal 1C also includes greater assistance for SMEs to enter international markets and export products through Londons Export Promotion Programme. SMEs are an important component of the business community and account for 49% of private sector employment in London (Focus on London, 2008). Facilitating SMEs to take advantage of trade opportunities can help to increase wealth generating potential of these businesses and positively contribute to the economy. SMEs may also lack capacity to
Page 34
undertake such marketing and research activities themselves and might not otherwise be able to begin to look at export/supply chain opportunities, etc. It is noted that whilst the proposals in this chapter are expected to contribute to the creation of a strong and diverse economy, that the success of these will be dependent on global macroeconomic factors such as the recovery from the current financial crisis.
8. Flood Risk and Climate Change Adaptation: To ensure London adapts to the effects of climate change (both now and in the future). The effects on London particularly concern flooding, drought and overheating.
This chapter does not seek to address issues relating to flood risk and climate change and are not expected to contribute to this objective.

9. Climate Change Mitigation and Energy: To ensure London contributes to global climate change mitigation, achieve greater energy efficiency and reduces its reliance on fossil fuels.
This chapter does not seek to address climate change mitigation and energy issues. The increase of international trade is however typically associated with an increase in emissions from shipping and aviation. However, it is noted that there is relevant current and future legislation covering emissions from shipping and aviation which addresses these issues and this chapter is not anticipated to significantly contribute to these effects.

Increasing international trade will result in increased emissions but this will be addressed through relevant national and international legislation covering emissions from shipping and aviation.
10. Water Quality & Water Resources: To protect and enhance Londons waterbodies and the Blue Ribbon Network.
This chapter does not seek to address issues relating to water quality and water resources and the proposals are not expected to contribute to this objective.
KEY EFFECTS: Netural

11. Waste: To minimise the production of waste across all sectors and increase re-use, recycling, remanufacturing and recovery rates.
This chapter does not seek to address issues relating to waste and the proposals are not expected to contribute to this objective.

Page 35
12. Accessibility and Mobility: To maximise the accessibility for all in and around London and increase the proportion of journeys made by sustainable transport modes (particularly public transport, walking and cycling).
The proposals in this chapter do not address transport modes and accessibility in the capital and there will be no effects on accessibility and mobility. There are important synergies between effective transport provision and effective and productive business environment. Transport is specifically addressed in Chapter 5.

13. Built and Historic Environment: To enhance and protect the existing built environment (including the architectural distinctiveness, townscape/landscape and archaeological heritage) and landscapes, and ensure new buildings and spaces and appropriately designed.
Although the proposals within the chapter aim to help promote the economy of London, it does not include proposals that relate to developing the built environment and no there will be no effects on the built and historic environment.

14. Liveability and Place: To create sustainable, mixed use environments that promote long-term social cohesion, sustainable lifestyles, safety and security, and a sense of place.
The proposals in this chapter do not address lifestyles or communities and there will be no effects on liveability and place.

15. Open Space: To protect and enhance natural open space in London.
The proposals in this chapter do not address issues related to open space and there will be no effects against this objective.

16. Air Quality: To improve Londons air quality.
The proposals in this chapter do not address issues related to air quality in the capital and there will be no effects against this objective.

Page 36
Creating the environment for business Summary of key findings
4.5.3
Proposals which aim at maintaining London as a world class business location will be positive and are considered to significantly contribute to the economy and employment in the city. Improved co-ordination and monitoring of promotion activities will help ensure value for money and effectiveness of these activities. The development of trade strategies are likely to be key to Londons ability to continue to play an important role in the global market place, and the assistance to SMEs invaluable given that they will lack the capability to fund such activities themselves. It is considered that there will be indirect positive equality effects from the development of trade strategy with India and China as different businesses interact although the scale of the impact is uncertain.
4.5.4
Appraisal of specific proposals within Chapter 1
A detailed appraisal of each proposal set within the chapter against the sustainability objectives is provided in Table 4.3.
Table 4.3
Appraisal of Proposals in Chapter 1 in comparison with SA Objectives

Climate Change Mitigation and Energy
Water Quality & Water Resources
Flood Risk and Climate Change Adaptation
Built and Historic Environment
Regeneration & Land-Use
Accessibility and Mobility
Health and Well-being
Liveability and Place
Stable Economy
Employment
Open Space
Biodiversity
Proposal
Proposal 1A: The Mayor will work with partners to strengthen the promotion of London as a global leader and will encourage promotional agencies to work collaboratively. Proposal 1B: The Mayor and GLA Group will work with the London Organising Committee of the Olympic Games (LOCOG) to promote London to the world, taking full advantage of the 2012 Games opportunity. Proposal 1C: The Mayor will work with partners to develop a comprehensive international trade strategy to increase Londons exports, particularly in rapidly developing markets such as India and China.
++
++
The detailed appraisal of proposals highlighted the potential wide ranging opportunities that 2012 Olympics may present to promote London to the world (Proposal 1B) with potential tourism and investment benefits. In addition,
Page 37
Air Quality
Equalities
Housing
Waste
it was considered that the strong environmental and social theme of the development of the Olympic and Paralympics site and the Legacy Masterplan may impact on Londons sense of well-being around the time of event and, if successful, include useful lessons for future regeneration projects. Proposal 1C is significant to the longterm stability of the economy (and contributes to the objective) as the link with economies of China and India will be important to diversify market opportunities for Londons firms as well as potential positive indirect cultural and social benefits.
4.5.5
Uncertainty
There is some uncertainty regarding the potential success of promotional activities to stimulate the economy in times of recession. Global market factors will be an important influence economic recovery and the economic objectives of the chapter.
4.5.6
Mitigation and enhancement
No further mitigation or enhancement has been identified in the appraisal of this chapter.
4.6
Chapter 2 Improving Londons Competitiveness

4.6.1
The chapter contains proposals primarily intended to deliver the second objective of the revised EDS: Objective 2: to ensure that London has the most competitive business environment in the world. The chapter includes a number of proposals that aim to strengthen Londons economic productivity and competitiveness by support for further innovation, supporting businesses, removing barriers to effective business, and tackling weaknesses that prevent investment. The revised EDS recognises that improvements to the overall quality of life in London are central to this objective and includes some proposals that seek to improve the environment, improve health, crime and recreational opportunities for Londoners. The specific proposals include:
Proposal 2A: The Mayor will work with partners to further develop Londons capacity for innovation, particularly for SMEs, by encouraging collaboration across sectors, promoting more productive links between business and academia, providing support for innovative activities, promoting entrepreneurial skills and helping in accessing funding. Proposal 2B: The Mayor will promote cost effective business support programmes for Londons businesses, and especially its SMEs, working with central government, the LDA, local authorities and business representative organisations in London. Proposal 2C: The Mayor will monitor the factors affecting Londons competitiveness so as to identify where corrective action is needed to address factors having a negative effect.
Page 38

Proposal 2D: The Mayor will continue to be an active champion of business and will lobby government and encourage an open and competitive business-friendly environment and a flexible and skilled labour market. Proposal 2E: The Mayor will work with partners to ensure costs to business are kept as low as realistically possible. Proposal 2F: The Mayor will work with the neighbouring regions to achieve mutual economic benefits. Proposal 2G: The Mayor will work with boroughs and other partners to improve the quality of the environment in London. Proposal 2H: The Mayor will work with the NHS and partners to improve health in London and reduce health inequalities. Proposal 2i: The Mayor will work with partners to improve and promote Londons overall cultural, sporting and entertainment offer. Proposal 2J: The Mayor will work with the Metropolitan Police, boroughs and other partners to increase safety, drive down crime and particularly to counter business crime in the capital.
4.6.2
Appraisal of Chapter 2
The proposals in this chapter are not primarily aimed at addressing KEY EFFECTS: Neutral regeneration or land-use issues; these issues are covered by Chapter The proposals may indirectly contribute to 5. However, a number of proposals may contribute indirectly to this regeneration through proposals which seek to improve the quality of the environment and provide objective. For example; proposal 2G aims at improving the quality cultural and sporting facilities. of the environment by planting more trees and improving Londons most degraded places. Proposal 2I promotes the provision of However it is considered proposals here would achieve regeneration in isolation but would need to cultural, sporting and entertainment facilities which can also form part of larger regeneration strategy. positively contribute to regeneration plans of local areas. The transformation of the physical environment is an important component that can contribute to the regeneration of a local area and drive economic development and it is expected that where such measures are undertaken this could positively contribute to regeneration of local areas in conjunction with other regeneration plans.
Proposal 2G seeks to improve the quality of the environment in London by extending the network of green spaces and improving the quality and sustainability of the environment as set out in the Mayors Leading to a Greener London. It is assumed that the enhancement of green spaces will prioritise Biodiversity Action Plan (BAP) species to maximise contributions to this objective. This proposal is expected to positively contribute to the creating and maintaining of spaces that support biodiversity in London.

Proposals which aim to extend the network and quality of green spaces will positively contribute to creating habitats supportive of biodiversity.
Page 39
Londoners, in general, report higher rates of good health than the rest of England, but that there remain significant health inequalities within London both regionally and ethnically. For example, there is a wide range in the average life expectancy for men and women within London with Kensington and Chelsea recording the highest and Tower Hamlets and Newham among the lowest (Health Inequalities Strategy, 2009).

Proposal 2H seeks to improve provision of healthcare services and reduce inequalities which will strongly contribute to this objective. Proposals 2J and 2I seek to improve peoples wider quality of life which can improve general levels of health and well-being
Proposal 2H puts forward the Mayors Health Inequalities Strategy which aims to reduce health inequalities in the capital through helping Londoners to overcome economic and social barriers to good health (which underpin many health inequalities). It includes measures which aim to increase access to, and equitable provision of, health and social care services. The proposal recognises community led approaches to improving quality of life, and the importance of voluntary sector, as well as addressing the wider determinants of health such as the empowerment of individuals and communities and promoting the uptake of sport and exercise. Consequently, this proposal is expected to directly and positively contribute to improving health and wellbeing of Londoners and reducing health inequalities. Proposal 2I seeks to improve Londons cultural, sporting and entertainment offer whilst proposal 2G aims at improving the quality of the environment. Enjoying such activities and the experience of the natural environment are important contributors to health and can help reduce stress and enjoy more well-balanced lifestyles. It is noted that reductions in crime levels (as supported by proposal 2J) can help heighten peoples enjoyment of the region and reduce levels of stress and anxiety. However, there is a lack of detail on what measures will be undertaken to reduce crime or on tackling the wider causes of crime and the success of this proposal is uncertain.
Proposals (2A and 2B) in this chapter include business support with a particular focus on SMEs. Where SME business support is directed at communities and target groups that may experience barriers or exclusion there may be positive effects for equality.

There may be positive effects for equality through proposals which promote SME business support and reduce costs to businesses. There will also be positive effects from
proposals which seek to increase It is noted that the stated dual objectives of: a focus on the business support provision of, and access to health solutions that maximise returns to the London economy; as well as, delivering services and cultural facilities. equality objectives, may sometimes be at odds with one another. For example, business start-ups that deliver the greatest equality objectives may be different to those that deliver the greatest returns to the economy and may require very different support instruments.
Proposal 2E proposes to reduce costs to business and any such savings to smaller businesses may be critical to their survival and is expected to positively contribute to equality objectives.
Page 40
A more equitable geographic provision of cultural services is promoted in proposal 2I which supports a greater distribution of arts and cultural facilities in outer London. This proposal could improve accessibility to these facilities by those parts of the population who currently experience travel and financial barriers to accessing the facilities currently concentrated in central London. Proposal 2H is expected to significantly contribute to reducing health inequality in London.
Proposal 2E seeks to reduce the costs to business primarily in the Central Activities Zone (CAZ) and Canary Wharf, but also in other areas of London. This proposal could include addressing the provision of workspaces, transport accessibility or housing. Where measures relate to supporting supply of housing in the capital to reduce the costs of living and thereby the costs of labour there could be positive effects on housing.

There could positive effects for housing if proposal 2E to address costs to business addresses this cost issue.
There is a key focus in this chapter on developing business skills and enterprise capability (i.e. developing the skills that may be important to turn an idea into a sellable product) of Londons citizens and include measures such as promoting linkages with universities to extend knowledge creation into the business world. This can positively contribute to increasing skills and knowledge in business and creating rewarding employment opportunities.

Proposals which contribute to improvements in business skills can positively contribute to career progression and rewarding jobs. Support for SMEs can have positive employment effects.
The focus on increasing skills and knowledge can also have beneficial social effects through improving career progression and incomes and will require some effort to ensure that target groups that are most in need (in terms of skills barriers to participating in the labour market) can be reached by proposals. Proposal 2A in this chapter includes a focus on business support, particularly for SMEs. SMEs are important employers, accounting for 49% of private sector employment in London (Focus on London 2008) and supporting their development and survival will positively contribute to increasing long term employment opportunities in the capital. It is considered that proposals 2E, 2F, 2H and 2I may all indirectly contribute to supporting employment objectives through, for example expanding health care or leisure facilities or enhancing economic integration between the regions.
7. Stable Economy: To encourage a strong, diverse and stable economy and to improve the resilience of businesses. This should also support the development of an efficient, low carbon economy (including new green technologies) that minimises
Page 41
unsustainable resource use.
Economies of agglomeration or clustering refer to the benefits that firms KEY EFFECTS: Major positive obtain from being located near to each other. This could include Positive economic effects may be felt from proposals which promote linkages both networking and knowledge sharing, access to larger and specialised between institutions and businesses and labour market and suppliers who are attracted themselves by the cluster between regions which can build on advantages of agglomeration in the capital. of businesses. The links between clustering and productivity, Various proposals seek to maintain a particularly for service sectors such as business and financial services, business friendly environment and monitor the 9 factors affecting Londons productivity. The are demonstrated in Graham, 2006 . Proposal 2A attempts to capitalise extent to which these proposals can positively on the dense agglomeration of businesses clusters and the potential affect the economy is uncertain at this stage. benefits thereof by stimulating linkages, collaboration and knowledge Proposals which contribute to quality of life of Londoners can indirectly and positively affect interactions. This is further supported by proposal 2F which seeks to the economy through improved productivity of its workforce. facilitate the collaboration between businesses in London with neighbouring regions to achieve mutual economic benefits. It is proposed that there are benefits, for example, through linkages with the knowledge hubs of Oxford and Cambridge. This will positively contribute to innovation and productivity of Londons businesses. In addition, this proposal includes consideration of the potential for sharing the costs of infrastructure that benefits multiple regions. Where costs of investment in infrastructure are shared this could result in efficiency savings to the public sector However the extent to which this will positively affect the economy can only be determined at an individual project stage. Proposals 2C, 2D and 2E focus on helping London maintain its vantage point as the primary place to do business (as measured in Cushman and Wakefields 2008 European Cities Monitor). This is particularly important in the context of increasing global competition from new economic centres. Proposal 2C proposes to monitor factors affecting Londons productivity and the outcomes of this proposal are dependent on what actions were identified and undertaken to improve the factors and are therefore uncertain at this stage. Proposal 2D focuses on lobbying and campaigning with the view to maintaining a business-friendly environment however the success of this proposal is dependent on the Mayors ability to influence national policy on, for example, tax setting which is done at the national level. Proposal 2E proposes to keep public sector costs as low as possible and is expected to contribute positively to this objective although there is a lack of clarity in specific measures that will be undertaken. Proposals in this chapter (2G, 2H, 2I, 2J) also focus on improving the quality of life for Londoners. These proposals, whilst having positive social effects, can also positively contribute to economic objectives, for example higher levels of health and well-being can contribute to reduced rates of absenteeism and increased efficiency of
Investigating the link between productivity and agglomeration for UK industries, Graham, 2006, Centre for Transport Studies Imperial College London
Page 42
workers. Consequently these proposals are expected to make a significant positive contribution to this economic objective.
This chapter does not specifically seek to address issues of flood risk and KEY EFFECTS: Uncertain/positive climate change adaptation. Proposal 2F does however promote There could be positive effects for climate change adaptation through collaboration collaboration with neighbouring regions economically which could include with neighbouring regions but the extent of the creation of relevant shared infrastructure. Where this relates to flood this cannot be determined at this stage. risk or climate change infrastructure there could provide a long term and positive contribution to this objective. However, the likelihood of this coming to fruition cannot be determined at this point as there are no firm projects laid out in the strategy.
The proposals put forward in this chapter may have both positive and negative environmental effects: Proposal 2A may support innovation and stimulate development in green technologies with knock on benefits to climate change mitigation objectives; and Proposal 2F proposes to share the costs of transport, water and energy infrastructure with neighbouring regions ensuring that key infrastructure to mitigate the effects of climate change are brought forward.
KEY EFFECTS: Uncertain

Policies supporting innovation and collaboration with neighbouring regions could result in positive effects but the extent of this is uncertain at this stage. Negative effects could be associated with increased economic growth but other chapters in the EDS and national and international legislation will reduce the significance of this effect.
However, economic growth (as supported by this chapter) is often associated with negative environmental externalities (such as greater emissions from industrial and power generation activities, increased congestion with associated air quality effects, and increased demand for scarce and stressed resources) and so a positive overall outcome will only result where such growth occurs sustainably.
Proposal 2F proposes to share the costs of transport, water and energy infrastructure with neighbouring regions, where this relates to water infrastructure there could be positive effects but the outcome of this proposal is uncertain at this stage.

There could be positive effects through collaboration with neighbouring regions but the extent of this cannot be determined at this stage.
11. Waste: To minimise the production of waste across all sectors and increase re-use, recycling, remanufacturing and
Page 43
recovery rates.
Proposal 2F proposes to share the costs of transport, water, waste and energy infrastructure with neighbouring regions, where this relates to waste infrastructure that succeeds in diverting waste from landfill there could be positive effects but the outcome of this proposal is uncertain at this stage.

There could be positive effects through collaboration with neighbouring regions but the extent of this cannot be determined at this stage
Ensuring accessibility and mobility is important to enabling all Londoners participate in the opportunities that London has to offer. The focus on increasing the provision of arts and cultural facilities in Outer London in proposal 2I can positively contribute to improving accessibility to these facilities and have positive impacts on equality. Most of these facilities are currently located in central London and expanding their geographic distribution will positively contribute to making these more accessible to people who currently may experience financial or travel barriers to accessing these.

Proposals which seek to increase the provision of arts and cultural facilities, especially in Outer London will positively contribute to accessibility of these facilities. There could be positive effects through collaboration with neighbouring regions but the extent of this cannot be determined at this stage
Proposal 2F proposes to share the costs of transport infrastructure with neighbouring regions, where this proposal succeeds in improving or creating new transport infrastructure there could be positive effects but the outcome of this proposal is uncertain at this stage.
Proposal 2G seeks to improve the quality of the environment. One of the ways it aims to achieve this is through maintaining and building on Londons strong heritage in its built environment. The Mayor intends to use his planning powers to offer design advice and guidance and through use of the LDAs London Housing Design Guide. Consequently this proposal is expected to contribute to maintaining the quality and character of Londons built and historic environment but on its own is unlikely to have significant effects.

Proposals intent to improve the quality of the environment through appropriate and visually pleasing design which can help maintain Londons the character of Londons built environment but is unlikely, on its own, to significantly affect this objective.
14. Liveability and Place: To create sustainable, mixed use environments that promote long-term social cohesion, sustainable
Page 44
lifestyles, safety and security, and a sense of place.
The physical environments in which people live are important to social cohesion, well-being and health, as well as creating a sense of identify that underpin communities. Proposal 2G aims at improving the quality of environment through for example planting trees, expanding network of green spaces and creating architecture that is visually pleasing and culturally distinct.

Proposals which seek to improve the quality of the environment increase the provision of arts and cultural facilities can positively contribute to creating a sense of vibrancy and place for communities.
Proposal 2I promotes the creation of arts and cultural facilities in outer London. Where new facilities are located in particular local communities this can support the establishment of a local community identity and act as a focal point that can generate social cohesion. Proposal 2J promotes working with the Metropolitan Police Authority to reduce crime in the capital. It is noted that if successful this proposal can contribute to long-term social cohesion and make communities happier and safer places to live. However there is a lack of clarity on measures that will be implemented or on tackling the wider causes of crime. Overall the proposals in this chapter are expected to positively contribute to creating a sense of place in local neighbourhoods making them more attractive and safer places to live.
London has a variety and diverse amount of open space but that a significant amount has been lost due to new development (Mayor of London (2009) Annual Monitoring Report 5, GLA, London). Proposal 2G includes aims to extend the network of green spaces and improve the quality and sustainability of the environment as laid out in the Mayors Leading to a Greener London. This can positively contribute to enhancing open space in London.

Proposals to improve and extend the network of green spaces in London will have positive effects for open space.
Proposal 2G outlines the Mayors plans to issue a revised Air Quality Strategy for London, the revised EDS does not outline specific measures which will be undertaken but it is expected that this strategy will positively contribute to improving air quality in the capital.

There may be positive effects for air quality through the implementation of the Air Quality Strategy for London.
4.6.3
Summary of key findings
The proposals in this chapter strongly support the growth and development of the economy by for example promoting collaboration and linkages as well as maintaining a business friendly environment. The focus on the
Page 45
development of skills and enterprise capability in the chapter is expected to have a positive effect on career progression and increased incomes of those affected. The proposals in the chapter also support a range of quality of life objectives, whilst these will have positive social effects on for example improved health and well-being, the can also positively contribute to improved productivity and economic objectives. Business support policies which are targeted at target communities (e.g. BAME) can positively impact equality. The chapter will have positive environmental effects for open space and diversity. The promotion of appropriate design and architecture that is aesthetically pleasing can positively affect the built and historic environment.
4.6.4
Table 4.4

Stable Economy
Employment
Open Space
Biodiversity
Proposal
Proposal 2A: The Mayor will work with partners to further develop Londons capacity for innovation, particularly for SMEs, by encouraging collaboration across sectors, promoting more productive links between business and academia, providing support for innovative activities, promoting entrepreneurial skills and helping in accessing funding. Proposal 2B: The Mayor will promote cost effective business support programmes for Londons businesses, and especially its SMEs, working with central government, the LDA, local authorities and business representative organisations in London. Proposal 2C: The Mayor will monitor the factors affecting Londons competitiveness so as to identify where corrective action is needed to address factors having a negative effect.
++
?/+
++
?/+ ?/+
Proposal 2D: The Mayor will continue to be an active champion of business and will lobby government and encourage an open and competitive business-friendly environment and a flexible and skilled labour market. Proposal 2E: The Mayor will work with partners to
? 0
? 0
?/+ ?/+ + 0
? +
?/+ ?/+ + ?/+
? 0
? 0
? 0
? 0
? +
? 0
? 0
? 0
? 0
Page 46
Air Quality
Equalities
Housing
Waste
Stable Economy
Employment
Open Space
Biodiversity
Proposal
ensure costs to business are kept as low as realistically possible. Proposal 2F: The Mayor will work with the neighbouring regions to achieve mutual economic benefits. Proposal 2G: The Mayor will work with boroughs and other partners to improve the quality of the environment in London. Proposal 2H: The Mayor will work with the NHS and partners to improve health in London and reduce health inequalities. Proposal 2i: The Mayor will work with partners to improve and promote Londons overall cultural, sporting and entertainment offer. Proposal 2J: The Mayor will work with the Metropolitan Police, boroughs and other partners to increase safety, drive down crime and particularly to counter business crime in the capital.
+ +
0 +
0 +
0 0
+ 0
+ 0
?/++ ?/+ ?/+ + 0 0
+ 0
+ 0
+ 0
0 +
+ +
0 ++
++
?/+ ?/+
?/+
?/+
The detailed appraisal of proposals highlighted the potential long term and significant contribution Proposals 2A and 2B may have on the stability of Londons economy, 2G on open space objective and 2H on health and wellbeing. The effects of some proposals were uncertain, particularly: Proposal 2C which depended on the actual actions taken as a result of the proposed monitoring (these could be significant and positive in economic terms if it is clear that lack of such information is a market failure and prevents new entry/investment in London); Proposal 2D which depended on the Mayors ability to affect wider UK government policy (these could be significant social and economic impact if proposal can result in greater market flexibility); and Proposal 2J which lacked any detail or recognition of wider long term impact activities in this area may have on social and economic objectives.
4.6.5
Uncertainty
There are some effects of proposals that are uncertain: Proposal 2C proposes to monitor factors affecting Londons productivity. The outcomes of this proposal are dependent on what actions were identified and undertaken to improve the factors and are uncertain at this stage.
Page 47
Air Quality
Equalities
Housing
Waste
Proposal 2E proposes to keep public sector driven costs as low as possible, this objective will contribute positively to London as an attractive place to do business although there is a lack of clarity in specific measures that will be undertaken. Proposal 2D focuses on lobbying and campaigning with the view to maintaining a business-friendly environment however the success of this proposal is dependent on the Mayors ability to influence national policy. Effects of proposal 2F are not clear at this time as it would require greater detail of specific joint initiatives with neighbouring regions which may not be available at this time.
4.6.6
It will be important in order to ensure that some of the positive effects of some proposals are secured that some more detail may be required enhance the effectiveness, particularly regarding the focus of business and skill support, to those who stand to take greatest benefit from it. There were few specific measures to address short term recessionary impacts, although it is accepted given the timescale for the plan that these are covered elsewhere.
4.7
Chapter 3 Transforming to a Low Carbon Economy

4.7.1
The chapter contains proposals primarily intended to deliver the third objective of the EDS: Objective 3: to drive Londons transition to a low carbon economy and to maximise the economic opportunities this will create. The chapter includes a number of proposals related to a low carbon economy. The specific proposals include:
Proposal 3A: The Mayor will lead by example and will work with partners to ensure that London realises the great economic opportunities associated with the move to a low carbon economy. Proposal 3B: The Mayor will work with partners and lobby government to develop the scale of investment and environmental infrastructure needed to support a low carbon London. Proposal 3C: The Mayor will encourage business to participate in exemplary projects to cut carbon such as the creation of a showcase Green Enterprise District and of Low Carbon Zones. Proposal 3D: The Mayor will work with partners to ensure Londons workforce has the right skills so businesses fully realise the employment opportunities from the global move to a low carbon economy.
Page 48
Proposal 3E: The Mayor will create a policy framework to address climate change and will work with private, public and voluntary sector partners to improve their environmental performance.
4.7.2
This chapter does not specifically seek to address regeneration and land use issues (covered in chapter 5) and the proposals in this chapter are not expected to contribute to this objective.

This chapter does not specifically seek to address issues relating to biodiversity and the proposals are not expected to contribute to this objective.

The proposals in this chapter do not specifically seek to address the health KEY EFFECTS: Minor positive and well-being of Londons population (these are covered in Chapter 2). Proposals which seek to reduce emissions may improve local air quality and thereby Proposals may however have positive effects for the health and wellbeing improve general levels of health and wellof citizens in the capital. Air pollution is currently estimated to reduce the being in the capital. life expectancy of every person in the UK by an average of 7-8 months (Defra, 2007). The proposals in general support the reduction of emissions in the capital and where this contributes to an improvement in the local air quality it can indirectly contribute to improved general levels of health and well-being. The extent, in terms of scale and location, of this effect cannot be reliably ascertained at this stage and is dependent on localised reductions in emissions and the effects are uncertain.
Page 49
This chapter does not specifically seek to address issues relating to equality (this is covered in other chapters of the revised EDS) and the proposals are not expected to contribute to this objective.

This chapter does not specifically seek to address issues relating to housing (this is covered in chapters 4 and 5) and the proposals here are not expected to contribute to this objective.

The investment required to shift London to a low carbon economy (e.g. in the creation of green infrastructure such as the move to a decentralised energy supply) is expected to support and create a significant amount of direct jobs and business opportunities as well as create wider supply chain and multiplier effects and positively contribute to creating employment opportunities for the city.

The shift to a low carbon economy is likely to create a wide range of green jobs Proposals which aim to develop low carbon skills may have positive effects on incomes and career progression.
Proposals which aim at the development of low carbon skills may have positive employment effects including raising of incomes and facilitating career progression. It will also help to create the supply side conditions necessary to take advantage of the economic opportunities presented by the shift to a low carbon economy. The EDS notes that skills may not necessarily be new but may be additional to those people already have and requires support in the forms of, for example; short course technical training.
There are significant economic opportunities presented through the growth and development of green sectors and industries. Although there will be costs associated with for example, implementing the necessary infrastructure to support the low carbon economy, research has suggested that the benefits in terms of jobs and GVA can exceed these costs (Prospectus for London, the Low Carbon Capital report). The Mayor has proposed a Low Carbon Taskforce (Proposal 3A) to identify and maximise the potential economic

There are significant business and job opportunities associated with the growth in green industries and sectors. There are longer term benefits from London being a leader in the shift to a low carbon economy. There may be negative effects from increased costs to businesses from upgrading energy efficient systems. Negative effects would likely be short term and be cost neutral to positive in the longer term.
Page 50
opportunities and existing LDA programmes (e.g. business support) will include targeting of green sectors. London could derive a benefit from the principle of the first mover advantage. This refers to the benefits gained with being among the first in a new market segment e.g. through technological leadership. Considering the global trend in moving towards green and low carbon technologies there could be significant wider benefits for London with being seen as a leader in this regard. The establishment of exemplary projects such as the proposed Green Enterprise District in the Thames Gateway and the Low Carbon Zones may have important beneficial impacts through giving boost to new and emerging green industries or sectors that could benefit from increased exposure and support. Proposal 3B will attempt to promote London as a leader in low carbon industries amongst other global cities by focussing on promoting access to finance and competitive tax regime as two key tenets of a programme of promoting London to green industries. There is expected to be some increased costs to businesses to upgrade to more energy efficient, water and waste systems driven by increased regulatory encouragement to switch to more efficient systems and low carbon technologies. However, investment in many of these measures will have positive payback over time and it is expected that the long-term effect would be cost-neutral to cost-beneficial. This is especially the case as there are a number of programmes that support businesses, such as the Building Energy Efficiency Programme, which identifies cost neutral means to achieve energy efficient measures.
Proposal 3E includes a focus on helping businesses adapt to future climatic conditions (e.g. hotter summers) through the Mayors planned building design advice. It also includes provision for exploring methods of interaction with SMEs to help them develop business continuity and risk management plans to increase their awareness of and adaptation to climate change. These actions are expected to positively contribute to businesses incorporating issues of climate change adaptation in their business planning.

Proposals which seek to help businesses adapt to the future impacts of climate change (through building design or continuity plans) are likely to have positive longer term effects.
Reducing carbon emissions is a major focus of proposals in this chapter and the benefits to this objective will be positive and significant.

Reducing emissions is a major theme of this chapter and the effects will be positive and significant. This will be achieved through infrastructure provision and reducing demand for electricity.
This will be achieved through providing the infrastructure (proposal 3B) to move to a low carbon economy as well as reducing demand for purchased and generated electricity (proposal 3E) for example through energy efficiency awareness programmes to businesses. These programmes will contribute to improved resource efficiency and more sustainable development patterns.
Page 51
Proposal 3A seeks to promote this through direct funding, for example via the proposed London Green Fund which would invest in retrofitting, decentralised energy, waste and transport. The Mayor is also producing a Climate Change and Energy Strategy to which will outline policies to tackle climate change.
The South East is already water stressed and London has a higher than KEY EFFECTS: Major positive national average water consumption: Londoners consume approximately 168 Proposals aim to work with to manage and reduce water consumption. This litres of water per day compared to a national average of 150 litres per person will have positive effects for water per day (GLA/Entec, 2009). This is therefore an important issue for Londons resources. future development. Proposal 3E aims at working with businesses to improve their environmental performance and proposal 3B proposes to work collaboratively with water companies to manage Londons water consumption. This is clearly important and expected to positively contribute to maintaining Londons water resources.
In 2006/07, London had the lowest proportion of recycled household municipal KEY EFFECTS: Major positive waste of any English region (Focus on London, 2008). The continued growth Proposals aim to work with to manage and reduce waste. This will have and development of the capital can, if it continues in a similar way to growth in positive effects for reducing the the past, increase the usage of materials and the generation of waste. Proposal amount of waste produced by Londoners. 3E aims at working with businesses to improve their environmental performance; this will include provision for advising on reducing waste which will positively contribute to this objective. Proposal 3B promotes the creation of infrastructure, where appropriate, that promotes the reduction of waste to landfill. This is expected to positively contribute to this objective.
Proposal 3B supports the shift to an alternative mode of transport (electric vehicles) and can positively contribute to the accessibility and mobility objective.

Proposals which encourage the shift to electric vehicles promote the shift to an alternative mode of transport and will have a positive long term effect.
Page 52
This chapter does not seek to address issues relating to the built and historic environment and the proposals are not expected to contribute to this

This chapter does not seek to address issues relating to liveability and place and the proposals are not expected to contribute to this objective.

This chapter does not seek to address issues relating to open space and the proposals are not expected to contribute to this objective.

There may be indirect and positive long term effects for Londons air quality KEY EFFECTS: Minor positive as a result of policies aimed at reducing emissions. For example proposal 3B, There may be indirect and positive long term effects for Londons air in conjunction with work by TfL aims at promoting the take-up of electric quality as a result of policies aimed at vehicles and limiting the need to travel by car. Road transport, and in reducing emissions particular older diesel vehicles, is the main cause of air pollution in London. Where this proposal succeeds in promoting cleaner vehicles and reduced vehicle use in general, this will positively contribute to improving Londons air quality in the long term.
4.7.3
The proposals in this chapter are expected to significantly contribute to reducing energy use and climate change mitigation and will help to move London towards improved resource efficiency and more sustainable development patterns. The proposals are expected to contribute positively to a range of environmental effects including reducing water usage, waste and improving air quality. It also includes provision to help businesses adapt to the future effects of climate change. In promoting the move to a low carbon economy, this chapter may also create a variety of business and employment opportunities, the benefits of which are expected to outweigh the associated costs (such as upgrading
Page 53
water, waste and energy efficiency systems as well as implementing adaptation measures). These are, however, expected to be neutral or potentially cost-beneficial in the long term.
4.7.4
Table 4.5

Livability and Place
Stable Economy
Employment
Open Space
Biodiversity
Proposal
Proposal 3A: The Mayor will lead by example and will work with partners to ensure that London realises the great economic opportunities associated with the move to a low carbon economy. Proposal 3B: The Mayor will work with partners and lobby government to develop the scale of investment and environmental infrastructure needed to support a low carbon London. Proposal 3C: The Mayor will encourage business to participate in exemplary projects to cut carbon such as the creation of a showcase Green Enterprise District and of Low Carbon Zones. Proposal 3D: The Mayor will work with partners to ensure Londons workforce has the right skills so businesses fully realise the employment opportunities from the global move to a low carbon economy. Proposal 3E: The Mayor will create a policy framework to address climate change and will work with private, public and voluntary sector partners to improve their environmental performance.
++
+ + ++
++
?/+ ?/+ ?/+ ?/+ ?/+
?/+
+ + ++
++
The detailed appraisal of proposals highlighted the potential for long term and significant contribution that Proposals 3A, 3B and 3E may have on the stability of Londons economy. The effect of Proposal 3A includes the consideration of the longer term contribution to environmental targets as a result of promotion of better building and resource use as well as business support. Proposal 3B ensures that key environmental objectives are at the core of the revised EDS as infrastructure will benefit business and London. There is some uncertainty regarding the specific effects of Proposal 3C as the impacts depend on nature of support and sectors promoted. These may be
Page 54
Air Quality
Equalities
Housing
Waste
significant and positive in economic terms if it is clear that lack of such information from demonstration projects is a market failure and currently prevents investment of this nature in London. Businesses may benefit from agglomeration/clustering or if there is (in the case of waste/recycling business who are considered bad neighbours) a lack of sufficient designated locations to develop.
4.7.5
Uncertainty
The construction of some new infrastructure, for example waste to energy plants, could negatively affect the built and historic environment. The extent of this is uncertain at this stage and can only be determined at an individual project level where appropriate design and mitigation can be identified.
4.7.6
4.8
Chapter 4 Extending Opportunity to all Londoners

4.8.1
The chapter contains proposals primarily intended to deliver the fourth objective of the revised EDS: Objective 4: to give all Londoners the opportunity to take part in Londons economic success, access sustainable employment and progress in their careers. The chapter aims to address some of the fundamental issues for Londoners dealing with issues such as child poverty and worklessness. In addition, proposals that aim to help extend the opportunities and support available may help ensure that the benefits of economic growth can be better distributed. The specific proposals include:
Proposal 4A: The Mayor will work with partners to help to ensure that all Londons children get a good start in life, and encourage relevant agencies to work towards the governments target to end child poverty being achieved in London by 2020. Proposal 4B: The Mayor will work with partners to ensure that all London's young people have appropriate opportunities to gain the knowledge, skills and confidence to succeed in London's labour market. Proposal 4C: The Mayor will work with partners, particularly through the LSEB, to raise Londons employment rate and to reduce the employment rate gap for disadvantaged groups by removing barriers and disincentives to work and providing more personalised and joined up services to help people into employment and career progression. Proposal 4D: The Mayor will work with the LSEB and other partners to significantly improve training and employability support to help people secure and retain a job with a particular focus on neighbourhoods with high concentrations of worklessness. Proposal 4E: The Mayor will work with the LSEB and other partners to help meet the aspirations of Londoners to acquire relevant skills and
Page 55
qualifications to progress in their careers. Proposal 4F: The Mayor will work with the Homes and Communities Agency, boroughs and other partners to ensure there is sufficient and suitable housing to meet the needs of Londons growing population and workforce, and to address problems of homelessness and overcrowding.
4.8.2
Policies relating to regeneration are specifically addressed in chapter 5, however proposal 4F seeks to address the delivery of housing, including affordable housing, in the capital and can positively contribute to regeneration plans for a local area, although the extent of this will be determined at a project specific level. Projects will also be linked to measures laid out in the London Plan and specific commitments from the HCA.
KEY EFFECTS: Uncertain/positive

The delivery of housing, including affordable housing, can positively contribute to existing regeneration plans for a local area, although the extent of this is uncertain at this stage and can only be determined at a project specific level.
Proposals in this chapter do not seek to specifically address biodiversity objectives and as a result the proposals will not contribute to this objective.

Quality of life can be affected by issues such as having access to adequate KEY EFFECTS: Minor positive housing and rewarding jobs which can help improve self esteem, protect Proposals which improve access to adequate housing and rewarding jobs mental health and give individuals a sense of empowerment. Policies in this can indirectly contribute to improved chapter which address provision of adequate and affordable housing (Proposal levels of health and well-being. 4F) and employment and skills development (proposals 4B, 4C, 4D, and 4E) can therefore indirectly contribute to improved general levels of health and well-being.
Page 56
Child poverty is a significant issue for London where it is KEY EFFECTS: Minor positive estimated that 41% of children live in income poverty compared to Proposals which seek to reduce child poverty will 28% nationally (Focus on London, 2008). Proposal 4A seeks to positively contribute to longer term equality in the capital. address issues relating to child poverty and help give children the Proposals which seek to reduce barriers in the labour best start in life through continued lobbying and awareness raising market will positively contribute to improving equality. of this issue. The proposal sets out programmes of support include Proposals which seek to improve the delivery of the LDAs Childcare Affordability Programme and policies affordable housing will positively contribute to focussing on removing barriers to work faced by parents and skills reducing housing inequality development. Where the Mayors actions increase funding for or enhance the efficiency of the work of the London Child Poverty Commission they can positively contribute to poverty reduction and equality objectives. Inequality in London can be a barrier to economic development and implies that not everyone is sharing in the wealth of the capital. Existing baseline trends highlight that there are some geographic areas which are more deprived in relation to different indicators and inequality can differentially affect Black, Asian and ethnic minority communities as well as and the less able. It is noted that whilst there has been improvement in absolute terms, the gap between age specific unemployment of BAME and the white population remains (Mayor of London (2009) Annual Monitoring Report 5, GLA, London). Proposals 4B, 4C and 4E aim at removing barriers in the labour market which prevent all of Londons population from participating and sharing in the wealth of London. This is important given the inequalities that relate to employment by different population groups, particularly among BAME groups. Consequently, it is considered that the policies within the chapter can positively contribute towards the objective. Proposal 4E seeks to improve the delivery of housing and affordable housing which will positively contribute to reducing inequality with respect to access to housing.
London experiences problems with homelessness, affordability and overcrowding. In general, London has high costs of housing which can act as a deterrent to businesses and workers. Londons population grew by approximately 10% between 1991 and 2006 compared to 5% for the rest of England (Focus on London, 2008). This strong growth is anticipated to continue into the future and requires coherent and farsighted planning in terms of supply of sufficient and adequate housing for the current and future population.

Proposals seek to improve access to affordable housing by target communities and improve delivery of new homes which would be a positive effect. However the extent to which the Mayor is able to influence investment to achieve these objectives is uncertain at this stage.
Page 57
Proposal 4F seeks to address housing, including affordable housing, in London by working with HCA, boroughs and other partners and using his powers to direct investment where there is greatest need. Measures to address the long-term housing needs are set out in the London Housing Strategy. These include delivering more and improving access to low cost homes as well as a better mix of houses, creating mixed communities, improving design quality and standards, greening new homes, developing new delivery mechanisms and tackling homelessness. The success of this proposal in meeting this objective is uncertain at this stage and is dependent on the Mayors ability to influence investment to target areas of greatest need or to increase the delivery rate of housing.
In 2008, 24.3% of Londoners were economically inactive which was 3% higher than the UK average (ONS Labour Market Profile). This chapter includes proposals that will focus on increasing participation of young people, removing barriers and disincentives and improving training and employability support. This will largely be achieved through coordination and partnership activities.

Proposals seek to remove barriers and disincentives in the labour market, increase participation of young people and improve training and employability support which is expected to positively and significantly contribute to employment objectives.
Proposal 4C focuses specifically on removing barriers in the labour market and encouraging greater participation by all groups in society. Despite London being one of the top business centres in the world, it still experiences relatively high levels of unemployment in comparison to the rest of England. There currently exist barriers that prevent certain people, for example within Black, Asian and minority ethnic groups, disabled and single parents from effectively participating. The revised EDS states that issues relating to worklessness are typically more severe in London whilst measures to address them (e.g. DWPs New Deal for lone parents) are often less effective The Mayor proposes to focus on this by lobbying national Government in the design of flexible welfare to work programmes which are tailored to meet the specific needs of the capital. The extent of this proposal is uncertain and depends on the Mayors success in influencing national policies. There is also a strong focus on skills development in this chapter. It is estimated that 50% of Londoners do not have the literacy skills expected of an 11 year-old (GLA, 2008). It is important to target skills attainment at all segments of society. Proposal 4C will positively contribute to this by its focus on the youth, and particularly those caught up in anti-social and criminal behaviour. This proposal seeks to support collaboration with boroughs and schools to deliver education that matches the needs of Londons labour market, supporting the creation of School Academies which will focus on innovative approaches to academic and vocational training. Proposal 4D will promote training and employability through apprenticeships (providing 3,000 new apprenticeships in the GLA family in the next 3 years). Proposal 4D in its promotion of training and employability is expected to positively and significantly contribute to employment. It is proposed that skills and entrepreneurship are promoted through raising aspirations via work experience, internships and advance apprenticeships. There is also a focus on volunteering as a means to widen peoples horizons and thereby raise aspirations and prepare them for the working world. The measures through which the
Page 58
Mayor will promote volunteering are uncertain. The types of actions that will constitute these proposals are not confirmed at this stage. However it is expected that such activities could have positive effects. The proposals in this chapter can positively contribute to increased employment participation rates, improved incomes from improving the skills set and improved productivity. It will also contribute to providing Londoners with the access or means to earn a decent wage and thereby giving people a sense of empowerment through earning their own income. Consequently this chapter is expected to significantly and positively contribute to employment objectives.
Promoting economic activity and employment rates in London will mean more people contributing directly to the economic output of the economy. In addition, more people will be earning incomes which will result in further indirect benefits to the economy through income multiplier effects, this is the further economic activity (jobs, expenditure or income) associated with additional local income, local supplier purchases and longer term development effects. Proposals in this chapter (4C, 4D, 4E, 4F) which result in increased employment rates or skills development will positively contribute to creating stable and diverse economy.

Proposals which increase participation or employment rates will increase the number of people contributing to the economic output of the economy. Proposals which seek to reduce child poverty may have positive longer term effects for the future workforce and positively contribute to the economy.
Proposal 4A (focussing on child poverty) is expected to contribute positively to the economy in the longer term by ensuring that the future workforce has a better start in life. This is positively linked to higher incomes and career progression in adults and can have positive implications for the future workforce and productivity.
This chapter does not seek to specifically address issues relating to flood risk and climate change adaptation and the proposals are not expected to contribute to this objective.

9. Climate Change Mitigation and Energy: To ensure London contributes to global climate change mitigation, achieve greater
Page 59
energy efficiency and reduces its reliance on fossil fuels.
Proposal 4F proposes to support increases to the housing stock. Whilst this KEY EFFECTS: Minor positive may point towards the potential for an increase in emissions, a number of There could be negative impacts through plans and programmes promote increased energy efficiency in homes. For increased development but this will be mitigated through policies which impose example the Mayors Leading to a Greener London and the Code for overall impact of this propose stricter Sustainable Homes design standard promote lowered per capita design standards which will reduce energy consumption of energy due to high insulation, use of condensing boilers consumption of new developments. etc. Commitments in the London Plan lay out a phased approach to increasing the efficiency of all new buildings (Policy 5.2 in the London Plan sets out plans for all dwellings to be zero carbon by 2016). It is expected that this housing proposal may indirectly contribute to this objective.
The provision of new housing that is compliant with design standards in the Code for Sustainable Homes and commitments laid out in the London Plan and London Housing Strategy can help to alter consumption patterns in the home and reduce per capita consumption through use of grey water recycling, dual flush toilets etc. The Mayors Leading to a Greener London, 2009 includes a focus on improving the water efficiency of Londons homes and buildings and will help ensure that new development contributes positively to this objective.

Proposals supporting new housing development may result in long term positive effects through reducing per capita water consumption through altering water usage in new buildings.
The provision of new housing that is compliant with design standards in the Code for Sustainable Homes and commitments laid out in the London Plan and London Housing strategy can help to alter waste generation patterns in the home through provision of recycling facilities with the home, community provision of home composting etc.

Proposals which support new housing development can positively contribute to altering waste generation patterns in the home through compliance with relevant policies for new homes.
Page 60
This chapter does not seek to specifically address issues relating to accessibility and mobility and the proposals are not expected to contribute to this objective.

Proposal 4F seeks to increase housing delivery in London which will result in changes to the built environment and potentially to the setting of historic assets. However, any negative effects are expected to be mitigated by commitments to appropriate and aesthetically pleasing design standards laid out in the London Housing Strategy, London Plan and in the Code for Sustainable Homes. It is expected that the overall effect on this objective will be neutral.

New housing could affect the built environment and historic setting of areas. However negative effects will be mitigated through building design standards laid out in the London Plan, London Housing Strategy and the Code for Sustainable Homes and the overall effect is assessed to be neutral.
Proposals 4B and 4D promote volunteering which can positively KEY EFFECTS: Minor positive contribute to social cohesion and sustainable communities through Proposals that seek to promote volunteering can positively contribute to social cohesion and creating a network of social relationships among people in their own developing social networks from people of communities and help connect people from different backgrounds. It different backgrounds. can also serve as a catalyst in wider civic engagement. Although the Proposals which seek to encourage affordable measures to achieve uptake in volunteering are uncertain at this stage, housing as part of mixed use developments will positively contribute to creating mixed it is expected that proposals that result in increased volunteering are communities. expected to contribute positively to the liveability and place objective. In addition proposal 4F seeks to provide new affordable housing as part of mixed use developments which will positively contribute to creating mixed communities and encourage social cohesion.
This chapter does not seek to specifically address issues relating to open space and the proposals are not expected to contribute to this objective.

Page 61
This chapter does not seek to specifically address issues relating to air quality and the proposals are not expected to contribute to this objective.

4.8.3
The proposals in this chapter are expected to positively contribute to equality objectives through actions to promote awareness of and increase funding for child poverty as well as proposals to remove barriers in the labour market which can increase participation rates by BAME groups, youth, disabled etc. The success of proposals to increase labour force participation and employment rates will have positive economic effects through increasing the number of people engaged in productive activities. Where proposals succeed in increasing volunteering in local communities this can contribute to social cohesion and creating sustainable communities. Housing proposals could positively contribute to positively altering patterns of energy, water and waste consumption through other relevant policies that specify design standards with regards to these issues which promote increased efficiency.
4.8.4
Table 4.6

Stable Economy
Employment
Open Space
Biodiversity
Proposal
Proposal 4A: The Mayor will work with partners to help to ensure that all Londons children get a good start in life, and encourage relevant agencies to work towards the governments target to end child poverty being achieved in London by 2020. Proposal 4B: The Mayor will work with partners to ensure that all London's young people have appropriate opportunities to gain the knowledge, skills and confidence to succeed in London's labour market. Proposal 4C: The Mayor will work with partners, particularly through the LSEB, to raise Londons
++
?/+
?/+
?/+ ?/+
Page 62
Air Quality
Equalities
Housing
Waste
Stable Economy
Employment
Open Space
Biodiversity
Proposal
employment rate and to reduce the employment rate gap for disadvantaged groups by removing barriers and disincentives to work and providing more personalised and joined up services to help people into employment and career progression. Proposal 4D: The Mayor will work with the LSEB and other partners to significantly improve training and employability support to help people secure and retain a job with a particular focus on neighbourhoods with high concentrations of worklessness. Proposal 4E: The Mayor will work with the LSEB and other partners to help meet the aspirations of Londoners to acquire relevant skills and qualifications to progress in their careers. Proposal 4F: The Mayor will work with the Homes and Communities Agency, boroughs and other partners to ensure there is sufficient and suitable housing to meet the needs of Londons growing population and workforce, and to address problems of homelessness and overcrowding.
++
?/+
?/+
?/+
The detailed appraisal of proposals highlighted their importance in the support of equalities and employment objectives, particularly: 4A which is aimed at addressing a key area of child poverty; and 4D with key proposals to support the reduction of overall unemployment, particularly long-term unemployment and worklessness as part of Employment objective. Proposal 4F includes actions that are aimed at actions that are considered will be significant to address housing needs. The potential effect of some proposals (notably, proposal 4C) were considered uncertain given the need for the Mayor to affect national programmes (for example; DWP/Welfare to Work).
4.8.5
Uncertainty
There is uncertainty related to the Mayors ability to significantly influence national welfare policies as may be important to the aims of proposal 4C.
4.8.6
Page 63
Air Quality
Equalities
Housing
Waste
4.9
Chapter 5 Investing in Londons Future

4.9.1
The chapter contains proposals primarily intended to deliver the fifth objective of the revised EDS: Objective 5: to maximise the benefits to London from investment to support growth and regeneration, and from the 2012 Olympic and Paralympic Games and its legacy. The chapter introduces some of the proposals that will affect both public and private investment in London and necessarily includes reference to some of the key spatial and transport proposals included in the London Plan and Transport Strategy that are important to the objectives of the revised EDS. The specific proposals include:
Proposal 5A: The Mayor will work with partners to strengthen the economy across London including removing barriers to outer London fulfilling its potential, and to support the development of town centres in outer and inner London as hubs for their communities and local economies. Proposal 5B: The Mayor will work with partners to ensure that investment sustains and increases Central Londons ability to be competitive, productive and innovative. Proposal 5C: The Mayor and LDA will work with the Olympic Park Legacy Company and other partners to fully seize the unique regeneration opportunity offered by the 2012 Olympic and Paralympic Games. Proposal 5D: The Mayor will work with boroughs, developers and other partners to identify capacity to accommodate large-scale employment and housing development, including in Opportunity Areas, through the planning system, transport proposals and investment support. Proposal 5E: The Mayor and LDA will work with partners to take a co-ordinated and targeted approach to regeneration across London. Proposal 5F: The Mayor will encourage the further development of diverse and attractive neighbourhoods throughout London and will encourage local economic development as an essential ingredient in this. Proposal 5G: The Mayor will work with LDA, TfL and partners to achieve the full economic development benefits of Londons transport schemes and to bring forward the necessary further investment in Londons infrastructure. Proposal 5H: The Mayor will work with partners in the wider South East to achieve mutual economic benefits from investment.
4.9.2
Page 64
The transformation of the physical environment is an important KEY EFFECTS: Minor positive component that can contribute to the regeneration of a local area There are a variety of proposals that support and drive economic development. Proposals 5A, 5D, 5E and 5F in regeneration objectives, especially the improved delivery thereof, in areas in Outer London and this chapter support regeneration objectives in a variety of ways specific town centres identified in the London Plan and areas in London. Specific areas have been identified, for This chapter also seeks to take full advantage of example Outer London and specific town centres identified in the regeneration opportunities associated with the 2012 London Plan (in Proposal 5A) and Opportunity Areas (in Proposal Olympic Games. 5D), although it is expected that beneficial contributions to There is some uncertainty as to the extent of the proposals which will depend on the level of regeneration could be experienced more widely throughout investment that can be secured. Removal of this London as a result of the proposals. Proposals 5E and 5F may uncertainty would lead to a major positive effect. enhance the potential for more effective delivery of regeneration but their expected impact on specific areas cannot be determined at this stage. This chapter is expected to positively contribute to supporting regeneration, although the success of the proposals put forward will depend on the level of investment that can be secured. Proposal 5C seeks to take full advantage of the opportunities for comprehensive regeneration presented by the 2012 Olympic Games by working with the Homes and Communities Agency (HCA) and the borough councils. It is expected that this proposal can significantly and positively contribute to the overall regeneration potential of the 2012 Olympic Games.
A number of proposals in Chapter 5 refer to policies within the London Plan that set out spatially defined development areas and it is possible that some of these areas may impact designated ecological sites.

Proposals that set out spatially defined development areas could have positive or negative effects through potential loss or creation of habitat and effects are dependent on specific details of proposed schemes.
London has five European protected sites: Epping Forest SAC; Lea Valley SPA/Ramsar site; Richmond Park SAC; South West London Waterbodies SPA/Ramsar; and Wimbledon Common SAC. (Source: Natural England (2008). In addition, there are 38 Sites of Special Scientific Interest (SSSI) in London. (Source: Mayor of London (2002). A Habitats Regulation Assessment (HRA) screening report was undertaken as part of the IIA of the London Plan and found that two policies could potentially have significant direct or indirect detrimental effects on European designated sites (London Plan Policy 2.13 Opportunity Areas and Policy 2.17 Strategic Industrial Locations). The HRA proposed wording changes to mitigate the effects to avoid potential effects on designated sites. It is recognised that the implementation of individual projects at a site specific level may have both positive and negative effects through the potential loss or creation of habitat and changes in disturbance during construction and
Page 65
operation. The potential effects will be dependant on the location and specific details of proposed schemes and will be subject to environmental assessment that will identify project specific effects and appropriate mitigation/enhancement which are unknown at the time of the appraisal. It is recognised that there are other policies included in the London Plan to mitigate potential effects at a strategic level.
Proposal 5A in this chapter incorporates actions that are expected to encourage more journeys by foot, bicycle and by public transport. This can indirectly contribute to health and well-being by encouraging more active lifestyles as well as reducing levels of vehicle usage in the capital which can have positive effects on local air quality and health. Proposal 5C relates to the 2012 Olympic Games and could also contribute to positive health benefits in communities by acting as a catalyst to increasing participation in sporting and recreation activities and more active lifestyles in general.

There are positive impacts in terms of encouraging more active lifestyles both through encouraging more journeys by foot and bicycle and through the promotion of the 2012 Olympic Games promoting participation in sporting activities. Proposals which seek to reduce levels of vehicle usage could indirectly improve health through improvements in local air quality. Proposals that will affect reductions in poverty or improved access to services will positively contribute to health and well-being.
Proposals that will affect reductions in poverty or improved access to services (Proposals 5A, 5D, 5G) will have positive effects for health and wellbeing of Londoners.
Proposal 5A in the chapter seeks to direct some development towards KEY EFFECTS: Minor positive Outer London and improve the effectiveness of transport hubs in outer Proposals seek to reduce the disparities in London (identified in the London Plan as Strategic Outer London development that exist between Inner and Outer London and can indirectly promote Development Centres). This may help reduce the disparities that equality through greater access to jobs and currently exist between Inner and Outer London. This promotes equality services in Outer London. This is not considered to be significant. by ensuring a greater access to a greater range of economic opportunities (e.g. jobs and services) to areas and communities that may be less able to take advantage of them due to, for example; transport accessibility or affordability reasons.
Londons population has increased every year since 1988. The latest GLA population projection forecasts that London could experience growth from the current level of 7.56 per cent each year to between 8.79 and 9.11 percent by 2031. Proposal 5D aims to help meet the challenges created by population growth in the city. These proposals are expected to positively

Proposals which aim to influence the rate of housing delivery or maximise delivery around the 2012 Olympic sites can positively contribute to housing.
Page 66
support this objective where the Mayor is able to influence housing delivery, such as the provision of sites or as a result of the 2012 Olympic legacy.
This chapter may indirectly contribute to employment opportunities, for KEY EFFECTS: Minor positive example Proposal 5D, if successful in facilitating large scale employment The proposals can indirectly and positively contribute to employment and housing developments, would then create the conditions for a wide through creating new employment space number of construction related employment opportunities. In addition, this for example in large-scale developments proposal will directly contribute to the supply side conditions to support the or maximising employment in town centres. future growth of economy - Proposal 5B aims to ensure there is sufficient capacity for a range of appropriate workspaces within Central London. Preliminary forecasts estimate that the London economy may contract by 3.4% in 2009 with a recovery in the economy starting some time in 2010 (ONS, Economy and Labour Market Review, May 2009). This appraisal recognises the importance of supply side capacity which will be required to support economic recovery (if and when demand recovers) and where these proposals are successful in increasing the supply of office space it could positively contribute to supporting further growth in employment. Additionally, Proposals 5A and 5F which aim to increase the relative contribution town centres make to employment in London and 5C which can contribute to the creation of variety of employment opportunities associated with the 2012 Olympic Games.
The chapter also seeks to promote the relative economic strength KEY EFFECTS: Minor positive of Central London by maintaining sufficient quality workspaces Supply of adequate employment space can positively are available and by improving the capacity of transport systems contribute to supporting future economic growth. into and out of the City (proposal 5B). According to the 2008 Proposals to improve transport connectivity both within London and with neighbouring regions can European Cities Monitor, the availability and relative value of support and effective and integrated environment for office space are both areas in which London performs less well doing business. compared with other locations. This suggests that a greater The success of proposals in contributing to the amount of better value high quality space may help attract more economy will ultimately be affected by wider international businesses to locate in London. Similarly Proposal macroeconomic factors affecting the global slowdown in economic activity. 5D supports the identification of key sites for large scale employment developments. The success of these supply side policies in contributing to the economy is, however, dependent on wider macroeconomic factors that may affect the demand for space after the slowdown in global economic activity. Proposal 5A will support the development of town centres which can improve their potential for attracting and supporting economic development. Proposal 5C can contribute to fostering the wide range of potential spin-off economic opportunities as a result of the 2012 Olympic Games.
Page 67
It is estimated that around a fifth of Londons 4.6 million jobs are filled by people who live outside the capital (Focus on London, 2007). The economy of London is therefore highly integrated with the neighbouring regions. Proposal 5G supports coordination with Transport for London for delivery of transport networks both within London and with neighbouring regions, particularly in relation to the freight and logistics sector and linking to key growth hubs. This can help to reduce negative effects of congestion which can negatively impact the economy and support further integration, both in terms of businesses and the labour market, with neighbouring regions. The better distribution of economic growth to Outer London locations can support the development of a greater diversity of employment opportunities and is expected to significantly contribute to Londons economic stability.
This chapter does not seek to specifically address issues relating to flood risk and climate change adaptation and the proposals are not expected to contribute to this objective.

Proposals which support large scale housing and employment development KEY EFFECTS: Minor positive could contribute to increased emissions, however there are a range of plans Proposals that support new developments and programmes which promote increased energy efficiency in buildings. can contribute to increased energy efficiency in the longer term through For example the Mayors Leading to a Greener London and the Code for compliance with relevant legislation to Sustainable Homes design standard promote lowered per capita reduce emissions associated with new consumption of energy due to high insulation, use of condensing boilers buildings. etc. Commitments in the London Plan lay out a phased approach to increasing the efficiency of all new buildings (Policy 5.2 in the London Plan sets out plans for all dwellings to be zero carbon by 2016 and all non-domestic buildings by 2019). It is expected that this housing proposal may indirectly contribute to this objective.
Proposal 5D seeks to support large scale employment and housing developments in the Opportunity Areas identified in the London Plan. The Mayors Leading to a Greener London, 2009 includes a focus on improving the water efficiency of Londons homes and buildings and will help ensure that new development will mitigate potential effects in this respect. The provision of new housing that is compliant with design standards in the Code for Sustainable Homes and commitments laid out in the London Plan and

Proposals supporting new large scale housing and employment developments may result in long term positive effects through reducing per capita water consumption through altering water usage in new buildings.
Page 68
London Housing strategy can help to alter consumption patterns in the home and reduce per capita consumption through use of grey water recycling, dual flush toilets etc.
Proposal 5D which supports large scale employment and housing KEY EFFECTS: Minor negative developments in the Opportunity Areas identified in the London Plan There may be negative effects arising from can contribute to increased construction waste. In 2004, total UK waste increased construction waste from the development of large-scale housing and arisings were around 335 million tonnes, 32 per cent of which was employment schemes. This effect will likely be construction and demolition waste, the largest of any source as compared covered by planning conditions and is not considered to be significant. to mining and quarrying, industrial, commercial and household sources (Sustainable Development Indicators in Your Pocket, 2008. New construction activity, as may be implied from the development proposals supported by this proposal, may negatively contribute to waste generation in the capital, although these will likely be covered by planning conditions and targets set out in the London Plan to reduce construction and demolition waste.
The hub and spoke development approach as put forward in proposal 5A KEY EFFECTS: Minor positive implies a greater distribution of service provision in Outer London locations. Proposals that seek to improve This can help a wider variety of services more accessible to communities in development in key centres in Outer London will improve accessibility to key Outer London that may currently experience financial or other barriers to services and jobs. access. Proposal 5A also notes that the design of these town centres will Improvements to the transport system encourage greater use of public transport, walking and cycling which will will contribute to greater accessibility greatly benefit those households who do not own cars. Proposal 5G links to within London. proposals in the Transport Strategy to support access to town centres (as identified in the London Plan) by existing public transport and selective improvements which will positively contribute to greater accessibility to employment and services across London.
The proposals in this chapter will affect the built and historic environment through their promotion of the development of town centres and creation of large scale employment and housing developments. Proposal 5F does however refer to the importance of better standards of design in creating diverse and attractive neighbourhoods through the Mayors London Housing

Regeneration proposals could impact the built environment but there is a focus on improved design of diverse and attractive neighbourhoods and the overall effect is considered to be neutral.
Page 69
Design Guide and when the proposals in this chapter are considered together, effects on the built and historic environment are likely to be neutral.
Improving town centres (Proposal 5A) in Outer London (as identified in KEY EFFECTS: Minor positive the London Plan) incorporates the provision of a range of activities Proposals support sustainable and mixed including employment, retail, housing and leisure. More accessible communities through increased provision of services and jobs and through the design of employment opportunities in local areas can help create the potential for attractive and diverse neighbourhoods. reduced commuting and more sustainable travel patterns (although it is noted that Londons labour market is very fluid with high levels of commuting between boroughs and the provision of more dispersed employment opportunities does not ensure that people will live and work in the same area). Proposal 5F focuses on creating diverse and attractive neighbourhoods with a specific focus on a tailored approach to the needs of individual neighbourhoods with appropriate physical and social infrastructure. This approach will build on the features that make Londons various town centres unique and avoid contributing to the homogenisation of town centres in London. This can serve to give people a sense of pride in the places that they live and is expected to positively contribute to this objective.
Where development of town centres (Proposal 5A) contributes to and enhances open space there could be positive effects. This would have to be determined at an individual project level and the effect is uncertain at this stage. Proposal 5C can contribute to the enhancement of open space in the development proposals of the 2012 Olympic Games. In the creation of diverse and attractive neighbourhoods in Proposal 5F it is expected that there will be positive contributions to open space.

Open space may be supported through the development of town centres although the extent of this would be determined at an individual project level. The 2012 Olympic proposals and proposals to create diverse and attractive neighbourhoods will contribute to the enhancement of open space.
Proposal 5A encourages denser development and design which encourages walking, cycling and greater use of public transport. It also links with the Transport Strategy which will support access to town centres (as identified in the London Plan) by existing public transport and selective improvements. Reduced vehicle usage can indirectly contribute to improved local air quality. The extent of this effect depends on town centre design that successfully reduces vehicle usage and will be location specific.

Proposals that encourage greater use of walking, cycling and usage of public transport can contribute to improvements in local air quality but effects are location specific and the extent is uncertain at this stage.
Page 70
Creating the environment for business Summary of key findings
4.9.3
A variety of proposals in this chapter support creating the supply side conditions to support future growth through provision of employment space in London and will contribute to economic and employment objectives. These objectives will also be supported by proposals which support development in Opportunity Areas and strategic areas identified in Outer London. This development will contribute positively to regeneration and to equality by increasing accessibility to jobs and services. Creating a sense of place and liveability will be supported by proposals which focus on creating diverse and attractive neighbourhoods and through improving town centres. There may be positive effects on health and well-being through the promotion of more active lifestyles from the 2012 Olympic Games as well as proposals which encourage more journeys by foot and by bicycle.
4.9.4
Table 4.7

Stable Economy
Employment
Open Space
Biodiversity
Proposal
Proposal 5A: The Mayor will work with partners to strengthen the economy across London including removing barriers to outer London fulfilling its potential, and to support the development of town centres in outer and inner London as hubs for their communities and local economies. Proposal 5B: The Mayor will work with partners to ensure that investment sustains and increases Central Londons ability to be competitive, productive and innovative. Proposal 5C: The Mayor and LDA will work with the Olympic Park Legacy Company and other partners to fully seize the unique regeneration opportunity offered by the 2012 Olympic and Paralympic Games. Proposal 5D: The Mayor will work with boroughs, developers and other partners to identify capacity to accommodate large-scale employment and housing development, including in Opportunity
?/+
++
++
Page 71
Air Quality
Equalities
Housing
Waste
Stable Economy
Employment
Open Space
Biodiversity
Proposal
Areas, through the planning system, transport proposals and investment support. Proposal 5E: The Mayor and LDA will work with partners to take a co-ordinated and targeted approach to regeneration across London. Proposal 5F: The Mayor will encourage the further development of diverse and attractive neighbourhoods throughout London and will encourage local economic development as an essential ingredient in this. Proposal 5G: The Mayor will work with LDA, TfL and partners to achieve the full economic development benefits of Londons transport schemes and to bring forward the necessary further investment in Londons infrastructure. Proposal 5H: The Mayor will work with partners in the wider South East to achieve mutual economic benefits from investment.
?/+
?/+ ?/+ ?/+
?/+
?/+ ?/+
?/+
?/+ ?/+ ?/+ ?/+
?/+ ?/+ ?/+ ?/+
++
The detailed assessment of proposals highlighted a number of proposals that were expected to have a significant contribution to regeneration objective: The continued support of the development at the Olympic site and its legacy (Proposal 5C) will make a significant long-term and permanent contribution to the regeneration of east London area with a range of knock on environmental, community, social, health and economic effects. Similarly Proposal 5D, by its support of the proposals in the London Plan, has the potential to create significant long-term contribution to the regeneration of key parts of London and into the surrounding sub-region. Proposal 5G supports the London Transport Strategy and will have a significant positive long term impact on accessibility.
4.9.5
Uncertainty
It is difficult to appraise the full effects of Proposal 5A on the built and historic environment and open space without specific details of proposals, although it is likely that the effects of any development will ultimately have to be appraised as part of the planning process.
Page 72
Air Quality
Equalities
Housing
Waste
It is likely that Proposals 5E and 5F may have a range of important positive impacts although these are uncertain given the level of detail regarding the proposals possible at this time. These would in any case be expected to be defined at a local level. It is difficult to determine potential effects of proposals that set out spatially defined development areas on biodiversity. These could be positive or negative through potential loss or creation of habitat and effects are dependent on specific details of proposed schemes. Proposal 5H describes a number of potentially significant strategic transport and wider infrastructure schemes within the wider south east region. The nature of effects is uncertain given the level of detail regarding the proposals possible at this time.
4.9.6
It is important to note that regeneration consists of more than just the physical components and that issues such as poverty, worklessness, education and health should also be addressed as a comprehensive and successful regeneration strategy for a local area. It is noted that policies are addressed specifically elsewhere in the revised EDS and are expected to contribute to the regeneration objective.
4.10
Cumulative Effects of EDS
The appraisal undertaken above has considered the cumulative effects of the revised EDS as a whole, taken into consideration proposals in other chapters that may affect one chapter being assessed. The SEA Directive, and its implementing regulations in the UK, requires that secondary, cumulative and synergistic effects are considered as part of the appraisal. The Economic Development Strategy is submitted for consultation alongside the London Plan and the Mayor's Transport Strategy. These 3 documents help to outline the Mayor's vision and strategy for London. Separate reports have been prepared for each of these strategies. However, it is important to consider the cumulative effect of these three strategies together (including whether they have any secondary or synergistic effects in the short, medium and long term). Table 4.8 identifies the cumulative effects of the London Plan, the Economic Development Strategy and the Mayors Transport Strategy.
Page 73

Table 4.8 Cumulative Effects Assessment of the London Plan, the Economic Development Strategy and the Mayors Transport Strategy
SA Objective
Social Objectives
London Plan
Economic Development Strategy

There will be positive social effects arising from the EDS. Key proposals supporting these objectives can be found in Chapters 2 and 4 particularly for health and wellbeing and equality objectives. Indirect positive effects will also be felt with proposals which support the reduction of unemployment.
Mayors Transport Strategy

In line with its stated goals of enhancing the quality of life for all Londoners, improving transport opportunities for all Londoners and enhancing the safety and security of all Londoners, the Draft Revised MTS is anticipated to give rise to positive effects across the key elements of social sustainability. In particular it is expected to contribute to enhanced equality and improved health and wellbeing through tackling barriers to travel and promoting a positive framework for factors contributing to this. Key to this, are the policies which contribute to improved accessibility, inclusive design, economic development and increased physical activity. Strategic policies are set out in Chapter 4 and proposals in Chapter 5. In line with its stated goal of supporting economic development and population growth, the Draft Revised MTS is anticipated to give rise to positive effects in facilitating more sustainable and efficient economic progress in London, in particular through the promotion of integrated land use planning which the Draft Revised MTS - in conjunction with the London Plan and EDS facilitates, tackling congestion and promoting sustainable forms of freight transportation. Strategic policies are set out in Chapter 4 and proposals in Chapter 5.
Cumulative Effects
There is anticipated to be a positive cumulative effect as the strategies are likely to support and complement each other, contributing towards the social IIA objectives.
There are anticipated to be a number of positive effects against the social IIA objectives arising from the draft replacement London Plan. In particular from policies in Chapters 2, 3 and 6. The impetus on increased housing provision and the focus on regenerating deprived areas will be beneficial. Furthermore, the greater inclusion of outer London in specific policies is likely to contribute positively. The pressures arising from social growth (such as increased pressure on land and demand for resources) are anticipated to be mitigated by other policies within the Plan.
Economic Objectives
Chapter 4 is specifically focussed on contributing towards improvements in the economy. In combination with measures in Chapter 5 to adapt to, and mitigate climate change, as well as secure energy supplies (which will support the stability and reduce the vulnerability of the economy) there is likely to be a positive contribution towards the objectives. The focus on regeneration is also likely to contribution to economic IIA objectives. The drive to improve outer Londons competitiveness with surrounding area and regenerate its deprived areas is also likely to contribute positively. The pressures arising from economic development (such as the pressure on land) are anticipated to be mitigated by policies that contribute positively to the environmental IIA objectives.
The effects are positive and significant for the promotion of a stable and diverse economy. Key proposals which contribute to this objective can be found in Chapters 1 and 2, but this objective is also supported by the proposals in Chapters 3, 4 and 5. The proposals will support taking advantage of economic opportunities associated with climate change, maintaining London as a premier global location to do business and improving productivity.
There is likely to be a positive cumulative contribution towards the economic IIA objectives as the strategies are anticipated to support and complement each other.
Page 74
SA Objective
London Plan
Economic Development Strategy

The effects are positive and significant for climate change mitigation. The key proposals which contribute to this can be found in Chapter 3. Wider environmental objectives such as biodiversity and flood risk are not specifically addressed but may be indirectly affected by proposals.
Mayors Transport Strategy

In line with its stated goals of reducing transports contribution to climate change and improving its resilience and enhancing the quality of life for all Londoners, the strategy is anticipated to give rise to positive effects in relation to environmental sustainability. The Draft Revised MTS contains policies to protect the environment with respect to the development of new infrastructure and policies which seek to enhance the built environment and biodiversity along the transport network. It also contains policies to tackle climate change and address key sources of transport noise. These will have a positive effect with respect to the environment. It should be noted that the policies set out in the Draft Revised MTS pertaining to air quality, are to be delivered in conjunction with the forthcoming Draft Revised Mayors Air Quality Strategy. Strategic policies are set out in Chapter 4 and proposals in Chapter 5.
Cumulative Effects
It is anticipated that there will be a positive cumulative effect as the strategies are likely to support and compliment each other to contribute towards achieving the environmental IIA objectives.
The policies set out predominantly in Chapter 5 and 7 are likely to contribute to the protection of the environment. Other policies elsewhere that promote a reduction in pollution and CO2 emissions (such as in Chapter 6) are also likely to contribute towards environmental IIA objectives.
4.11
Health Impact Assessment
The Health Impact Assessment (HIA) was undertaken by Institute of Occupational Medicine and is provided in Appendix E. The HIA considered key baseline information issues and used the SA Objective on health and well being (Objective 3) with its associated guide questions to assess proposals within the draft revised EDS. The issues raised here are also drawn on elsewhere within the assessment chapters of this SA Report (Section 4.3 to 4.8): The Mayors vision for sustainable development and the five economic objectives are consistent with improving health and wellbeing of all Londoners and reducing health inequalities. The assessment considers that proposals within each of the five chapters were generally consistent with the objective of improving the health and wellbeing of Londoners and reducing health inequalities. Proposal 2G, which was concerned with improving quality of life as well as Proposal 2H which set out measures to improve health in London and reduce health inequalities were found to be particularly aligned with the objectives considered in the assessment.
Page 75
Other proposals that were considered to be strongly aligned with HIA objectives included: Proposal 2J, Proposals 3A and 3E; all proposals within Chapter 4 (4A to 4F), as well as Proposals 5A, 5D,5G and 5H.
4.12
Community Safety Impact Assessment
The Community Safety Impact Assessment (CSIA) was undertaken by Entec and is provided in Appendix F. The CSIA initially presented a range of key baseline information issues and used the SA Objective 14 (Liveability and Place) and Objective 8 (Flood Risk and Climate Change Adaptation) with their associated guide questions to assess proposals within the draft EDS. The issues raised here are also drawn on elsewhere within the assessment chapters of this SA Report (Section 4): The Mayors vision specifically highlights that London should lead the world in its approach to tackling the urban challenges of the 21st century, particularly that of climate change which gives an indication that the strategy is strongly aligned to the objectives of tackling climate change and the potential minimisation of climate change impacts on its population (SA Objective 8). The vision also states that the strategy will promote neighbourhoods and identity; and values responsibility, compassion and citizenship. which can be taken to indicate a strong focus and importance placed on issues related to the Liveability and Place objective (SA Objective 14). A number of proposals were considered to be strongly aligned with CSIA objectives, these were: Chapter 1: 1A, 1B and 1C; Chapter 2: 2C, 2F, 2G, 2I and 2J; Chapter 3: 3B and 3E; Chapter 4: 4A, 4B and 4C, and all proposals within Chapter 5 (5A to 5G).
Page 76
5.
5.2
Conclusion
Key findings from Sustainability Appraisal
Overall the appraisal of the draft revised Economic Development Strategy has found the proposals to be broadly positive when considered against the 16 sustainability appraisal objectives. In addition, no proposals were considered in the appraisal to contribute negatively to the objectives. Not unexpectedly, the promotion of a stable economy as well as employment objectives receive strong support in the proposals of the revised EDS as does climate change with significant positive effects are expected against both of these objectives. Other key areas where positive effects are expected are employment, equalities, health and well-being and accessibility. Some of the key strengths of the revised Economic Development Strategy include: Strong support for maintaining a strong and diverse economy that creates the conditions for supporting economic growth and achieving the objectives of the revised EDS. A strong, comprehensive approach to tackling climate change notably through mitigation of emissions and creation of green infrastructure. The proposals include actions to taking advantage of the economic opportunities presented by these activities. A wider approach to economic development that includes a commitment to improving the quality of life of Londoners that addresses key aspects of poverty and exclusion. However, there remained some uncertainty regarding the potential effects of a number of proposals where specific details of measures that would be undertaken to fulfil the proposals are to be defined in later local policy or where proposals relate to the Mayors success in influencing national policy. More generally, the revised EDS did not include many proposals to address demand side stimulus measures to boost the economy, which might be expected in response to the current recessionary period. This may reflect the plan period. Proposals to address housing needs and delivery were not covered in detail here and it was recognised that this may lie more fully under the remit of other agencies such as the relatively newly formed HCA or be more fully addressed at local development plan policy making level. In addition, a greater focus on regeneration might have been expected, but it is recognised that the specific details of different regeneration proposals will be defined out at a local level. Whilst proposals (especially in Chapter 3) are generally very supportive of the broader climate change goals to (reduce emissions) it is not possible to appraise whether these contributions will be sufficient to meet the broader requirements to reduce emissions by 80% by 2050 (as specified in the Climate Change Act 2008). It is understood that specific recommendations may be set within an Implementation Plan for the revised EDS and it is recommended that these are appraised to consider the potential contribution of proposals to Climate Change, and
Page 77
sustainability, objectives and regional targets. It would be helpful if the implementation plan also sets out potential intended outputs and outcomes to aid future evaluation. There were a limited number of proposals addressing specific environmental issues such as biodiversity, reducing flood risk and improving water efficiency but as these are outside the scope of the objectives of the revised EDS and included within other policy at this and more local levels (particularly the London Plan), this is not a concern. The draft revised EDS makes clear steps towards a Sustainable London which, given that any major conurbation is inherently unsustainable (with inherited patterns of infrastructure, resource consumption and waste creation) is important. The draft revised EDS, together with the Mayors Transport Strategy and London Plan, can help ensure that London will be considered to be more sustainable in the future than it is at present. A significant challenge will remain to be addressed through the monitoring and implementation of the final EDS to move London further given its over all contribution to the UK environmental and carbon footprint.
5.3
Monitoring of Significant Effects
It is a requirement of the SEA Directive to establish how the significant effects of implementing the Mayors revised EDS will be monitored. However, as ODPM Guidance (Practical Guide to the Strategic Environmental Assessment Directive, ODPM, September 2005) notes, it is not necessary to monitor everything, or monitor an effect indefinitely. Instead, monitoring needs to be focused on significant sustainability effects. Monitoring should therefore be focussed upon significant effects that may give rise to irreversible damage, with a view to identifying trends before such damage is caused (or uncertain effects where monitoring would enable preventative or mitigation measures to be undertaken). The draft revised EDS acknowledges that the GLA group will evaluate its own programmes and projects and use its knowledge of what works to inform future selection and design. Robust quantitative evidence will help determine future investment priorities. Qualitative assessments of what worked well can aid agencies in designing future interventions. In this way the Plan recognises the importance of the Plan - Monitor - Manage process. Furthermore Proposal 2C in the revised EDS sets out that the Mayor will monitor the factors affecting Londons competitiveness so as to identify where corrective action is needed to address factors having a negative effect. A set of performance monitoring measures are now listed and grouped alongside the SA objectives to illustrate their breadth of coverage. These indicators will help monitor the environmental, social and economic effects of the revised EDS. These measures will be confirmed following consultation on the draft.
Page 78

Table 5.1 Proposed Monitoring Measures
SA Objective 1. Regeneration & Land-Use
Monitoring Measure The proportion of development taking place on previously developed land Development capacity in the office market Garden land to residential development Garden land to residential development Net loss of designated Sites of Importance for Nature Conservation Restore 15km of the river network Bird populations Ecological footprint Access to nature Life expectancy at birth Provision of childcare places School places to match School Role Projections Employment opportunities for those suffering from disadvantage in the employment market Child poverty Income inequality Fuel poverty Increase in employment rates of key target groups above increase in overall employment rate in London Increase in employment rates in Londons most disadvantaged areas by more than the rest of London The density of residential development The supply of new homes The supply of affordable homes Decent housing stock Achievement of London Plan housing targets in Londons sub-regions Proportion of working age London residents in employment Employment land available Employment opportunities for those suffering from disadvantage in the employment market Achievement of London Plan job projections in Londons sub-regions Development capacity in the office market Number of jobs located in areas with high PTAL values Business survival Net start-up business rate Evidence from international surveys on London as key enterprise location
Source(s) of Information AMR (KPI 1) AMR (KPI 8) AMR (KPI 10) AMR (KPI 10) AMR (KPI 19) AMR (KPI 23) LSDC QoL Indicator 14(i) LSDC QoL Indicator 13(i) LSDC QoL Indicator 14(ii) AMR (KPI 6) and London ED Snapshot Objective 3 AMR (KPI 12) AMR (KPI 13) AMR (KPI 11) LSDC QoL Indicator 8 LSDC QoL Indicator 11 LSDC QoL Indicator 12 London ED Snapshot Objective 5 London ED Snapshot Objective 6 AMR (KPI 4) AMR (KPI 5) LSDC QoL Indicator 21(i) London ED Snapshot Obj 1 indicator AMR (KPI 7) and London ED Snapshot Objective 4 AMR (KPI 9) AMR (KPI 11) London ED Snapshot Objective 1 AMR (KPI 18) LSDC QoL Indicator 19 London ED Snapshot Objective 7 London ED Snapshot Objective 8
2. Biodiversity
3. Health and Well-being
4. Equalities
5. Housing
6. Employment
7. Stable Economy
Page 79
SA Objective
Monitoring Measure Reductions in percentage of businesses reporting lack of skilled employees as significant problem Londons GVA per worker Coordinated approach to marketing assessed through tourism nights by overseas visitors, visitor spending, overseas students and number of Foreign Direct Investment (FDI) projects Strategic developments achieve zero carbon in residential development / all development Carbon efficiency / carbon emissions Flooding (number of properties at risk from flooding and households signed up to flood warning system) Reliance on the private car and a more sustainable modal split for journeys (Use of public transport) Reliance on the private car and a more sustainable modal split for journeys (Zero traffic growth in central and inner London, and traffic growth in outer London reduced to no more than 5 per cent) Increase the share of all trips by bicycle Increase in passengers and freight transported on the Blue Ribbon Strategic developments achieve zero carbon in residential development / all development Energy from renewable sources CO2 emissions
Source(s) of Information London ED Snapshot Objective 9 London ED Snapshot Objective 10 London ED Snapshot Objectives 11, 12 and 13 AMR (KPI 21) LSDC QoL Indicator 23 LSDC QoL Indicator 22 AMR (KPI 14) AMR (KPI 15)
8. Flood Risk and Climate Change Adaptation
9. Climate Change Mitigation and Energy
AMR (KPI 16) AMR (KPI 16) AMR (KPI 21) AMR (KPI 22) LSDC QoL Indicator 13 London ED Snapshot Objective 3 AMR (KPI 23)
10. Water Quality & Water Resources 11. Waste
Restore 15km of the river network
Waste recycled/ composted and sent to land fill Household recycling
AMR (KPI 20) and London ED Snapshot Objective 3 LSDC QoL Indicator 15 and London ED Snapshot Objective 3 AMR (KPI 14) AMR (KPI 15)
12. Accessibility and Mobility
Reliance on the private car and a more sustainable modal split for journeys (Use of public transport) Reliance on the private car and a more sustainable modal split for journeys (Zero traffic growth in central and inner London, and traffic growth in outer London reduced to no more than 5 per cent) Increase the share of all trips by bicycle Increase in passengers and freight transported on the Blue Ribbon Traffic volumes Travel to school Delivery of identified key infrastructure projects
AMR (KPI 16) AMR (KPI 17) LSDC QoL Indicator 16 LSDC QoL Indicator 17 London ED Snapshot Objective 2
Page 80
SA Objective 13. Built and Historic Environment 14. Liveability and Place
Monitoring Measure Proportion of buildings at risk as a percentage of the total number of listed buildings in London
Source(s) of Information AMR (KPI 24)
Electoral turnout Formal volunteering Number of street crimes reported Life expectancy Neighbourhood satisfaction The loss of open space Use of public transport Reliance on the private car and a more sustainable modal split for journeys (Zero traffic growth in central and inner London, and traffic growth in outer London reduced to no more than 5 per cent) Increase the share of all trips by bicycle PM10 emissions Concentrations of pollutants (NOX, O3, NO2, SO2, PM10, CO)
LSDC QoL Indicator 1 LSDC QoL Indicator 2 LSDC QoL Indicator 9 LSDC QoL Indicator 20 LSDC QoL Indicator 10 AMR (KPI 3) and London ED Snapshot Objective 3 AMR (KPI 14) AMR (KPI 15)
15. Open Space 16. Air Quality
AMR (KPI 16) LSDC QoL Indicator 18 London ED Snapshot Objective 3
Note: LSDC Quality of Life (QoL) indicators taken from: LSDC (May 2009) Londons Quality of Life Indicators 2008 09 Report.
5.4
Quality Assurance
The Governments guidance on SEA contains a quality assurance checklist to help ensure that the requirements of the SEA Directive are met. This has been completed and is presented in Appendix H.
5.5
Next Steps
This SA Report is issued for consultation alongside the draft revised EDS. Consultation will conclude on the 12th January 2010. Following consideration of any comments and recommendations, the revised EDS will be published as a final version in spring / summer 2010. During this process amendments may be made to the draft revised EDS and any significant changes will be subsequently reflected in a revised SA report to support the final revised EDS.
Page 81
Appendix A List of Abbreviations

AONB AQMA BAP BAME BERR CAZ CCL CCS CHP CLG CSIA DCMS DECC Defra DoENI DTI EA EDS EIA EqIA ETS EU GHG GLA GOL GVA HCA HRA Area of Outstanding Natural Beauty Air Quality Management Area Biodiversity Action Plan Black, Asian and Minority Ethnic Department of Business, Enterprise and Regulatory Reform (formerly DTI) Central Activities Zone Climate Change Levy Carbon Capture and Storage Combined Heat and Power Communities and Local Government (Department for) Community Safety Impact Assessment Department for Culture, Media and Sports Department of Energy and Climate Change Department for Environment, Farming and Rural Affairs Department of Environment Northern Ireland Department of Trade and Industry Environment Agency Economic Development Strategy Environmental Impact Assessment Equalities Impact Assessment Emission Trading Scheme European Union Greenhouse Gas Greater London Authority Government Office for London Gross Value Added Homes and Communities Agency Habitats Regulation Assessment
Appendix A 1 of 1
October 2009
IIA IPC IPCC LCE LDA LDD LOCOG LSC LSDC NHS ODA ODPM ONS PCT PPS ROI RSS SA SAC SAM SEA SME SSSI TfL VCS
Integrated Impact Assessment Infrastructure Planning Commission Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change Low carbon economy London Development Agency Local Development Document London Organizing Committee for the Olympic Games Learning and Skills Council London Sustainable Development Commission National Health Service Olympic Delivery Agency Office of the Deputy Prime Minister (now CLG) Office for National Statistics Primary Care Trust Planning Policy Statement Return on investment Regional Spatial Strategy Sustainability Appraisal Special Areas of Conservation Scheduled Ancient Monument Strategic Environmental Assessment Small and Medium Enterprise Site of Special Scientific Interest Transport for London Voluntary and Community Sector
Appendix A 2 of 2
October 2009
Appendix B Review of Policies, Plans and Programmes

This Appendix provides a review of policies, plans and programmes and is sub divided into topic sections which aim to identify the relationships between the revised EDS for London and these other documents i.e. how the EDS might be affected by the published plans aims, objectives and/or targets, or how the revised EDS could contribute to the achievement of any environmental and sustainability objectives.
Table B.1 Plans and Programmes Relevant to Chapter 1 London: Business Capital of the World
Sustainability Topic: Economy

List of plans and programmes International Integrating environment and sustainable development into economic and development cooperation policy, European Commission (2000); Integrated Guideline for Growth and Jobs 2008-11, Commission of the European Communities (2007); Ten Years of the European Employment Strategy, European Commission (2007); Recommendations for updates to BEPG, European Commission (2007); European Employment Strategy, European Commission (2005); Integrated Guideline for Growth and Jobs 2008-11, Commission of the European Communities (Committee on Economic and Monetary Affairs) (2007). Building Britains Future, HM Government (2009) Regeneration, competitiveness and sustainable development, Director of Secretariat (2003) Breaking down barriers: Targeting regeneration resources GLA (2003); Good Practice Guide on Planning for Tourism, DCLG (2006); Pricing: White Paper, SCADplus (1996); ODA Employment and Skills Strategy, ODA (2008); Consultation Paper on new Planning Policy Statement 4: Planning for Sustainable Economic Development, DCLG (2007); National (continued) PSA Delivery Agreement 1: Raise the Productivity of the UK Economy, HM Government (2007); Planning for a Sustainable Future: White Paper, HM Government (2007); Procuring the Future, DEFRA (2006) Sustaining Success: Developing Londons Economy, Mayors Economic Development Strategy, Mayor of London (2005); Londons Future: The Skills and Employment Strategy 20082013, Mayor of London (2008); The London Employment and Skills Taskforce for 2012 Action Plan (2006) The Mayors Economic Recovery Action Plan, Mayor of London (2008); Women in Londons Economy, Mayor of London (2005); More residents, more jobs? The relationship between population, employment and accessibility in London, Mayor of London (2005); The Case for London: Londons loss is no-ones gain, Mayors case for investment, GLA, (March 2004); Regional Economic Strategy: South East SEEDA (2006); London City Charter, Mayor of London (April 2009); A Fairer London: The 2009 Living Wage in London, GLA Economics (May 2009); GLA Group's Responsible Procurement Policy, GLA (2008).
Regional
National
Summary of objectives and targets The plans and programmes relating to the economy have an overall aim of achieving a diverse sustainable economy. In particular the documents seek balanced economic growth and in turn to provide long-term employment and provide effective regeneration. Further this involves responding to climate change, improving the tourism sector and investing in transport infrastructure. At a regional level the documents aim to maintain London as a globally competitive city and direct resources sufficiently to respond to the economic downturn.
Source: Entec UK
Appendix B 1 of 1
October 2009
Table B.2 Plans and Programmes Relevant to Chapter 2, Improving Londons Competitiveness
Sustainability Topic: Population

List of Plans and Programmes International Aarhus Convention: Convention on Access to Information, Public Participation in Decision-making and Access to Justice in Environmental Matters, United Nations (2001) Strong and prosperous communities: Local Government White Paper, DCLG (2006); A New Commitment to Neighbourhood Renewal: National Strategy Action Plan, ODPM (2001) Planning Policy Statement 3: Housing, Communities and Local Government, DCLG (2007). Low Carbon Industrial Strategy (2009) Regional London Housing Strategy draft for consultation with the London Assembly and functional bodies, Mayor of London (2008); Housing in London: the evidence base for the London Housing Strategy, Mayor of London (2008); Time for Action: Equipping Young People for the Future and Preventing Violence - the Mayors proposals and call to partners (2008) Making London better for all children and young people: the Mayors children and young peoples strategy, Mayor of London (2004); London Enriched: The Mayors draft Strategy for Refugee Integration in London, Mayor of London (2007).
National
Summary of objectives and targets The plans and programmes relating to population seek to provide strong, balanced and prosperous communities. This involves narrowing the gap between the most deprived neighbourhoods and the rest of the country and giving local communities more influence and power to improve their lives. A key element of achieving such aims is to ensure equality of opportunity for all Londons population and provide more homes with a better mix of homes with a view to delivering mixed communities.
Sustainability Topic: Human Health

List of Plans and Programmes International Together for Health: A Strategic Approach for the EU 20082013: White Paper, EC (2007); Health impact assessment in strategic environmental assessment, World Health Organization European Centre for Environment and Health (2001); Childrens Environment and Health Action Plan for Europe, World Health Organisation Regional Office for Europe (2004); EU Directive: 2002/49/EC Relating to the Assessment and Management of Environmental Noise - The Environmental Noise Directive, EC (2002); Guidelines for Community Noise, World Health Organization (1999); Transport, Environment and Health, WHO (2000). Choosing Health - White Paper, Department of Health (2004); Planning Policy Guidance Note 24: Planning and Noise, Office of the Deputy Prime Minister (1994); Planning Policy Guidance 24 (PPG24): Planning and Noise, Office of the Deputy Prime Minister (1994); Children's Environment and Health Action Plan - A summary of current activities which address children's environment and health issues in the UK, Health Protection Agency (2007); Tackling Health Inequalities: A programme for action, Regional Health in London. Review of the London Health Strategy and High Level Indicators, London Health Commission (2004); Sounder city: the Mayor's ambient noise strategy, Mayor of London (2004); Making London better for all children and young people: the Mayors children and young peoples strategy, Mayor of London (2004); Cleaning Londons Air The Mayors Air Quality Strategy, Mayor of London (2002); Alcohol and drugs in London: The Mayors policy and action plan to reduce the harm resulting from alcohol and drug use in the capital, Mayor of London (2002); The London Childcare Strategy Towards affordable good quality childcare for all, Mayor of London (2003); Sounder City The Mayors Ambient Noise Strategy, Mayor of London (2004); Healthy and Sustainable Food for London- the Mayor's Food Strategy, Mayor of London (2006); Living Well in London The Mayors Draft Health Inequalities Strategy for London, Mayor of London (2008); Health in London: Looking Back, Looking Forward, LHC (2006/07); London's Quality of Life Indicators 2008/09, London Sustainable Development Commission (2009)
National
Appendix B 2 of 2
October 2009

Department of Health (2003); Securing good health for the whole population: Report to the Treasury, Wanless (2004); Our health, our care, our say: a new direction for community services White Paper, Department of Health (2006); High quality care for all: NHS Next Stage Review Final report, Darzi (2008); Working for a Healthier Tomorrow Dame Carol Blacks Review of the health of Britains working age population, Black (2008); Health Effects of Climate Change in the UK 2008 An update of the Department of Health Report 2001/2002, Department of Health and Health Protection Agency (2008); Control of Pollution Act 1974 (and subsequent amendments), Secretary of State (1974); The Noise Emission in the Environment by Equipment for use Outdoors Regulations 2001 (SI 2001/1701 as amended), DTI (2001); Homes for the future, more affordable, more sustainable, DCLG (2007); Environmental Noise (England) Regulations 2006, Secretary of State (2006).
Housing - Supplementary Planning Guidance, Mayor of London (2005).
Summary of objectives and targets The plans and policies relating to health set out and inform further, scientifically grounded information needed to help EU member states to reduce the adverse health impacts of certain environmental factors. This involves providing a good health service to an ageing Europe and at the national level providing an National Health Service that helps people stay healthy and grants patients greater rights. A number of documents seek to improve air quality and provide noise level guidelines and restrictions. Objectives are also provided that seek to reduce health inequalities. Through sustainable development, health policies filter down into planning policies, promoting health and well being.
Sustainability Topic: Community Safety

List of Plans and Programmes International European Road Safety Action Programme 2003-10, European Commission (2003). Design and construction Health, Safety and Environment Standard, Olympic Delivery Authority (2008); A Strategy for Workplace Health and Safety in Great Britain to 2010 and beyond, Health and Safety Commission (2004); PSA Delivery Agreement 23: Make Communities Safer, HM Government (2007); Road Safety Act, Department for Transport (2006). Regional The London Anti-Social Behaviour Strategy 2005-2008, GLA (2005); Community Safety Plan for travelling and transport in London 2008/2009, TfL (2008); London Safety Plan 2008/2011, London Fire and Emergency Planning Authority (2008).
National
Summary of objectives and targets The plans and policies relating to community safety seek to manage health and safety in a number of areas by reducing both general crime and anti-social behaviour. This in particular involves providing adequate health and safety information and managing health and safety risks. Further the plans aim to provide a European system of technical standards and certification for rail and road safety.
Appendix B 3 of 2
October 2009
Material Assets: including Waste, Land Use and Transport

List of plans and programmes International European Transport Strategy for 2010: White Paper, EC (2001); Keep Europe Moving Sustainable mobility for our continent Mid-term review of the European Commissions 2001 Transport White Paper, EC (2006); Freight Transport Logistics in Europe the key to sustainable mobility, EU (2006); Towards a safer and more competitive high-quality road transport system in the Community, EU (2000); A strategy for revitalising the Communitys railways: White Paper, EU (1996); Proposal for a Council Directive on passenger car related taxes, EU (2005); NAIADES An Integrated European Action Programme for Inland Waterway Transport, EU (2006); Fuel Quality Directive (FQD) (to be published 2009), EU (2009); EU Directive for the Promotion of Bio-fuels for Transport (2003/30/EC), EU (2003); Transport, Environment and Health, WHO (2000); World Summit on Sustainable Development - Earth Summit leading to the Johannesburg Plan of Implementation, UN (2002); The EU Sustainable Development Strategy, SDS (2006); European Spatial Development Perspective European Commission (1999); EU Waste Framework (Directive 2008/98/EC), European Commission (1975-ongoing) The Landfill Directive, European Commission (1999); Directive on Waste 75/442/EEC (as replaced by Directive 2006/12/EC), EU (2006);. EU Thematic Strategy on the Prevention and Recycling of Waste (2002-2012) (to be reviewed in 2010), EC (2002). Planning Policy Guidance Note 13: Transport, Office of the Deputy Prime Minister (2001); Towards a Sustainable Transport System: Supporting economic growth in a low carbon world, Department for Transport (2006); Cohesion and Transport, SCADplus (1999); Delivering a Sustainable Transport System, Department for Transport (2008); Building sustainable transport into new developments, Department for Transport (2008); ODA Transport Plan, Olympic Delivery Authority (2007); Eddington Transport Study Advice to the UK Government, HM Treasury and Department for Transport (2006); The Governments Response to the House of Commons Transport Committee: Overcrowding on Public Transport, Regional Way to Go! Planning for Better Transport Mayor of London (2008); The Mayors transport strategy (and transport strategy revisions 2004), Mayor of London (2001); Statement by Secretary of State for Transport, Geoff Hoon, (2009). Mayors Transport Strategy Statement of Intent (2009) More residents, more jobs? The relationship between population, employment and accessibility in London, Mayor of London (2005); Regional Spatial Strategies: Guide to Producing Regional Transport Strategies, Department for Transport (2006); Greater London Authority Act 2007, HM Government (2007); A sustainable development framework for London - London Sustainable Development Commission, Mayor of London (2003); The London Plan Spatial Development Strategy for Greater London, Mayor of London (2004); Sustainability Appraisal of the draft London Plan, Mayor of London (2004); Planning for a Better London, Mayor of London (2008); Sustainable Design and Construction: The London Plan Supplementary Planning Guidance, Mayor of London (2006); The Mayors Annual Report 2007/08, GLA (2008); Rethinking Rubbish in London The Mayors Municipal Waste Management Strategy, Mayor of London (2003); The Mayors Municipal Waste Management Strategy rethinking rubbish, Mayor of London (2003); Wider waste strategy: background study, Greater London Authority (2004); The Mayors Business Waste Management Strategy (draft), Mayor of London (2008); Better food for London: the Mayors draft food strategy, Mayor of London (2005).
National
Appendix B 4 of 4
October 2009

Secretary of State (2004); Carbon Pathways: Informing Development of a Carbon Reduction Strategy for Transport, DfT (2008); PPS 1: Planning and Climate Change Supplement to PPS 1, ODPM (2007); PSA Delivery Agreement 5: Deliver Reliable and Efficient Transport Networks that Support Economic Growth, HM Government (2007); Local Transport Bill, DfT (2008); Planning Policy Statement 3: Housing, Department of Communities and Local Government (2007); The Planning Act 2008, HM Government (2008); The Planning and Compulsory Purchase Act, HM Government (2004); The Community Infrastructure Levy, CLG (August 2008); Planning Policy Statement 1: Delivering Sustainable Development, Office of the Deputy Prime Minister (2005); Planning Policy Statement 11: Regional Spatial Strategies, Office of the Deputy Prime Minister (2005); Securing the Future Delivering UK Sustainable Development Strategy: The UK Government Sustainable Development Strategy, DEFRA (2005); One future: different paths UK Shared Framework for Sustainable Development, DEFRA (2005); Securing the Regions Future: Strengthening delivery of sustainable development in the English regions, DEFRA (2006); Sustainable Development Strategy, Olympic Delivery Authority (2006); Commitment to Sustainable Regeneration, Olympic Delivery Authority (2007); Plan 2008, Olympic Delivery Authority (2008); Governments Barker Review of Housing Supply Delivering Stability: Securing our Future Housing, HM Treasury and ODPM (2004); PPS6: Planning for Town Centres, ODPM (2005); Homes for the future: more affordable, more sustainable, DCLG (2007); Waste Strategy for England, DEFRA (2008); The Landfill (England and Wales) Regulations, Secretary of State (2004); PPS10 Planning for Sustainable Waste Management, ODPM (2005).
Summary of objectives and targets The plans and policies relating to land use highlight the need for the following in achieving sustainable development objectives: economic development; social inclusion; environmental protection; prudent use of resources; and the need for positive planning. Plans outline the requirement for greater resource efficiency and sustainable design and construction techniques. The overall aim of the plans and programmes relating to traffic and transport is to improve the quality and effectiveness of transport infrastructure in terms of efficiency, pollution and social justice. The plans seek to strike a balance between the growing economy and the increasing demand for travel, and also achieving environmental objectives. Ultimately therefore the goal is to improve the quality and efficiency of transport in Europe to supplement the economy. Further plans seek to support targets for the improvement of air quality and the reduction of greenhouse gas emissions by providing sustainable transport alternative and promoting health. In the UK this particularly relates to improving rail infrastructure. Throughout the UK a number of programmes have established indicators and baselines to monitor the performance of transport.
Appendix B 5 of 5
October 2009

In terms of waste, the documents establish a framework for the management of waste across the European Community; priority is given to waste prevention, re-use and recovery of waste; prohibition of the uncontrolled disposal of waste; establishment of an integrated network of disposal installations; preparation of waste management plans; ensuring that the cost of disposal is borne by the waste holder; ensuring that waste carriers are registered; ensuring that waste is recovered or disposed of without endangering human health. This is in light of the waste hierarchy and initiatives filtering down to the local level to shift waste management up it. Plans on a regional level in particular aim to change individual lifestyle habits and promote advanced waste technologies.
Source: Entec UK
Appendix B 6 of 5
October 2009
Table B.3 Plans and Programmes Relevant to Chapter 3, Transforming to a Low Carbon Economy
Sustainability Topic: Climatic Change and Energy Use

List of Plans and Programmes International Rio Earth Summit, Agenda 21, Chapter 9: Protection of the atmosphere, UNCED (1992); The UN Framework Convention on Climate Change (UNFCCC) and the Kyoto Protocol, United Nations (1999); Air Transport and the Environment Towards meeting the Challenges of Sustainable Development, EU (1999); European Climate Change Report, European Commission (2001); Second European Climate Change Program (ECCP II), EC (2005); Reducing the Climate Change Impact of Aviation, EU (2005); EU Emission Trading Scheme (EU ETS), EC (2005); Green Paper: adaptation to climate change in Europe options for EU action; EC (2007) European Climate Change Programme (ECCP), EU (2005); EU Sixth Environmental Action Plan (2002 2012), EC (2002); Directive to Promote Electricity from Renewable Energy (2001/77/EC), EC (2001); Environmental Liability - Directive 2001/35/EC, EC (2001); Environmental Damage (Prevention and Remediation) Regulations, EC (2009); 2020 Climate and Energy Package, (EC, 2008). Planning Policy Statement 10: Planning for Sustainable Waste Management, Office of the Deputy Prime Minister (2005); Planning Policy Statement 25: Development and Flood Risk, Department of Communities and Local Government (2006); Planning Policy Statement: planning and Climate Change Supplement to PPS1, Department of Communities and Local Government (2007); Making space for water: taking forward a new government strategy for flood and coastal erosion risk management in England, DEFRA (2005); Energy white paper. Our energy future: creating a low carbon economy, Dept. of Trade and Industry (2003); UK Low Carbon Transition Plan, BIS (2009); The Energy Challenge: Review, DTI (2006); Planning Policy Statement 22: Renewable Energy, Office of the Deputy Prime Minister (2003); Interim Advice by the Committee on Climate Change (2008); Stern Review The Economics of Climate Change, Stern (2006); Climate Change the UK Programme 2006, HM Government Regional Thames Tideway Strategic Study: Annual Report, Thames Water (2002); Thames Region Catchment Flood Management Plan, Environment Agency (2008); Evidence Base: Climate Change in the Further Alterations to the London Plan, Mayor of London (2007); Development of a renewable energy assessment and targets for London, Mayor of London (2001); Green light to clean power The Mayors Energy Strategy, Mayor of London (2004); Action Today to Protect Tomorrow Mayors Climate Change Action Plan, Mayor of London (2007); The London climate change adaptation strategy Summary draft report, Mayor of London (2008); London's Environmental Effectiveness - an update: Comparing London with Other English Regions, GLA Economics (2005); Tackling Climate Change in the Regions, Englands Regional Development Agency (2007); London 2012 Sustainability Plan, London 2012 (2007).
National
Appendix B 7 of 7
October 2009

(2006); Air Quality and Climate Change: A UK Perspective Air Quality Expert Group, DEFRA (2007); Carbon Pathways Analysis, Department for Transport (2008); UK Climate Change Act 2008, DEFRA (2008); Climate Change Adaptation Strategy (2008-11) Environment Agency (2008); Low Carbon Industrial Strategy, HM Government (2009); Meeting the Energy Challenge: A White Paper on Energy, DTI (2007); Consultation on the Framework for Clean Coal Technologies, DECC (2009).
Summary of objectives and targets The plans and programmes on climate change have the overall objective of seeking to stabilise and reduce greenhouse gas emissions with the aim of minimising and mitigating the adverse effects of climate change on human health and the environment. The solution to this requires a coordinated effort. The Kyoto Protocol sets targets to reduce the collective emissions of developed countries by 5.2% from 1990 levels by the period 2008 to 2012. The UK Climate Change Act (2008) also sets binding targets for reduction of CO2 emissions (leading to an 80% reduction by 2050 compared to a 1990 baseline) (UK only). The plans also set out the likely effects of climate change on the regions of the UK and how the targets are to be achieved. The Climate Change Act 2008 has set the target of an 80% cut in net UK carbon emission by 2050 compared to 1990 levels. This seeks to maintain the reliability of energy supplies; promote competitive markets to help sustainable economic growth and improved productivity; and ensure that every home is adequately and affordably heated throughout the UK. More specifically, the London Mayors Strategy sets out that London should aim to generate at least 665GWh of electricity and 280GWh of heat, from up to 40,000 renewable energy schemes by 2010.
Source: Entec UK
Appendix B 8 of 8
October 2009
Table B.4 Plans and Programmes Relevant to Chapter 4, Extending Opportunity to All Londoners
Sustainability Topic: Equality

List of Plans and Programmes International Council Directive 2000/43/EC: Implementing the principle of equal treatment between persons irrespective of racial or ethnic origin EU directive for a race quality framework, EC (2000); Council Directive 2000/78/EC: Establishing a general framework for equal treatment in employment and cooperation EU directive for an employment equality framework, EC (2000); Strengthening passenger rights within the European Union, European Commission (2005); A roadmap for equality between women and men 2006-2010 European Commission Gender Equality Framework, EC (2006); Rights of people with reduced mobility when travelling by air, European Parliament (2006). Sustainable communities: building for the future, Office of the Deputy Prime Minister (2003); Breaking down barriers: Targeting regeneration resources, Economic & Social Development Committee (2003); Planning Policy Guidance Note 4: Industrial, Commercial Development and Small Firms, Office of the Deputy Prime Minister (1992); Planning Policy Statement 6: Planning for Town Centres, Office of the Deputy Prime Minister (2005); UK Equality Act, HM Government (2006); Every Child Matters UK Government Green Paper, Department for Education and Skills (2003); Equality and Diversity Strategy, ODA (2007); Disability Equality Scheme, ODA (2007); Gender Equality Scheme, ODA (2007); Race Equality Scheme, ODA (2007). Regional Rebuilding Londons future, London Assemblys Economic Development Committee (2002); Regeneration, competitiveness and sustainable development, Greater London Authority (2004); From street to stability: The Mayors Rough Sleepers Strategy, Mayor of London (2001); Making London Better for All Children and Young People The Mayors Children and Young Peoples Strategy, Mayor of London (2004); Valuing Older People: The Mayor of Londons Older People Strategy, Mayor of London (2007); The State of Equality in London, GLA (2007); Mayors Housing Strategy (draft), Mayor of London (2007); The London Housing Strategy Draft for consultation with the London Assembly and functional bodies, Mayor of London (2008); Capital Gains, London Child Poverty Commission (2008); GLA Equal Life Chances for All Policy Statement (Draft), GLA (2008); Moving towards equality for Disabled and Deaf Londoners GLA Disability Equality Scheme, GLA (2005); Faith Equality Scheme, GLA (2005); Gender Equality Scheme 2007-2010, GLA (2007); Race Equality Scheme 2005-2008, GLA (2005); Disability Equality Scheme 2006-2009, TfL (2006); Gender Equality Scheme 2007-2010, TfL (2007); Race Equality Scheme 2008-2011, TfL (2008); Social Enterprises in London, SEL (2007); Accessible London: achieving an inclusive environment, The London Plan Supplementary Planning Guidance, Mayor of London (2004); Sexual Orientation Equality Scheme 2008-2011, TfL (2008).
National
Summary of objectives and targets
The plans and programmes on equality have the overall objective of creating equality in various fields including providing racial and ethnic equality, tackling discrimination in employment or occupation, gender equality and providing equal access for the disabled. On a wider level this involves providing inclusive, balanced and sustainable communities.
Source: Entec UK
Appendix B 9 of 9
October 2009
Table B.5 Plans and Programmes Relevant to Chapter 5, Investing in Londons Future
Sustainability Topic: Biodiversity, Fauna and flora

List of Plans and Programmes International Ramsar Convention on Wetlands of International Importance, especially waterfowl habitat, UN (1971); Bonn Convention on Conservation of Migratory Species, United Nations (1979); The Convention on Biological Diversity, Rio de Janeiro, UN (1992); EU Directive on the Conservation of Wild Birds (79/409/EEC), EC (1979); Bern Convention on the Conservation of European Wildlife and Natural Habitats, EC (1979)); EU Habitats Directive (92/43/EEC), EC (1992); The Sixth Environment Action Programme of the European Community 2002-2012, EC (2002); European Community Biodiversity Strategy (COM98/42), EU (2005) Environmental Liability Directive 2004/35/EC, EC (2004). Planning Policy Guidance Note 2: Green Belts, Office of the Deputy Prime Minister (1995); Planning Policy Statement 9: Biodiversity and Geological Conservation, Office of the Deputy Prime Minister (2005); Wildlife and Countryside Act, EC (1981); Working with the grain of nature: a biodiversity strategy for England, DEFRA (2002); The Conservation (Natural Habitats, &c.) Regulations EC (1994); Biodiversity The UK Action Plan, UK Biodiversity Partnership (1994); Planning Policy Statement 9 (PPS9): Biodiversity and Geological Conservation, DCLG (2005); Conserving Biodiversity The UK Approach, DEFRA (2007); Environmental Protection Act, Secretary of State (1990). Regional Connecting with Londons nature: the Mayors biodiversity strategy, Mayor of London (2002); Development Plan Policies for Biodiversity: Best Practice Guidance of The London Plan, Mayor of London (2005); Londons Biodiversity Action Plan, London Biodiversity Partnership (Ongoing); Connecting with Londons nature The Mayors Biodiversity Strategy, Mayor of London (2002). The London Plan: Spatial Development Strategy for Greater London, Consolidated with Alterations since 2004 (2008)
National
Summary of objectives and targets The plans and programmes covering biodiversity, fauna and flora seek to ensure the conservation of biological diversity; the sustainable use of its components; and the fair and equitable sharing of the benefits arising from the use of genetic resources. Policy particularly seeks to protect those species and habitats that are rare and endangered. A framework is provided that seeks to maintain or restore at favourable conservation status, natural habitats and species of community importance using designations such as Special Areas of Conservation (SAC), Special Protection Areas (SPA) and Ramsar sites. A target is set in Conserving Biodiversity The UK Approach to halt the loss of biodiversity in the UK by 2010. Such objectives filter down into UK planning policy at the national and regional level in order to protect such sites and habitats.
Source: Entec UK
Appendix B 10 of 10
October 2009
Sustainability Topic: Soil (including Contamination and Geology)

List of Plans and Programmes International Framework for the protection of soil and amending Directive 2004/35/EC, EC (2006); Nitrates Directive (91/676/EEC), EC (1991). PPG14 Development on Unstable Land, Department of the Environment (1990); Minerals Policy Statements (MPS) 1 Planning and Minerals, DCLG (2006); UK Soil Indicators Consortium, Defra (2003). Planning Policy Statement 1: Delivering Sustainable Development Planning Policy Statement 23: Planning and Pollution Control Regional London Plan Policy 4A.33 Contaminated Land
National
Summary of objectives and targets The plans and programmes relating to soil aim to create a framework for the protection of soil as a resource. They also aim to reduce water pollution caused or induced by nitrates from agricultural sources. Planning policies across the UK also stipulate that land quality should be a material planning consideration in development control decisions. Policies seek to develop a set of policy relevant and scientifically robust indicators of soil quality that cover all of the functions of soil and to develop a UK monitoring scheme that will better establish the state of our national soils. Further MPS1 sets out to ensure the prudent, efficient and sustainable use of minerals and recycling of suitable materials.
Sustainability Topic: Water (including flood risk)

List of Plans and Programmes International EU Water Framework Directive (2000/60/EC), EC (2000); EU Floods Directive (2007/60/EC), EC (2007); Urban Waste Water Treatment Directive (91/271/EEC), EC (1991); Groundwater Directive (80/68/EEC), EC (1980); Surface Water Abstraction Directive (75/440/EEC), EC (1975). Planning Policy Statement 25 (PPS25): Development and Flood Risk, DCLG (2006); Water resources for the future a strategy for England and Wales, Environment Agency (2001); Water for people and the environment - Water resources strategy for England and Wales, Environment Agency (2009); Future Water, the Governments Water Strategy for England, DEFRA (2008). Regional Water matters The Mayors Draft Water Strategy, Mayor of London (2007); The Mayors Water Strategy (draft), Mayor of London (2008); The London Catchment Abstraction Management Strategy, Environment Agency (2006); The Thames Corridor Catchment Abstraction Management Strategy, Environment Agency (2006); Draft River Basin Management Plan Thames River Basin District (2008). Thames Water, Draft Water Resources Management Plan, 2008
National
Summary of objectives and targets The plans and programmes relating to water quality set standards for drinking water and the wider water environment. Further plans seek to improve water efficiency with a key target being to reduce the average amount of water used per person in the home to 130 litres each day by 2030. The programmes aim to reduce and manage the risks that floods pose to human health, the environment, cultural heritage and economic activity. The plans require Members States to review all watercourses and coastlines to assess the risk from flooding, to map the flood extent and the population and assets at risk in these areas.
Appendix B 11 of 11
October 2009
Sustainability Topic: Air

List of Plans and Programmes International EU Air Quality Framework Directive 1996/62/EC, EU (1996); Clean Air for Europe CAF (2001); EC Ambient Air Quality and Cleaner Air for Europe (2008) (Directive 2008/50/EC), EC (2008); EU Thematic Strategy on Air Quality, EU (2005); Health Effects of Transport-Related Air Pollution, WHO (2005). Planning Policy Statement 23: Planning and Pollution Control, Office of the Deputy Prime Minister (2004); Air Quality Strategy for England, Scotland, Wales and Northern Ireland, DEFRA (2007); Planning Policy Statement 23 (PPS23): Planning and Pollution Control, DCLG (2004); Air Quality Regulations 2000 and The Air Quality (Amendment) Regulations, DEFRA (2002); PSA Delivery Agreement 28 Secure a Healthy Natural Environment for Today and the Future, HM Government (2007); Environment Act, UK Government (1995). Regional Cleaning Londons air: the Mayors air quality strategy, Mayor of London (2002).
National
Summary of objectives and targets The plans and programmes relating to air quality establish a framework for the monitoring and limiting of pollutants. The Air Quality Strategy (The Air Quality Strategy for England, Scotland, Wales and Northern Ireland (2007)) sets national air quality targets for nine air pollutants. Objectives for seven of the air pollutants have been included in national air quality regulations for the purpose of local air quality management, with local authorities being required to work towards the objectives. There is also a system of Pollution Prevention and Control to improve air quality through the regulation of industrial facilities. This system incorporates specific EU requirements in respect of large combustion plants, waste incineration plants and activities emitting solvents. Planning policies across the UK stipulate that Air Quality is capable of being a material planning consideration. The Mayors Air Quality Strategy seeks to minimise the adverse effects of air pollution on human health and in turn improve quality of life in the city.
Sustainability Topic: Cultural heritage (including architectural and archaeological heritage)

List of Plans and Programmes International European Convention on the Protection of the Archaeological Heritage 1992, EC (1992); Convention concerning the Protection of the World Cultural and Natural Heritage, UNESCO (1972); Operational Guidelines for the Implementation of the World Heritage Convention, World Heritage Committee (2008). Planning Policy Guidance 15 (PPG15): Planning and the Historic Environment, Department of the Environment (1994); Consultation paper on the new Planning Policy Statement 15: Planning for the Historic Environment. Planning Policy Guidance 16 (PPG16): Archaeology and Regional London view management framework: supplementary planning guidance, Mayor of London (2005); Regeneration, competitiveness and sustainable development, Greater London Authority (2004); London cultural capital: realising the potential of a world-class city, Mayor of London (2004); London Cultural Capital - Realising the potential of a worldclass city, Mayor of London (2004).
National
Appendix B 12 of 12
October 2009

Planning, DCLG (2006); Ancient Monuments and Archaeological Areas Act, Secretary of State (1979); The Planning (Listed Buildings and Conservation Areas) Act, HM Government (1990); Review of heritage protection: the way forward, Department for Culture, Media and Sport (2004); Annual State of the Historic Environment report, 'Heritage Counts', English Heritage (2008); Sustainable communities: building for the future, Office of the Deputy Prime Minister (2003); Heritage Protection for the 21st Century - White Paper, DCMS (2007); Treasure Act, UK Parliament (1996); Conservation Principles, Policies and Guidance for the Sustainable Management of the Historic Environment, English Heritage (2008); Climate Change and the Historic Environment (guidance paper), English Heritage: (2008); National Heritage Act, UK Parliament (1983, amended 2002). EH/CABE Guidance on Tall Buildings (July 2007) Conservation Principles Policies and Guidance for the sustainable management of the historic environment (2008) Regeneration and the Historic Environment (2005) Heritage Works: The use of historic buildings in regeneration (2008) Retail Development in Historic Areas (2005) Suburbs and the Historic Environment (2007) Building in Context (2001)
Summary of objectives and targets The plans and programmes relating to cultural heritage have the overall aim of protecting, conserving and transmitting archaeology and heritage to future generations. They aim to place the historic environment at the heart of the planning system and to implement a unified heritage protection system that will be easier to understand and use, more efficient, accountable and transparent and that will maximise opportunities for public inclusion and involvement. Across the UK the policies explain how, the development plan and development control systems, give weight to archaeology and heritage in planning decisions and planning conditions. Note that paragraph 1.4-1.5 of the consultation paper of PPG15 highlights that conservation can play a key part in generating and promoting economic prosperity, in that it can attract inward investment due to its recognised environmental quality.
Sustainability Topic: Landscape

List of plans and programmes International European Landscape Convention, Council of Europe (2000). Planning Policy Guidance 17: Planning for Open Space, Sport and Recreation, ODPM (2006); Countryside and Rights of Way Act, UK Parliament (2000); Inclusive Design Strategy, Olympic Delivery Authority (2008); Planning Policy Guidance 2: Green Belts, DCLG (1995) (Amended 2001); National Regional A Tree and Woodland Framework for London, Mayor of London (2005); Greener London - The Mayor's State Of Environment Report for London, Mayor of London (2003).
Appendix B 13 of 13
October 2009
Design Strategy, Olympic Delivery Authority (2007); The National Parks and Access to the Countryside Act, UK Parliament (1949); Environment Act, UK Government (1995); Commons Act, UK Parliament (2006).
Summary of objectives and targets The plans and programmes relating to landscape aim to promote landscape protection, management and planning, and to organise European wide co-operation on landscape issues. National policy seeks to retain and provide well-designed open spaces of high quality and promote access to the countryside. Notably this ties in with maintaining biodiversity and habitats in the UK. Development plans within the UK set out how landscape can be regarded as a material consideration within development decisions.
Source: Entec UK
Appendix B 14 of 14
October 2009
Appendix C Response to Scoping Consultation

This Appendix provides a summary of the consultation responses received from both statutory and non-statutory consultees providing feedback on the Scoping Report (Stage A) of the SA of the revised Economic Development Strategy.
Organisation
Response summary
How issues have been addressed in SA or revised EDS

Noted. Important consideration for SA appraisal under Regeneration and Land use objective 1.
Environment Agency (EA) response to the SA Scoping Report
The Outer London Commission is set to acknowledge the future likely focus on development in outer London; this should be recognised as a key land use issue. This should be considered in the Improving Londons Competitiveness theme. Key sustainability issues for water should recognise: That London is in a water stressed area, has high water consumption and resources are set to be put under additional pressure; and That the flood risk issue should reflect baseline information in terms of covering all sources of flooding, including that fluvial flood risk is an issue on some of the tributaries of the Thames and significant surface water flooding as experienced in 2007.
Noted.
Setting the economic baseline during the recession will lead to skewed results. In turn, longer term economic trends to cover the plan period should be included in the Business Capital of the World chapter. The Investing in Londons Future theme should acknowledge the requirements of the Water Framework Directive (WFD) such as no deterioration in the quality of the water environment and meeting good ecological status/potential and action in the draft Thames River Basin Management Plan.
Noted.
Water Framework Directives requirements to be considered during SA appraisal.
Appendix C 1 of 1
October 2009
Organisation
Response summary

Baseline and plans & programmes sections to be updated following second round of consultation.
A number of additional plans and programmes are recommended to be reviewed and baseline information gathered: The Mayors Outer London Commission: Interim Conclusions (7th July 2009); Thames Estuary 2100 (TE2100) plan; Low carbon and environmental goods and services - an industry analysis (BERR, 2009); Prospectus for London the low carbon economy (Ernst and Young, 2009); London Regional Flood Risk Appraisal (GLA); Every Breath You Take: An investigation into air quality in London - May 2009 (London Assembly); Water for People and the Environment: Thames Regional Action Plan (to be published December 2009) (EA); Draft Water Resources Management Plan (Thames Water); Hidden Infrastructure Report (EA); and Water Framework Directive (WFD) (information used in baseline has been superseded by this in some cases).
EA are concerned that flood risk is not specifically mentioned either as a stand alone objective or as part of another objective within the assessment framework. They therefore ask that either a separate flood risk objective is added or flood risk is included in the title of the Climate Change Adaptation objective. This solution is being employed by the GLA team developing the IIA for the Mayors Climate Change Mitigation and Energy, Air Quality and Municipal Waste strategies. Objective 7 (Stable Economy) should include an appraisal question to address the need for resource efficiency and sustainable resource use. Objective 8 (Climate Change Adaptation) should include an appraisal question that takes into account the economic implications of flooding. The EDS should ensure that the economy and businesses are resilient to flooding in terms of the costs and disruption that it can cause. The London: Business Capital of the World theme has an emphasis on supporting industries where we are already a global leader (higher education, banking, IT, creative industries etc). These industries are highly dependant on electricity use and any growth in these sectors would lead to a larger demand on fuels. The EA would like to see the LDA investigate opportunities in less energy intensive sectors as well as the conventional leading industries. Greater London Authority (GLA) Sustainability Development (SD) Team The team set out that it is good to see an integrated approach being carried out with regard to the SA. However it is noted that that there is potential to bring the findings of the Equality Impact Assessment (EqIA) together within the EDS. In order to improve the involvement of stakeholders, covening a steering group is recommended.
Flood risk and climate change Adaptation is the subject of SA Objective 8. used in the SA. Flood risk (as related to community safety) is also considered as part of the CSIA.
Noted. the promotion of resource efficiency is included in Objective 8, which also considers minimisation of waste. Noted. Guide questions in Objective 8 aim to identify where proposals promote the management of existing or potential future flood risk or aim to minimise flood risk. A guide question (Will it improve the resilience of business and the economy?) is also included in Objective 7. Noted.
Noted.
Noted.
Appendix C 2 of 2
October 2009
Organisation
Response summary

Included in Report, section 3.7 Included in Report, section 3.5. A high level appraisal of the compatibility of EDS themes and SA objectives is included in the appraisal.
The Report should clarify the approach to Habitats Regulation Assessment. Table 1.1 of the Scoping report should include a consistency check against the SA objectives themselves to ensure the Strategy themes are consistent with addressing the sustainability issues for London. In turn the SA must be careful when fitting sustainability issues under each of the strategys themes. The economic section should include analysis or evidence about rises in commodity prices. The report should highlight that London has significant income inequalities alongside the health inequalities outlined. Objectives covering the economy need to pick up specific points around income inequality. Resource efficiency is not picked up in the sustainability issues on page 34. There should be reference to the NERC Act on page 46. The Water Strategy has now been published for consultation. There is a need for consistency in the way the report sometimes talks about how the baseline will evolve in relation to the specific strategy theme and others not. Objective 7 could be renamed Resources and Waste, to give a greater economic focus. Natural England English Heritage Natural England responded but outlined they had no comments to make at this stage. We would draw your attention to the consultation paper on the new Planning Policy Statement 15: Planning for the Historic Environment and encourage you to consider its contents. It is accepted that it is only a consultation document and therefore subject to change, but it does provide an insight of the change in national policy relating to the historic environment. The summary of objectives and targets (page 49) should highlight the guidance provided in paragraph 1.4-1.5 of PPG15, that conservation can play a key part in generating and promoting economic prosperity, in that it can attract inward investment due to its recognised environmental quality. In general we support the details provided (page 52 and Appendix D), however we would seek to ensure that the baseline information acknowledges the wider historic environment and the contribution of both designated and non-designated assets in defining the historic character and distinctiveness of places and London as a whole.
Comment appears to relate to draft EDS. However, implications noted for baseline. Comment appears to relate to draft EDS. However, implications noted for baseline.
Noted. The promotion of resource efficiency is included in Objective 8, which also considers minimisation of waste. Plans & programmes updated. Updated where necessary throughout report. Comment noted and reflected throughout report.
Uncertain reference (Objective 11?). No action taken. No action necessary. Noted. This has been added to the review of policies, plans and programmes in Appendix B
Noted. This is taken account of in the detailed assessment matrices in Appendix G
Noted. This is taken account of in the detailed assessment matrices in Appendix G
Appendix C 3 of 3
October 2009
Organisation
Response summary

Noted. This is taken account of in the detailed assessment matrices in Appendix G.
It should be noted under the Likely Evolution of the Baseline that the historic environment has made and will continue to contribute to the economic regeneration and prosperity of London. For example the refurbishment of the Listed Buildings at St Pancras/Kings Cross area has helped generate an improvement in the environment quality and reinforcement in the character of the place, attracted additional investment and provided economic, social and environmental benefits. The following guide question should be added: - Will it support and enhance cultural heritage?
Noted. Guide question has been added.
Appendix C 4 of 4
October 2009
Appendix D Iterative Comments and Responses

Below is the record of the iterative process that has helped inform and develop the policies. Suggestions were made by technical experts following consideration of the potential effects to try and make the policies more sustainable.
Chapter 1 Proposal 1b 3rd para Proposal 1j Chapter 2 Introductory text 2nd para Proposal 2k Chapter 3
The current structure of independent agencies with their own funding streams does not incentivise collaborative working. Could this be expanded on? Is this the responsibility of the Major?
More in second draft
Proposal has been modified, but Mayor has a legitimate interest
The introductory text needs to include a sentence on improving quality of life and the link to increased productivity. Link with social care important here, especially in terms of addressing underlying problems faced by London.
Better in next draft
Agree: amended in next draft
Does greening of transport require its own proposal? (or is this in Transport Plan) Should there be a proposal that relates to supporting education and public awareness of climate change and greening the economy? Chapter 4 Key stages described Early years and schooling, gaining and retaining employment, progressing and acquiring higher skills what about re-investing experience through the elderly? 3rd para: This para discusses measures that have been less successful to date how will these measures be tailored or improved upon then to improve their efficacy? This proposal does not discuss measures for removing barriers for all target groups for example does not mention people with disabilities, elderly, or lesbian, gay and transgender people. 2nd to last para: The key agencies also need to work to improve the career progression prospects so that in-work poverty can be cut. is career progression the crux of the issue or is it wages that are too low to support basic standards of living? Last para: If there are fewer jobs available in average pay sectors, this proposal does not describe how it will support making more of these available. Suggestion is that proposals to overcome institutional barriers within businesses to improve employment are addressed e.g. promoting the concept of part time working for single mothers. Proposal 4e The normal presumption of many economists is that higher skills are required
In new draft & MTS Yes in new draft
Yes in new draft
Proposal 4c
See new draft which has made substantial additions
Agree in new draft
Appendix D 5 of 5
October 2009

in future economy this is important for innovation and technologically demanding employment. It has been suggested by some commentators that it is in fact wider skills that are demanded. Workers in most sectors now have to be able to use ICT, wordprocess documents, use a range of communication and interpersonal skills, etc. As this is not recognised these are not well monitored but is clearly a key barrier to employment for many.
Chapter 5 General Seems to avoid mention of sustainable development Amended in new draft
Appendix D 6 of 6
October 2009
Appendix E Health Impact Assessment

The Health Impact Assessment was undertaken by Institute of Occupational Medicine and is provided below. The issues raised here are also drawn on within the assessment chapters of this SA Report (Section 4).
Summary of London's key health challenges

London is relatively young, ethnically diverse population with high mobility and population growth. There are wide inequalities in living conditions, and other socio-economic factors that have an influence on health. These inequalities exist between people living in different parts of London, between different ethnic groups, age groups and other groups. Londoners are slightly more likely than the population of England as a whole to assess their health as good. Boroughs in inner east London and Bangladeshi and Pakistani communities are least likely to assess their health as good and have lower levels of self-reported good health. London as a whole has a slightly below average mortality rates and slightly higher life expectancy than England as a whole, but has above average rates of premature mortality from circulatory disease, and wide inequalities between boroughs/PCTs. Rates of some infectious diseases such as HIV/AIDS and TB are high. Key lifestyle health challenges in London include obesity, smoking and alcohol in adults and children. Employment can protect mental health by boosting confidence and self-esteem and affects physical health through improved access to commercial goods and services. London has the lowest rate of employment in the working age population of all the regions in England. There are geographical variations in unemployment between the inner and outer London as well as variations between different ethnic groups and those with disabilities. London has a lower proportion of people with mental illness in employment and significantly lower rates of incapacity benefit claimants for people with mental and behavioural disorders. However, this is unlikely to be the result of more people with mental health problems in work, but rather that many people with severe and disabling mental health problems are neither working nor receiving appropriate benefits. London displays some of the highest rates of mental illness in England. London has the second highest estimated prevalence of possible psychiatric disorder after North East England. It has significantly higher rates of admissions for schizophrenia and higher rates of adults are also detained in hospital under the Mental Health Act (1983). While regional comparisons suggest that London has similar rates of suicide and undetermined death to the overall figures for England, additional LHO analysis shows that suicide rates are significantly higher than the England average within some inner London boroughs.
Appendix E 1 of 1
October 2009
There is also strong evidence that social and community factors have an important influence on mental wellbeing and ill-health. Over 1 in 4 of Londoners has reported a high level of anxiety about violent crime compared to only 1 in six of respondents in England. London has the highest rate of all reported violent crime. Londoners also have poorer social networks and support overall. For example, Londoners are less likely to speak to relatives by phone or talk to neighbours on a weekly basis compared to all other regions in England. This may reflect the much higher diversity and movement of populations into and out of London.
Guide questions to analyse the Health and Wellbeing Objective

Guide questions used in the SA Objective on health and well being (Objective 3) include: Will it help reduce poverty and the impact of income inequality? Will it help reduce health inequalities? Will it help improve mental and emotional health? Will it help improve access to high quality public services (including health facilities)?
Assessment of Mayors Vision and Objectives

Section A1. - The Mayors Vision: The Mayors vision for sustainable development and the five economic objectives are consistent with improving health and wellbeing of all Londoners and reducing health inequalities. There is emphasis on integrating the EDS with the other London Plan and Strategies e.g. Transport Strategy, Housing Strategy, etc. Section A6. - Cross Cutting Themes: This assessment recommends consideration is given to the inclusion of an additional cross cutting theme (see section A6) for the EDS to help ensure that that some aspects of Health and Well-being are addressed: Healthy workplaces. Not currently discussed in the EDS directly, though a big policy push nationally, both to keep people in work, ensure they are productive and maintain and enhance their physical/mental health generally from a QoL community perspective. This links to the creation of office space as well as improving current stock and to promoting best workplace practices to keep London competitive and attract workers and investment already in the present draft. (Chapter 2) Healthy neighbourhoods. This links to discussions on greener, safer and more inclusive s well as to climate change and community volunteering. (Chapters 2 and 4) Healthy homes. This links to discussions on homes, regeneration employment developments. (Chapter 4) Healthy transport. This links to discussions on greener active travel and public transport improvements plus reduction in air pollution through the use of green technologies. (Chapter 5)
Appendix E 2 of 2
October 2009
Healthy industry. This links to discussions on energy from waste, other manufacturing businesses and combined heat and power facilities. With the proximity of employment and homes, there is a need to ensure pollution is minimised and regulated to reduce public concern and potential for pollution. (Chapters 2 and 5) NOTE: We note that the published consultation version of the revised EDS included the following additional cross cutting themes: Community safety, health and health inequalities and Climate change adaptation and mitigation. Section A16. The Mayors Guiding Economic Principles: The importance of targeting equity and low carbon objectives is highlighted in the Mayors guiding economic principles and is welcomed. It would be worthwhile defining what is meant by equity. A recent WHO Commission on the Social Determinants of Health described equity in a conceptual framework discussion paper as; The absence of unfair and avoidable or remediable differences in health among population groups defined socially, economically, demographically or geographically. In essence, health inequities are health differences which are: socially produced; systematic in their distribution across the population; and unfair. Identifying a health difference as inequitable is not an objective description, but necessarily implies an appeal to ethical norms. Section A16. The Mayors Guiding Economic Principles: In the Section on Do the benefits outweigh the costs?, this assessment recommends consideration be given to amend the second sentence to; Agencies should also take account of any potential disbenefits, such as market distortion or equity impacts, and be confident that they are outweighed by the benefits. Section A17. The GLA group will evaluate its own programmes and projects and use its knowledge of what works to inform future selection and design. Robust quantitative evidence will help determine future investment priorities. Qualitative assessments of what worked well can aid agencies in designing future interventions. The approach to project evaluation is with the use of both quantitative and qualitative is likely to be important to ensure that health effects are considered and can help shape future priorities.
Assessment of Chapter 1 London: World Capital of Business

This assessment considers that the proposals in this chapter are generally consistent with the objective of improving the health and wellbeing of Londoners and reducing health inequalities.
Assessment of Chapter 2 Improving Londons Competitiveness

This assessment considers that the proposals in this chapter are generally consistent with the objective of improving the health and wellbeing of Londoners and reducing health inequalities. In relation to Proposal 2G, Paragraph 2.31 recognises the importance of quality of life, and therefore wellbeing, of Londoners and its importance in creating a competitive global economy to attract overseas investment and skilled labour. This assessment recommends consideration is given to highlight the importance of quality of life in creating a skilled and productive local labour force. This issue is developed further in Paragraph 2.35 under the Proposal 2H
Appendix E 3 of 3
October 2009
working with the NHS and partners but it may benefit from being noted in Paragraph 2.31. Paragraph 2.34 highlights the importance of the built environment to quality of life (and hence wellbeing). Proposal 2H states that the Mayor will work with the NHS and partners to improve health in London and reduce health inequalities are considered to be strongly aligned with the objectives considered in this assessment. Given the focus on quality of life (and implicitly wellbeing) it is recommended that consideration be given to referring to health as health and wellbeing, that is; The Mayor will work with the NHS and partners to improve health and wellbeing in London and reduce health inequalities. In addition, it is recommended that consideration be given to amending Paragraph 2.35 which does not highlight the important role of non-health and social care services, e.g. local authority services and the voluntary sector, in enhancing health and wellbeing and preventing ill health. Proposal 2J which states that the Mayor will work with the Metropolitan Police, boroughs and other partners to increase safety drive down crime and particularly to counter business crime in the capital, is considered to be strongly aligned with the objectives considered in this assessment. This assessment recommends consideration is given to further highlighting the importance of preventing crime through well designed neighbourhoods, providing economic opportunities for everyone and creating a socially inclusive London at this point. It is noted this is included in later Proposals in Chapter 5.
Assessment of Chapter 3 Making the Transition to a Low Carbon Economy

This assessment considers that the proposals in this chapter are generally consistent with the objective of improving the health and wellbeing of Londoners and reducing health inequalities. Proposals 3A (the Mayor will lead by example and work with partners to ensure that London realises the great economic opportunities associated with the move to a low carbon economy) and Proposal 3E (the Mayor will create a policy framework to address climate change and will work with partners to improve their environmental performance) are considered to be strongly aligned with the objectives considered in this assessment.
Assessment of Chapter 4 Extending Opportunity to All Londoners

This assessment considers that all the proposals in this chapter are strongly aligned with the objective of improving the health and wellbeing of Londoners and reducing health inequalities: Proposal 4A on working towards the target to end child poverty by 2020. It is noted that childhood poverty is an important influence on physical and mental health and wellbeing across the life course. Proposal 4B to ensure that young people have the right knowledge, skills and confidence to succeed in Londons labour market.
Appendix E 4 of 4
October 2009
Proposal 4C to raise Londons employment rate by removing barriers and disincentives and providing more personalised employment advice services. As noted previously, employment is one potential important source of personal and social esteem. Proposal 4D that the mayor will work with partners to improve training and employability support to help people secure and retain a job with a particular focus on neighbourhoods with high concentrations of worklessness. Proposal 4E that the Mayor will work with partners to help meet the aspirations of Londoners to acquire relevant skills and qualifications to progress in their careers. Proposal 4F that the Mayor will work with the Homes and Communities Agency, boroughs, and other partners to ensure there is sufficient and suitable housing to meet the needs of Londons growing population and workforce and to address problems of homelessness and overcrowding. Housing and shelter are important determinants of health and wellbeing.
Assessment of Chapter 5 Investing in Londons Future

This assessment considers that the proposals in this chapter are generally consistent with the objective of improving the health and wellbeing of Londoners and reducing health inequalities. A number are considered to be strongly aligned to these objectives: Proposal 5A that Mayor will work with partners to strengthen the economy across London including removing barriers to outer London fulfilling its potential, and to support the development of town centres in outer and inner London as hubs for their communities and local economies. Proposal 5D that the Mayor will work with boroughs, developers and other partners to identify capacity to accommodate large-scale employment and housing development, including in the London Plan Opportunity Areas, through the planning system, transport proposals and investment support. Proposal 5G that the mayor will work with LDA, TfL and partners to achieve the full economic development benefits of Londons transport schemes and to bring forward the necessary further investment in Londons infrastructure. Proposal 5H that the Mayor ill work with partners in the wider South East to achieve mutual economic benefits from investment. It is important to ensure that Londons prosperity is not built at the expense of its regional neighbours.
Appendix E 5 of 5
October 2009
Appendix F Community Safety Impact Appraisal

Purpose and scope of Appraisal
The Crime and Disorder Act (as amended by the Police and Justice Act 2006) places an obligation on certain organisations to do all they reasonably can to prevent crime and disorder. The LDAs Community Safety and Crime Reduction Policy Statement sets out the context to its duty in respect to this issue (reproduced at the end of this section of the Appendix). It is understood that the LDA has no direct intervention in terms of crime and disorder, nor any direct powers in respect of crime and disorder (e.g. the power to issue Anti-Social Behaviour Orders etc). This means that scope of the LDAs work in this area relates to promoting community safety (for example, by embedding Secured by Design principles in development) as well as considering such issues in delivery and evaluation processes, with commensurate guidance and training for staff to help them evaluate the impacts of programmes on community safety. The Community Safety Impact Appraisal was undertaken by Entec and is provided below. The issues raised here are also drawn on within the assessment chapters of this SA Report (Section 4).
Summary of Londons key safety and security statistics

The following are some of Londons key statistics relating to community safety10: The number of total crimes recorded in London fell by 1.6% (from August 2008 to August 2009). The total number of burglaries rose by 3.2% (from August 2008 and August 2009). Motor vehicle theft fell 9.3% from 115,309 in the 12 months to August 2008 to 104,561 in the 12 months to August 2009. Homicides are down by nearly 25% over the same period. Knife crime has been reduced by nearly 12%. Youth violence is down by nearly 10%. In 2008/09, 34,378 offences of street crime were recorded. This is a decrease of 39% since 2003/04. In total there were 844,245 crimes recorded by the Metropolitan Police during 2008/09, the lowest
10
Metropolitan Police, Crime Figures for London, 2008 http://www.met.police.uk/crimefigures/
Appendix F 1 of 1
October 2009
since comparable records started in 1998/99. Since 2003/04, overall recorded crime has reduced by 20% (or 216,685 fewer offences)2. There are two main SA Objectives that reflect Community Safety, namely: Objective 14 (Liveability and Place) to create sustainable, mixed use environments that promote long-term social cohesion, sustainable lifestyles, safety and security, and a sense of place. The guide questions are: Will it promote safety through, for example; design or education? Will it reduce risk of accidents, casualties or property loss? Will it reduce actual levels of crime? Will it reduce the fear of crime? Will it reduce antisocial behaviour? Will it reduce actual noise levels and disturbances from noise? Will it reduce the risk of terrorist attack? Will it reduce the risk of terrorist attack?
Objective 8 (Flood Risk and Climate Change Adaptation) to ensure London adapts to the effects of climate change (both now and in the future). The guide questions are: Will it protect London from climate change impacts? Will it minimise the risk of flooding from rivers and watercourses to people and property? Will it manage existing flood risks appropriately and avoid new flood risks?
Appraisal of Vision and Objectives

The Mayors vision specifically highlights that London should lead the world in its approach to tackling the urban challenges of the 21st century, particularly that of climate change which gives an indication that the strategy is strongly aligned to the objectives of tackling climate change and the potential minimisation of climate change impacts on its population (SA Objective 8). The vision also states that the strategy will promote neighbourhoods and identity; and values responsibility, compassion and citizenship. which can be taken to indicate a strong focus and importance placed on issues related to the Liveability and Place objective (SA Objective 14). Of the five objectives set out in the initial part of the revised draft EDS it is: Objective 2 ( to improve the quality of life); Objective 3 (that is, in part, concerned with the mitigation of the effects of climate change); Objective 4
Appendix F 2 of 2
October 2009
( to improve opportunities for those most in poverty) and Objective 5 (to steer investment to places that most need it, including outer London) that are considered to be most likely to contain proposals that are aligned with Community Safety objectives. Note that this high-level review of the compatibility of EDS objectives with those in this CSIA is further appraised within the appraisal of specific proposals in each of the Chapters below:
Appraisal of Chapter 1 World Capital of Business

The proposals (Proposal 1A and 1C) chapter is predominantly concerned with the promotion of London to wider international businesses with the aim of attracting inward investment as well as obtaining greater efficiency through the co-ordination of these types of promotional activities. However, Proposal 1B is concerned with the promotional opportunities that the 2012 Olympic Games may present. There are likely to be distinct opportunities to help overcome outdated and negative perceptions of the city. In addition, the international focus on London and the importance of the visitor experience to encourage visitors (both from the UK and abroad) to return and businesses to invest in London will be significant. Therefore, it is likely that the LDA can help fulfil part of its role to promote community safety and reducing crime and disorder. Community safety and the promotion of stronger and more cohesive communities are key themes that may be important to communicate to visitors and potential investors. There is also the potential to promote examples of best practice, with regard to physical regeneration and the use of tools such as Secured By Design and the value added that can be achieved from promoting models of community asset-based regeneration. These suggestions are recognised and further elaborated within Proposal 5C. There are unlikely to be any other significant positive or negative effects towards the objectives other than those identified above.
Appraisal of Chapter 2 Improving Londons Competitiveness

Proposals within Chapter 2 are concerned with ensuring that London has the most competitive business environment and includes support for innovation, supporting business competitiveness, and improving quality of life and making London as attractive as possible to investment, business and workers. Proposal 2C is concerned with monitoring a number of factors that affect Londons competitiveness and identify where corrective actions are required. Quality of life is one of the 12 measures used to rank London against other European Cities and London has ranged from 7th (in 2006) to 14th (2008) out of 29 for this measure. Specific measures to overcome this perceived weakness are not identified as part of this objective. It is uncertain if the perception of crime and other aspects of community safety have factored in Londons rank. Proposal 2F concerns the working of the Mayor with neighbouring regions to secure and share the costs of investment in transport, water, energy and other infrastructure. The banks of the Thames Estuary are shared with the South East and East of England regions as well as the catchments for most of Londons major watercourses and aquifers. Although not specifically described, this proposal is likely to include joint provision of key flood related
Appendix F 3 of 3
October 2009
infrastructure which will, together with the assistance of key agencies and authorities, help minimise the risk of flooding from rivers and watercourses to people and property in London. River or tidal flooding of the Thames can be very costly and this proposal, whilst it does not specifically mention flood defence, represents a significant contribution to this aspect of community safety. Proposal 2G highlights that London has many neighbourhoods that suffer from poor design, graffiti and litter, loss of front gardens, high levels of air and noise pollution and an overall sense of neglect, which tends to destroy community life and deter investment. These problems, taken together, contribute to the perception of London as a less attractive place than some of its competitor cities. The EDS notes the Mayors Leading to a Greener London has led to the inclusion of a number of measures in the London Plan to improve the qualityand to encourage massive improvements in the most degraded places. Whilst specific details of proposals are included in the London Plan, the overall effect of such proposals are likely to have an indirect positive effect on community safety: Proposals that improve the quality of the built (and planted) environment may help encourage a sense of pride in a place, reduce the fear of crime and antisocial behaviour. Specific proposals, such as the upgrading of run-down parks may provide an opportunity to ensure in their design that they become more safe and secure environments. This proposal has the potential to make a significant contribution to Community Safety in the short to medium-term. The Proposal describes paying for improvements using efficiency savings which might be a once only sum. The identification of long term and sustainable sources of funding for such proposals is important to ensure that regular maintenance is carried out on improved locations. Proposal 2I includes some measures to improve and promote Londons overall cultural, sporting and entertainment offer. This includes support to the night-time economy, which contributes to Londons work city role yet makes no specific mention of potential community safety which might be important in the context. However, Proposal 2J, that follows, is dedicated to community safety objectives and states that The Mayor will work with the Metropolitan Police, boroughs and other partners to increase safety, drive down crime and particularly to counter business crime in the capital. Detailed proposals or specific measures are not set out in the EDS yet it notes that The Mayor, Metropolitan Police Authority and London Fire Brigade will continue to take measures to: increase safety, reduce crime, to counter fraud, business and cyber crime, and raise awareness of risks to businesses and employees
It is clear that this proposal is intended to make a significant contribution to community safety but the lack of any detailed proposals here makes it difficult to assess the character of potential effects. It is also noted as part of Proposal 2J that: The Mayor has been enthused by initiatives such as London Citizens CitySafe which may indicate a potential model for delivery, whereby communities and local businesses are collaborate to tackle crime
Appendix F 4 of 4
October 2009
and safeguard themselves. Proposal 2J also notes that the Mayors priorities include combating violence against women and serious youth violence. There are unlikely to be any other significant positive or negative effects towards the objectives other than those identified above.
Appraisal of Chapter 3 Making the Transition to a Low Carbon Economy

The EDS notes that the Mayor committed to cut carbon emissions in London by 60 per cent by 2025. Proposals within the chapter are concerned with the measures to help London move towards a low carbon economy and maximise opportunities that are created. The types of measures include ensuring that Londons businesses have the capacity to assist in the adaptation and mitigation activities as well as direct measures to minimise carbon emissions and adapt to the potential effects of climate change. Proposal 3B includes the promotion by the Mayor for better access to finance and a competitive tax regime which included tax breaks for green industries and incentives and stimulus packages for low carbon investment. These types of instruments are likely to help secure funding for some for the infrastructure necessary to help protect London from the impacts of climate change and minimise risks of flooding, although there is some uncertainty as to whether the Mayor will be able to influence taxes where these are decided a the national level. It is noted that more details will be included in a developing Climate Change Mitigation and Energy Strategy. The Proposal (3B) also recognises that London is likely to become more water stressed in the future as its population and demand for water infrastructure increases It notes that this issue is being addressed through the Mayors Water Strategy. Policy 3E also refers to the Mayors developing Climate Change Mitigation and Energy Strategy and notes that it will include the strategic planning framework to address the transition to a Low Carbon Economy. In this, the Proposal (3E) suggests that the Mayor will raise awareness of mitigation and adaptation measures for business and will publish advice to ensure that buildings are designed for the hotter summers to come and will explore opportunities to help SMEs to develop business continuity and risk management plans which ensure they are aware of and adapted to climate change. This specific recommendation is likely to have a significant impact on the preparedness of businesses that become involved and is considered to strongly support this objective (objective 8, Flood Risk and Climate Change Adaptation). Whilst infrastructure to minimise the risk of flooding from rivers and watercourses to people and property has not been specifically included in the Proposals of the EDS it is recognised that this aspect is covered by the London Plan which aims, within London Plan Policy 5.12, to ensure that new and existing developments do not increase the risk of flooding or are designed to be flood resilient and safe to evacuate. The cumulative effect of these plans is likely to address this aspect and have a positive effect on community safety. There are unlikely to be any other significant positive or negative effects towards the objectives other than those identified above.
Appendix F 5 of 5
October 2009

Appraisal of Chapter 4 Extending Opportunity to All Londoners
Chapter 4 includes a range of proposals that aim to help give Londoners the opportunity to take part in Londons economic success, access sustainable employment and progress their careers. Proposals form part on an overall drive to improve life quality, along with proposals around health, safety, environment and culture set out under Objective 2. Proposal 4A aims to help break the cycle of low achievement, limited ambition and poor educational outcomes among some groups and some areas and notes that in some cases removing the barriers to work faced by parents and improving career progression and skills development can be key It is considered that such proposals may indirectly help reduce actual levels of crime and antisocial behaviour: it may affect a number of young people who might otherwise become disaffected. This is likely to be a difficult objective to achieve that may require a complicated set of measures of support through different agencies and programmes but can be significant in its effect given that it tackles some of the underlying aspects that ultimately affect aspects of Objective 14 (Liveability and Place), such as; long-term social cohesion, safety and security, and a sense of place. Proposal 4B continues some of these themes and aims to help ensure that Londons young have appropriate opportunities to gain knowledge, skills and confidence to succeed in the labour market and seeks to support particularly vulnerable groups, including refugee and asylum seeker children, children in care and care leavers. The proposal (4B) continues to promote targeted initiatives to turn around the lives of youngsters, who have ended up engaged in anti-social and criminal behaviour, by building their skills and confidence and getting them into employment. Initiatives include: The Time for Action programme which supports work on Project Titan and enables the roll out of YOU London which the partnership of uniformed and non-uniformed youth organisations. The Mayor also has a Young Londoners Fund which focuses support on helping the young develop new skills. In addition the Mayor assists 16-18 year olds not in education, employment or training (NEET) through work with the LSC and Boroughs. The Mayor also supports volunteering, which is noted as a way to help youngsters help develop their skills, find out more about their local community, build new networks and widen their horizons.
This proposal is strongly aligned with community safety objectives concerning liveability and place (Objective 14) and, similarly to other objectives in the chapter, whilst is likely to be complicated to implement, is expected to have significant positive effects on those individuals involved. Proposal 4C aims to raise Londons employment rate which is noted to have a significant impact on the capitals crime levels and describes measures to try and change the nature of services and support to people trying to find employment. The extent that the Mayor can affect some national skills and employment services is uncertain but a reorganisation along the lines described is likely to help contribute to one of the underlying causes of crime.
Appendix F 6 of 6
October 2009
Similarly Proposal 4F aims, with partners such as the HCA, to address housing needs and the problems of homelessness and overcrowding and notes that There is a clear link between housing availability, and the ability and motivation of Londoners to take up work which is also likely to be a factor that contributes to a general disaffection felt by some. There are unlikely to be any other significant positive or negative effects towards the objectives other than those identified above.
Appraisal of Chapter 5 Investing in Londons Future

Chapter 5 highlights the scale of growth anticipated for London by 2031 (1.3 million increase) and notes that this, together with opportunities to foster economic growth and address some needs of less well performing areas (Londons prosperity must be spread to parts that remain blighted by poor transport access, high crime, low employment and skills, insufficient or low quality housing, degraded environment and uninspired urban design and architecture.) needs investment in growth and regeneration. Proposal 5A, which refers to key London Plan policies, includes the designation of Strategic Outer London Development Centres which the Mayor believes that town centres should perform a core community and economic role in both outer and inner London and are important nodes for future development with opportunities to fostering a sense of community. This proposal also includes support to encourage the continued designation of Business Improvement Districts (BIDs), which are effective vehicles for collaborative working, in town centres and elsewhere. Evaluations undertaken by the LDA (Evaluation of Business Link for London) have shown BIDs to be especially important in improving environmental quality, safety and tackling crime in industrial and employment areas. The effects of the policy on community safety are likely to be beneficial as the promotion of safe and secure built environments will help reduce the fear of crime and antisocial behaviour. Proposal 5B refers to policies in the London Plan that identifies areas for expansion including the City Fringe. City centres and edge-of-centre developments are often areas where antisocial behaviour and crimes take place, particularly during evenings. The policies will have a positive effect upon the objective by ensuring that the various developments and areas are safe and secure for local users at all times. Proposals 5A, 5B, 5C, 5D, 5E and 5F all identify a number of areas for regeneration that are set within the London Plan and . Areas identified for regeneration are often those that are most deprived and have high levels of crime. Ensuring that these regenerated areas consider the issue of safety in their design is likely to result in a positive effect on community safety. Proposal 5F includes that the Mayor will encourage a strong sense of place and community with the physical and social infrastructure needed to create attractive places to live, work and enjoy a high quality of life. The Mayors London Housing Design Guide encourages better standards of design. The Mayor will work with the Metropolitan Police Authority to improve safety in neighbourhoods. It goes on to recognise that The development of these centres is primarily a matter for the local borough councils through their local economic development assessments, plans and activities. The Mayor will encourage their efforts and use the London Plan to
Appendix F 7 of 7
October 2009
promote and enhance a strong sense of place and community. These proposals are expected to strongly and positively contribute to community safety (particularly Objective 14, Liveability and Place). Proposal 5G notes that the Mayors Transport Strategy contains proposals to further strengthen Londons strategic public transport network. It also promotes smaller scale improvements designed to increase the capacity of existing systems, including orbital movement. The Mayor is encouraging many more journeys to work by bicycle and on foot. Whilst it has not been specifically mentioned here, the proposals included in the transport strategy are expected to provide opportunities to ensure that walking and cycling routes are accessible, safe and convenient. These aspects of community safety as they relate to travel across London are not covered by the EDS but included in more detail in the proposals of the London Plan and Mayors Transport Strategy, for example: London Plan Policy 6.2 refers to improving the reliability and safety of the transport network and states that the Mayor will work with strategic partners to coordinate measures to ensure that the transport network, now and in the future, is as safe and secure as reasonably practicable; and London Plan Policy 6.12 (Road network capacity) also places an emphasis on ensuring that when increasing road capacity, the safety of all users should be considered.
These policies in combination across the different plans, should therefore have a positive impact upon community safety and security. There are unlikely to be any other significant positive or negative effects towards the objectives other than those identified above.
Appendix F 8 of 8
October 2009
London Development Agency Community Safety and Crime Reduction Policy Statement (http://www.lda.gov.uk/server.php?show=ConWebDoc.1745)
Background The London Development Agency (LDA) is the Mayors Agency for business and jobs. Together with the Greater London Authority (GLA); the London Fire and Emergency Planning Authority (LFEPA); Metropolitan Police Authority (MPA); and Transport for London (TfL), we form the GLA Group, which reports to the Mayor of London. Introduction Our Community Safety and Crime Reduction Policy Statement sets out: Our role and that of other Regional Development Agencies (RDAs) Our understanding of our role in relation to promoting community safety and reducing crime and disorder.
The Role of Englands Regional Development Agencies Each RDA has five statutory purposes listed in section 4 of the Regional Development Agencies Act 1998 (c.45): To further economic development and regeneration To promote business efficiency, investment and competitiveness To promote employment To enhance development and application of skill relevant to employment To contribute to sustainable development
These were amended under the London Olympic Games and Paralympic Games Act 2006 at section 36. "The purposes of a regional development agency (listed in section 4 of the Regional Development Agencies Act 1998 (c. 45) shall include the purpose of preparing for the London Olympics" following a request to do so by the Olympic Delivery Authority. In addition, under section 5(1) of the Regional Development Agencies Act 1998 an RDA can "do anything which it considers expedient for its purposes, or for purposes incidental thereto". (It is under this provision that the LDA has adopted Section 17 of the Crime and Disorder Act 1998 as amended by the Police and Justice Act 2006.) RDAs have limited human and financial resources with which to deliver to their five statutory purposes. Each RDA therefore works with a broad range of stakeholders within their region and in partnership with the private,
Appendix F 9 of 9
October 2009
public and voluntary and community sectors within their region in order to develop and deliver the Economic Strategy for the region. Section 17 of the Crime and Disorder Act 1998 requires those bodies to which it applies to exercise their various functions with due regard to both the likely effect of the exercise of those functions on crime and disorder in their area and the need to do all they reasonably can to prevent crime and disorder in their area. The Role of the LDA in relation to Community Safety and Crime Reduction Together with Equalities, Health and Sustainability, Community Safety is one of the LDAs four cross-cutting themes. A degraded and unsafe physical environment; high levels of anti-social behaviour; lack of social capital and cohesion; and crime and fear of crime all act as inhibitors to sustainable social, economic and environmental development. Our regional strategic role, working with partners from the public, private and third sectors, helps to tackle economic and social disadvantage, which is a major contributory factor to the incidence of crime and disorder, has broad and positive impacts on community safety. In March 2006 the LDA, at the invitation of the Mayor, voluntarily adopted S.17 of the Crime and Disorder Act 1998. In July 2006, following the review of the Mayors powers a recommendation was made and endorsed that the GLA Group members not currently having statutory duties with respect to S.17 (Greater London Authority, LDA, Transport for London) should statutorily adopt an enhanced S.17 as amended by the Police and Justice Act 2006. This confers on us a statutory duty to observe "the need to do all that it reasonably can to prevent, (a) crime and disorder in its area (including anti-social and other behaviour adversely affecting the local environment); and (b) the misuse of drugs, alcohol and other substances in its area". The Mayor's priority is to promote Community Safety and reduce crime and disorder. There is a symbiotic relationship between safer, stronger and more cohesive communities. A range of agencies, including the central role played by the third sector, as well as the private and public sectors, have a major role to play in building economic capital as well as social capital and cohesion. In order to maximise promotion of community safety, and stronger and more cohesive communities as part of sustainable social, economic and environmental development we aim to: Embed community safety and the promotion of stronger and more cohesive communities in the mainstream of all our activity in line with the Mayors Economic Development Strategy four investment themes: Places and Infrastructure; Supporting People; Enterprise; Marketing and Promoting London. Promote examples of best practice, particularly with regard to physical regeneration and the use of tools such as Secured By Design and the value added that can be achieved from promoting models of community asset-based regeneration. Work closely in key areas of activity with our partners and stakeholders, particularly fellow members of the GLA Group (for example, Transport for London where infrastructure projects include transport routes and infrastructure; Metropolitan Police local borough command in order to link Safer Neighbourhoods teams with area regeneration projects).
Appendix F 10 of 10
October 2009
In addition, we have the lead role for Community Safety and Crime Reduction with the Home Office and the Ministry of Justice; and for the Third Sector with the Cabinet Office, Office of the Third Sector; for Englands RDAs. Some Examples of our approach to mainstreaming community safety and reduce crime and disorder into our interventions Investing in Supporting People We are members of the London Resettlement Board. The Board is convened by Government Office for London. Board members work together to achieve the objectives in the London Resettlement Strategy. The objectives of the strategy are to: Establish a multi-agency, coordinated and integrated response to meeting the resettlement and rehabilitation needs of offenders in London. Contribute to the building of safer communities through the provision of effective programmes and interventions for offenders, before, during and post custody Place end-to-end offender management and evidence based practice at the heart of rehabilitation, ensuring and offender-centered service response. Reduce the risk of harm to victims, communities and vulnerable groups Contribute to the overall aim of the criminal and Youth Justice System to prevent re-offending and protect the public; and Enable the Prison service, the Probation Service and the Youth Justice Board to achieve the shared target of reducing re-offending by 5%.
These objectives are delivered through the London Reducing Re-offending Action Plan. We have a planning and strategic role in the development of the Mayor's Adult Skills Strategy, which is determined by the London Skills and Employment Board, chaired by the Mayor. In addition, the LDA has a number of projects that are targeted at enhancing skills, employability and workforce development. We work with a range of delivery partners to address worklessness. We often particularly target our strategic investments towards people who experience multiple disadvantage and who are furthest from the labour market. We recognise also that low skills or educational attainment; lack of employment, together with lack of access to safe, quality housing provision can often be a contributory factor in re-offending; as well as being major contributory factors to economic and social disadvantage and poor community safety. Investing in Enterprise We are the leading RDA in England in developing support to facilitate the development of Business Improvement Districts (BIDs). LDA support through our investment in the regional BIDs programme includes: supporting
Appendix F 11 of 11
October 2009
information (website, events etc.); consultancy advice; the London BIDs Advisory Board which was set up and is chaired by the LDA; and policy development to provide advice. In London, BIDs are private sector led and it is the local authorities who, as the billing authority, have direct relationships in the development of BIDs. The LDA has however taken a proactive approach to facilitating the support through a London-wide BIDs programme. BIDs can be developed within any recognised geographically bound area (e.g. a town centre, or industrial estate). The statistics relating to crime reduction on industrial estates in London are currently not being captured, however approximately 38 industrial estates per year receive some intervention with regard to overall improvements in their operating environment. At present, crime reduction and the introduction of security systems by way of CCTV and security patrols feature highly in addressing crime and vandalism which has been identified on estates. BIDs are one of a range of tools that can be used to improve an areas competitiveness, along with City Growth Strategies; planning frameworks; informal partnerships; formal Town Centre Management partnerships; Industrial Estates management etc. In addition, we are responsible for the delivery of the Business Support Simplification Programme through Business Link for London. We are working closely with our Business Link provider to ensure that businesses in London, particularly Small and Medium-sized Enterprises (SMEs) are aware of and are able to access information on how to integrate business crime reduction into their operations. Sources of available support include our colleagues at the Metropolitan Police Service, who have a range of advice available to prevent and reduce business crime, including different types of business crime. Investing in Places and Infrastructure The Mayors Economic Development Strategy and the LDA's Corporate Plan have the objective of delivering healthy, sustainable, high quality communities and urban environments. Designing or sponsoring development that creates safe, comfortable and secure places to live and work is central to the our commitment to 'Investing in Places and Infrastructure'. Our urban design initiatives embrace the principles of Secured By Design at a strategic and development site level. The key design principles of quality sustainable housing and 'designing out crime' are being incorporated throughout our investments in places and infrastructure. At the site development level, secure by design principles are incorporated into LDA developments through negotiation with the London Boroughs on major planning applications and proposals. In these instances, we work closely with Boroughs who will undertake consultation and liaison with Crime Prevention Advisors and/or Police as part of the planning process. Issues of housing and neighbourhood SBD will be discussed with the Borough during pre-negotiations meetings and during the determination of a planning application or urban design framework. This may include consultation with the local Crime and Disorder Reduction Partnership as well as with colleagues from the Metropolitan Police Service and Safer Neighbourhoods Teams.
Appendix F 12 of 12
October 2009
Investing in Marketing and Promotion of London We seek to ensure that, where appropriate and relevant, strong and consistent messages are affirmed and reinforced which promote London as a safe place in which to live, study, work in or visit the capital. This may include, for example, cross-promotion and referral to messages espoused by our colleagues in the GLA Group (for example, Transport for London messages on keeping safe whilst using different forms of (including public) transport). Policy We are members of the Greater London Authority (GLA) Community Safety Plus Steering Group, which is convened by the GLA, and with associated working groups as required. Impacts on Equality Groups Data from the British Crime Survey and other crime reduction studies undertaken by the Home Office illustrate that crime, fear of crime and deficits in community safety have significant detrimental impacts on equality groups. For example, evidence shows that young people are more likely to be victims of crime than to be offenders; Black Asian and Minority Ethnic (BAME) people are over-represented in the criminal justice system and secure estate; there is a significant level of 'hate crime' that some equality groups face (e.g. Lesbian Gay Bisexual and Transgender (LGBT) people). Our interventions in skills, employment and more generally through our contribution to tackling economic and social disadvantage experienced by equality groups means that integrating community safety thoroughly in our processes and activities will have a positive impact on equality groups. Impacts on Sustainability Evidence shows that degradation of the physical environment also contributes to the prevalence of crime, fear of crime (e.g. poor street lighting, poor design of the public space) and deficits in community safety (e.g. anti-social behaviour). As well as being unsustainable, unhealthy and inaccessible, a poor physical environment is also unsafe. Our interventions through places and infrastructure, regeneration and more broadly in tackling climate change; promoting excellence in urban design; means that integrating community safety to a high standard and consistently in our processes and activities will have a positive impact on sustainability. Impacts on Health, Well-Being and Health Inequalities Evidence shows that those who offend and who make up the prison population have a very high incidence of mental health illness (e.g. 70% of offenders have two or more mental health disorders) and/or have issues with problematic substance misuse (60-70% of prisoners were using drugs before their imprisonment); prisoners are fifteen times more likely than the general population to test positive for HIV [Social Exclusion Unit Report, Reducing Re-offending by Ex-Prisoners, 2002]. Our interventions with ex-offenders and those at risk of offending, as well as health inequalities interventions more broadly, will have a positive impact on health and well-being, and tackling health inequalities.
Appendix F 13 of 13
October 2009
Appendix G Detailed Assessment Matrix
Appendix G 1 of 1
October 2009
Appendix G
This appendix contains a detailed appraisal of the proposals in each chapter of the draft EDS in comparison with the sustainability objectives identified in section 3.4 of the report. For each chapter all the proposals within the chapter are firstly appraised against the sustainability objectives together with a summary of policy context and baseline. A key explaining how the appraisal scoring has been arrived at is set out below:
Key
++ + 0 -?
Strongly Positive: This proposal is strongly positive in relation to the objectives of the sustainability theme Positive: This proposal is positive in relation to the objectives of the sustainability theme Neutral Impact: This proposal is neutral in relation to the objectives of the sustainability theme Negative: This proposal is negative in relation to the objectives of the sustainability theme Strongly Negative: This proposal is strongly negative in relation to the objectives of the sustainability theme Uncertain: The impact on the objectives of the sustainability theme is uncertain and may be dependant on the way the aspect is managed. It might be that insufficient information is available to enable an assessment to be made
Page 1
Entec UK Limited
Table G.1

Objectives Context: The plans and programmes covering regeneration and land use seek to maximise the beneficial use of urban land; provide strategic infrastructure; create a framework to stimulate private sector investment; provide opportunities for job creation; transform environmental quality; strengthen local community cohesion and establish sustainable communities. In turn regeneration projects will focus on who should be benefiting from them, especially in disadvantaged and marginalised communities. London covers an area of 157,200 ha (1.2% of England), whilst the UK covers an area of 24,251,400 ha (Source: English Heritage, Heritage Conts 2008). In 2007 London had 3,930 ha of previously developed land that is unused or may be available for redevelopment (nationally 62,130 ha). Of the 3,930 ha, 920 ha was vacant or derelict land (nationally 33,600 ha) and 3,010 ha were currently in use (nationally 28,520 ha) (Source: Communities and Local Government, 2007). In 2006 Londons population density was 4,779 persons per square kilometre (UK was 244 per km2 in 2002) (Source: Focus on London 2008). Past planning policies have sought to focus new development in central areas and to renew and regenerate brownfield locations principally in east London on sites formally used for manufacturing, warehousing or logistics (Source: GLA/Entec, 2009). Nationally the trend is towards increased development on previously developed land. There is currently a trend of decreasing availability of previously developed land as reuse exceeds replacement. Nationally development density is increasing with a 2007 average in England of 44 dwellings per ha. The recession is likely to slow development rates with the result that the stock of previously developed land is may increase. (Source: DCLG, Land use change statistics). London has a very high percentage of developments using previously developed land. As London has limited land stock and already has around 95% of development on previously developed land, the trend of increasing use of brownfield sites is likely to stabilise at this high level. London has a trend of very high development density, although this is showing a moderate decline from a peak of around 85 dwellings per ha in 2003. (Source: DCLG, Land use change statistics).
Medium term score: Neutral Long term score: Neutral
Regeneration and Land Use To stimulate regeneration and urban renaissance that maximises benefits the most deprived areas and communities.
Short term score: Neutral
0
Key Impacts: Uncertainty:
0
Mitigation:
Page 1
Entec UK Limited

Objectives The attraction of business to a local area could
contribute to regeneration initiatives. However this is dependent on the influence of other regeneration proposals in the EDS and the effect here is likely to be neutral.
None.
None.
Biodiversity and Nature Conservation To protect, enhance and promote the natural biodiversity of London
Context: The plans and programmes covering biodiversity, fauna and flora seek to ensure the conservation of biological diversity; the sustainable use of its components; and the fair and equitable sharing of the benefits arising from the use of genetic resources. Policy particularly seeks to protect those species and habitats that are rare and endangered. A framework is provided that seeks to maintain or restore at favourable conservation status, natural habitats and species of community importance using designations such as Special Areas of Conservation (SAC), Special Protection Areas (SPA) and Ramsar sites. A target is set in Conserving Biodiversity The UK Approach to halt the loss of biodiversity in the UK by 2010. Such objectives filter down into UK planning policy at the national and regional level in order to protect such sites and habitats. There are 38 Sites of Special Scientific Interest (SSSI) in London (with over 4,000 nationally) (Source: Mayor of London, 2002). 10 of Londons SSSIs are ancient woodlands, 7 are grassland, 3 are mixed woodland and grassland, 9 are wetlands, 2 are heathland and bog, and 1 is parkland. The other 5 are notified for geological interest. (Source: Mayor of London, 2002). London has 5 European protected sites. These are Epping Forest SAC; Lea Valley SPA/Ramsar site; Richmond Park SAC; South West London Waterbodies SPA/Ramsar; and Wimbledon Common SAC (Source: Natural England, 2008). London has over 1,400 wildlife sites that have been classified as Sites of Importance for Nature Conservation. About 140 are Sites of Metropolitan Importance, 780 are Sites of Borough Importance and 460 sites are Sites of Local Importance (Mayor of London). Targets have been set by the London Biodiversity Partnership for the re-creation and restoration of priority habitats through to 2015, as advocated by PPS9 (Source: The London Plan).
Short term score: Neutral Medium term score: Neutral Long term score: Neutral
0
0
Mitigation:
There are no key effects associated with this

objective.
None.
None.
Health being
and
Well-
To maximise the health and wellbeing of the population and reduce inequalities in
Context: The plans and policies relating to health set out and inform further, scientifically grounded information needed to help EU member states to reduce the adverse health impacts of certain environmental factors. This involves providing a good health service to an ageing Europe and at the national level providing an National Health Service that helps people stay healthy and grants patients greater rights. A number of documents seek to improve air quality and provide noise level guidelines and restrictions. Objectives are also provided that seek to reduce health inequalities. Through sustainable development, health policies filter down into planning policies, promoting health and well being. The overall age-standardised mortality rate in London (830 per 100,000 population) is lower than the UK average (875 per 100,000 population)
Page 2
Entec UK Limited

Objectives health. (Source: Focus on London 2008). The main causes of mortality (rates per 100,000 population) in London are ischaemic heart disease and cancer (Source: Focus on London 2008). In 2001 15.5% of Londoners had a limiting long term illness (Source: ONS / Census Data, 2001). In 2005-06 in London the rate of: domestic noise source complaints was about 12,000 per million (Source: Focus on London 2008). In 2003 13% of Londoners reported that noise from road traffic in their locality was a serious problem (Source: Mayor of London (2004)).
Short term score: Major positive Key Impacts: Medium term score: Major positive Uncertainty: Long term score: Neutral Mitigation:
Positive effects on the health and well-being of
Londoners from increased participation in sporting and recreational activities as promoted by the 2012 Olympic Games
None.
None.
Equalities To ensure equitable outcomes for all communities, particularly those most at risk to experience discrimination, poverty and social exclusion. To also promote the cultural, ethnic, faith and racial diversity of London.
Context: The plans and programmes on equality have the overall objective of creating equality in various fields including providing racial and ethnic equality, tackling discrimination in employment or occupation, gender equality and providing equal access for the disabled. On a wider level this involves providing inclusive, balanced and sustainable communities. Londons population encompasses 300 languages, and over 150 countries (Source: GLA, 2007 State of Equality in London). London is home to 42.7% of Englands non-white population (Source: GLA, 2008). 41.6% of Londons population is non-white British (Source: GLA, 2008). In 2005 the economic activity rate for white people in London was 78.9% compared to 65.6% for ethnic minorities (Source: ONS, 2007 Focus on London). 58% of Londoners profess being Christian, 8% Muslim, 4% Hindu, 2% Jewish, 1% Sikh, 16% no religion and 11% other (Source: GLA, 2008). The number of older people from Black, Asian and Minority Ethnic (BAME) communities in London will increase from 12% to 23% by 2021 (Source: GLA (2006)). Between 2001 and 2006 69.2% of the most deprived people in London were affected by adverse environmental conditions compared to 1% of least deprived people (Source: Defra, 2008). Between 2003 and 2006 41% of children and 21% of pensioners in London lived in households below 60% of the median deprivation level (national average of 29%) (Source: Defra, 2008). In 2006 13% of 16-18 year-olds were not in education, employment or training (Source: Defra, 2008). Out of 498 rough sleepers recorded in the UK during 2007, 248 were in London (Source: Defra, 2008). There are almost 250,000 people aged 80 or over living in London the population aged 60 and over is expected to increase by 9% between 2001 and 2021. (Source: GLA (2006)).
Page 3
Entec UK Limited

Objectives 40.6% of disabled women and 45.6% of disabled men are in employment (Source: GLA, 2008). Approximately 50.6% of Londons population are female and 49.4% are male (nationally 51% female and 49% male). (Source: Focus on London 2008). London males earn on average 37% more than their female counterparts (Source: Focus on London 2008). In London 10% of people are estimated to be gay, lesbian or bisexual (Source: GLA, 2007).
Short term score: Minor positive Key Impacts: Medium term score: Minor positive Uncertainty: Long term score: Minor positive Mitigation:
Trade strategies with India and China may
indirectly promote awareness and appreciation of these cultures and communities living in London and can positively affect equality.
None.
None.
Housing To ensure that all Londoners have access to good quality, well-located, affordable housing.
Context: The relevant plans and programmes covering housing seek to provide more homes and a better mix of homes and create mixed communities. This should provide lower cost home ownership and thus widening eligibility to the housing market. There are also aims within the documents for more sustainable homes and to reduce homelessness. In London conventional housing supply has risen from 17,130 in 1999 to 27,290 in 2006/07 (Source: Focus on London 2008). In London in 2007/08 28,199 net additional homes were provided (Source: London Plan Annual Monitoring Report 5, 2009). In London in 2007-08 10,394 net affordable homes were provided (Source: Housing in London, 2008). There are currently 84,000 empty homes in London (2.7% of total stock) (Source: Housing in London, 2008). The DCLG reported a fall in annual house prices in both London and the UK in Q1 2009. Annual house price inflation in London decreased to -14.0% in Q1 2009 from -7.9% in Q4 2008. Annual house price inflation in the UK decreased to -12.5% in Q1 2009 from -8.7% in Q4 2008 (Source: Londons Economy Today, Issue 82, June 2009). London has a very high percentage of developments using previously developed land. As London has limited land stock and already has around 95% of development on previously developed land, the trend of increasing use of brownfield sites is likely to stabilise at this high level. London has a trend of very high development density, although this is showing a moderate decline from a peak of around 85 dwellings per ha in 2003 (Source: DCLG, Land use change statistics).
Short term score: Neutral Key Impacts:
Medium term score: Neutral Uncertainty:
Long term score: Neutral Mitigation:

objective.
None.
None.
Page 4
Entec UK Limited

Objectives Context: Relevant plans and programmes aim to provide long-term sustainable employment levels. In turn the documents aim to increase the skill base of the nations workforce. These skills are to be geared towards areas of the economy earmarked for growth. The relevant plans also aim to improve accessibility to the labour market. Annual employment growth in London turned negative in the fourth quarter of 2008 to -0.4 per cent from 0.5 per cent in the third quarter (Source: Londons Economic Outlook: Spring 2009). In January to March 2009 the unemployment rate in London was 8.2%, up 1.3 percentage points on the same period a year earlier (Source: ONS, 2009). Small and medium-sized enterprises account for 49% and large firms account for 51% of private sector employment in London (Source: Focus on London 2008). London has had a higher net business start up rate than the UK for nine of the past ten years (Source: Focus on London 2008). In the past 20 years 546,000 jobs have been created in the financial and business services while 292,000 jobs have been lost from manufacturing (Source: Mayor of London, 2008a). Londons annual employment growth decreased to -0.2% in Q4 2008 from a downwardly revised 0.7% in Q3 2008. Annual employment growth in the rest of the UK decreased to -1.3% in Q4 2008 from a downwardly revised -0.5% in Q3 2008. (Source: Londons Economy Today, Issue 82, June 2009). Londons GDP is 160 billion a year its productivity is 27% higher than the rest of the rest of the country (Source: GLA, 2008). In 2007 24.6% of Londoners were economically inactive (over 2% higher than the UK average) (Source: Defra, 2008c). Employment in London is forecast to fall in 2009, 2010 and 2011 from 4.69 million in 2008 to 4.40 million by 2011. (Source: Londons Economic Outlook: Spring 2009).
Short term score: Minor positive Key Impacts:
Employment To offer everyone the opportunity for rewarding, welllocated and satisfying employment.
Medium term score: Minor positive
Long term score: Major positive
Positive effects in the form of rewarding and

stimulating job opportunities from the promotion of London as a premier business location
Uncertainty:
Mitigation:
Proposals do not seek to stimulate employment
opportunities directly so benefits would be indirect. The duration of any such employment is difficult to determine at this stage
None.
Stable Economy
Context: The plans and programmes relating to the economy have an overall aim of achieving a diverse sustainable economy. In particular the
Page 5
Entec UK Limited

Objectives strong, diverse and stable economy and to improve the resilience of businesses. This should also support the development of an efficient, low carbon economy (including new green technologies). documents seek balanced economic growth and in turn to provide long-term employment and provide effective regeneration. Further this involves responding to climate change, improving the tourism sector and investing in transport infrastructure. At a regional level the documents aim to maintain London as a globally competitive city and direct resources sufficiently to respond to the economic downturn. Londons economy grew by 59% between 1993 and 2007. However the UK and London economies are currently in recession (Source: TfL, Travel in London 2009). Londons annual growth in output decreased to -1.0% in Q4 2008 from a downwardly revised 1.2% in Q3 2008. In the rest of the UK, annual growth in output decreased to -2.2% in Q4 2008 from an upwardly revised 0.3% in Q3 2008 (Source: Londons Economy Today, Issue 82, June 2009). Londons economic output grew at an annualised rate of 2.7 per cent in quarter three of 2008 compared to 0.3% in the UK (Source: Londons Economic Outlook: Spring 2009). In 2007 Gross Value Added (GVA) per head in inner London was 52,857, nearly three times the national average (Source: Focus on London 2008). In 2006 London accounted for 18.8% of total UK GVA (Source: Focus on London 2008). In 2004 Londons business services sector contributed 67.0bn and the financial services sector contributed 37.0bn to Londons GVA (Source: Focus on London 2008).
Short term score: Major positive Key Impacts:
++
Medium term score: Major positive
++
++
Proposals which seek to promote London can

contribute to the city maintaining its premier status as a place to do business in an increasingly globally competitive business environment. The development of trade strategies, especially those that also focus on trade opportunities for SMEs will have positive economic effects.
Uncertainty:
Mitigation:
There is some uncertainty regarding the potential

success of promotional activities to stimulate the economy in times of recession. Global market factors will be an important influence economic recovery and the economic objectives of the chapter.
None.
Flood Risk and Climate Change Adaptation. To ensure London adapts to the effects of climate change (both now and in the
Context: The plans and programmes on climate change have the overall objective of seeking to stabilise and reduce greenhouse gas emissions with the aim of minimising and mitigating the adverse effects of climate change on human health and the environment. The solution to this requires a coordinated effort. The Kyoto Protocol sets targets to reduce the collective emissions of developed countries by 5.2% from 1990 levels by the period 2008 to 2012. The UK Climate Change Act (2008) also sets binding targets for reduction of CO2 emissions (leading to an 80% reduction by 2050 compared to a 1990 baseline) (UK only). The plans also set out the likely effects of climate change on the regions of the UK and how the targets are to be achieved.
Page 6
Entec UK Limited

Objectives future). The effects on London particularly concern flooding, drought and overheating. Overall, the trend for London is towards warmer and wetter weather. 2006 was the warmest year in London on record. The average temperature in the last decade in London was over a degree warmer compared with 1975 to 1984 (Source: Focus on London 2008). UKCIPs key findings for London in the 2080s are: Under medium emissions, the central estimate of increase in winter mean temperature is 3C; it is very unlikely to be less than 1.6C and is very unlikely to be more than 4.7C. Under medium emissions, the central estimate of increase in summer mean temperature is 3.9C; it is very unlikely to be less than 2C and is very unlikely to be more than 6.4C. Under medium emissions, the central estimate of change in winter mean precipitation is 20%; it is very unlikely to be less than 3% and is very unlikely to be more than 46%. Under medium emissions, the central estimate of change in summer mean precipitation is 22%; it is very unlikely to be less than 46% and is very unlikely to be more than 7%.
In London about 1.25 million people and 480,000 properties (15% of London) lie within identified flood risk zones. These areas are protected by flood defences (Source: GLA/Entec, 2009). The River Thames has a tidal range in excess of 7 metres on spring tides. 6,200ha and parts of 12 London boroughs are below the normal high tide mark. The area that could potentially be affected by a storm surge covers 11 600ha and 20 London boroughs. The Thames Barrier and associated systems provide protection against tidal flooding. The present system of flood risk management for tidal flooding can continue to provide an acceptable level of risk management up to 2030. Beyond 2030 more actions may be needed (Source: Regional Flood Risk Appraisal (RFRA) for the London Plan Draft London Plan Implementation Report 2007). Surface water drainage networks are normally designed to cope with storms of a 1 in 20 year intensity. Many areas with large roof areas, at low points in the drainage network or that have suffered blockages in the surface water system have experienced surface water flooding (including rail stations and road network underpasses) (Source: Regional Flood Risk Appraisal (RFRA) for the London Plan Draft London Plan Implementation Report 2007).

objective.
None.
None.
Climate Mitigation Energy To ensure
Change and London
Context: The Climate Change Act 2008 has set the target of an 80% cut in net UK carbon emission by 2050 compared to 1990 levels. This seeks to maintain the reliability of energy supplies; promote competitive markets to help sustainable economic growth and improved productivity; and ensure that every home is adequately and affordably heated throughout the UK. More specifically, the London Mayors Strategy sets out that London should aim to generate at least 665GWh of electricity and 280GWh of heat, from up to 40,000 renewable energy schemes by 2010.
Page 7
Entec UK Limited

Objectives contributes to global climate change mitigation, achieve greater energy efficiency and reduces its reliance on fossil fuels. In 2003 the total carbon dioxide emissions for London were 43,665 Kilotonnes of carbon dioxide. The five non-CO2 greenhouse gases contribute the equivalent of approximately 2% of Londons total CO2 emission output. (Source: Focus on London 2008). London produces 8% of the UKs total CO2 emissions. Londons per capita CO2 emissions are 25% lower than the UK average (Source: Mayor of London (2007) Action Today to Protect Tomorrow The Mayors Climate Change Action Plan). Ground-based transport is responsible for 22% of Londons total CO2 emissions (excluding aviation) (Source: Mayor of London (2007) Action Today to Protect Tomorrow The Mayors Climate Change Action Plan). The principal transport sources of CO2 are: the London bus and London Underground networks (0.6 million tonnes of CO2 each per year); and taxis and private hire vehicles (0.3 million tonnes of CO2 each per year) (Source: TfL (2009) London Travel Report 2008 (unpublished) Mayor of London). The total energy consumption of London was 160,883 Gigawatt hours (GWh) in 2003 (2,120,261.5 GWh in UK in 2006), emitting a total of 43,665 Kilotonnes of carbon dioxide. (Source: Focus on London 2008). The projected economic and population growth forecasted for London will increase all of Londons CO2 emissions by 15%, from 43.6 million tonnes to an estimated 51 million tonnes per year by 2025 (excluding aviation emissions) (Mayor of London 2007). It is currently unclear what effect the recent recession will have on these projections.
Increasing international trade will result in

increased emissions but this will be addressed through relevant national and international legislation covering emissions from shipping and aviation.
None.
None.
Water Quality & Water Resources To protect and enhance Londons water bodies and the Blue Ribbon network
Context: The plans and programmes relating to water quality set standards for drinking water and the wider water environment. Further plans seek to improve water efficiency with a key target being to reduce the average amount of water used per person in the home to 130 litres each day by 2030. The programmes aim to reduce and manage the risks that floods pose to human health, the environment, cultural heritage and economic activity. The plans require Members States to review all watercourses and coastlines to assess the risk from flooding, to map the flood extent and the population and assets at risk in these areas. In 2007 76.2% of surface water within the Thames region was rated as being of good or better chemical quality (decrease from 80.5% in 2002) (Source: Environment Agency, 2007). Furthermore in 2007 64.5% of surface water within the Thames region was rated as being of good or better
Page 8
Entec UK Limited

Objectives biological quality (decrease from 75.7% in 2002). (Source: Environment Agency, 2007). In 2008 about 55.5% of the total river length in the Thames region had either high or very high Nitrate concentrations (Source: Focus on London 2008). 80% of Londons water comes from the Thames and the River Lee, and the remaining 20% comes from Londons subterranean aquifer (all mostly fed by winter rainfall) (Source: Focus on London 2008). Londoners consume approximately 168 litres of water per day (national average of 150 litres per person per day) (Source: GLA/Entec, 2009). Approximately a quarter of all water distributed in the mains network is lost to leakage (Source: GLA/Entec, 2009). Rivers and canals in London are subject to a number of pressures including pollution, low flows, habitat degradation and recreation (Source: Focus on London 2008).

objective.
None.
None.
Waste To minimise the production of waste across all sectors and increase re-use, recycling, remanufacturing and recovery rates.
Context: Relevant plans and programmes establish a framework for the management of waste across the European Community; priority is given to waste prevention, re-use and recovery of waste; prohibition of the uncontrolled disposal of waste; establishment of an integrated network of disposal installations; preparation of waste management plans; ensuring that the cost of disposal is borne by the waste holder; ensuring that waste carriers are registered; ensuring that waste is recovered or disposed of without endangering human health. This is in light of the waste hierarchy and initiatives filtering down to the local level to shift waste management up it. Plans on a regional level in particular aim to change individual lifestyle habits and promote advanced waste technologies. London produces around 7 million tonnes of C&I waste per year (as compared to approximately 4 million tonnes of municipal waste). Approximately 3 million tonnes of this C&I waste goes to landfill or incineration within, and outside London (Source: London Commercial Waste and Recycling Programme, 2008). The amount of household waste collected in England in 2007-8 was 25.3 million tonnes, and 34.5% of this was recycled or composted (Source: Defra, Environment in your Pocket Statistics, 2008). In 2006/07, London produced the second highest amount of municipal waste in England, over 4.2 million tonnes, of which just over 80% was from households. The amount of waste per household was just above average at 1.33 tonnes compared with 1.36 tonnes for England as a whole (Source: Focus on London 2008).
Page 9
Entec UK Limited

Objectives In 2006/07, 23% of Londons household municipal waste was recycled; 57% of Londons municipal waste was sent to landfill (the third highest percentage in England); and London incinerated more municipal waste than any other region (929,000 tonnes), (Source: Focus on London 2008). In 2007/08 Londons municipal waste arisings were 4,149 thousand tonnes and household arisings were 3,342 thousand tonnes (Source: Capital Waste Facts).

objective.
None.
None.
Accessibility Mobility
and
To maximise the accessibility for all in and around London and increase the proportion of journeys made by sustainable transport modes (particularly public transport, walking and cycling).
Context: The overall aim of the plans and programmes relating to traffic and transport is to improve the quality and effectiveness of transport infrastructure in terms of efficiency, pollution and social justice. The plans seek to strike a balance between the growing economy and the increasing demand for travel, and also achieving environmental objectives. Ultimately therefore the goal is to improve the quality and efficiency of transport in Europe to supplement the economy. Further plans seek to support targets for the improvement of air quality and the reduction of greenhouse gas emissions by providing sustainable transport alternative and promoting health. In the UK this particularly relates to improving rail infrastructure. Throughout the UK a number of programmes have established indicators and baselines to monitor the performance of transport. In 2006/2007 9% of Londoners found it very or fairly difficult to get to a corner shop or supermarket (2% lower than the national average) (Source: Defra, 2008). In 2006/2007 10% of Londoners found it very or fairly difficult to get to a post office (in line with the national average) (Source: Defra, 2008). In 2006/2007 22% of Londoners found it very or fairly difficult to get to a doctor or hospital (6% lower than the national average) (Source: Defra, 2008). Between 2000 and 2009, total distance travelled in London has increased by an estimated 6%. Over this period the total number of trips has increased, by an estimated 5%. Therefore distance travelled per person has been broadly constant after taking account of increased population and changes to in commuters and visitors (Source: TfL, Travel in London, 2009). In 2007 23.8 million trips were made in, to, or from London on an average day, 33% of these trips were by public transport (Source: TfL, Travel in London, 2009). In 2006, there was the following breakdown in mode of travel in London: 43% by car, 13% by bus or tram, 9% by Underground, 8% by rail, 2% by cycle and 24% were on foot (Source: Focus on London, 2008). In London between 2001 and 2007 there was a 22% increase in public transport journeys per head of population, (and a 9% decrease in car journeys per head) (Source: Focus on London 2008). In London 31% of trips are for shopping and personal business, 16% for commuting, and 26% for leisure (Source: Focus on London 2008). In 2007/2008 the mode of travel for London residents was: 37.9% by car, 1.3% by taxi, 0.6% by motorcycle, 14.5% by bus or tram, 7.6% by
Page 10
Entec UK Limited

Objectives Underground and DLR, 4.8% by rail, 2% by cycle and 31.4% by foot (nationally 63% of journeys are by car) (Source: TfL, 2009 London Travel Report 2008). The number of bus journeys in London in 2006/2007 was 45% higher than in 1999/2000 (Source: GLA, 2008). Between 2000 and 2006 there was an 83% increase in the number of people cycling (Source: GLA (2008)). However, this still only accounts for 2% of all travel in London (Source: TfL, 2009). Whilst walking currently accounts for 21% of Londoners journeys (Source: GLA, 2008). There has been a 35% reduction in the number of road casualties since 2000. In 2006 33% of those killed or injured in road casualties were pedestrians (Source: GLA, 2008). In London car use is on a declining trend, whilst public transport and cycle use is on an increasing trend.
Short term score: Neutral Key Impacts: Medium term score: Neutral Uncertainty: Long term score: Neutral Mitigation:

objective.
None.
None.
Built and Historic Environment To enhance and protect the existing built environment (including the architectural distinctiveness, townscape/landscape and archaeological heritage) and landscapes, and ensure new buildings and spaces are appropriately designed.
Context: The plans and programmes relating to cultural heritage have the overall aim of protecting, conserving and transmitting archaeology and heritage to future generations. They aim to place the historic environment at the heart of the planning system and to implement a unified heritage protection system that will be easier to understand and use, more efficient, accountable and transparent and that will maximise opportunities for public inclusion and involvement. Across the UK the policies explain how, the development plan and development control systems, give weight to archaeology and heritage in planning decisions and planning conditions. In 2008 London had 152 Scheduled Ancient Monuments (19,446 in England), 121 of these were considered at risk (Source: English Heritage). In 2008 London had 18,461 listed buildings (372,905 in England). This breaks down to 582 Grade 1, 1,321 Grade 11* and 16,558 Grade 11 listed buildings entries, 487 of which were considered at risk (Source: English Heritage). In 2008 London had 148 Registered Parks and Gardens (Source: English Heritage). London has one historic battlefield at Banet (Source: English Heritage). London has 4 of the UKs 28 World Heritage Sites (Source: English Heritage). In 2008 London had 955 conservation areas (Source: English Heritage). The London Historic Parks & Gardens Trust Inventory of Historic Green Spaces includes nearly 2,000 sites (Source: English Heritage).
Short term score: Neutral Key Impacts: Medium term score: Neutral Uncertainty: Long term score: Neutral Mitigation:
Page 11
Entec UK Limited

Objectives
objective.
None.
None.
Liveability Place
and
To create sustainable, mixed use environments that promote longterm social cohesion, sustainable lifestyles, safety and security, and a sense of place.
Context: The plans and programmes relating to population seek to provide strong, balanced and prosperous communities. This involves narrowing the gap between the most deprived neighbourhoods and the rest of the country and giving local communities more influence and power to improve their lives. A key element of achieving such aims is to ensure equality of opportunity for all Londons population and in turn provide sustainable lifestyles. Furthermore a number of plans and programmes relating to community safety seek to manage health and safety in a number of areas by reducing both general crime and anti-social behaviour. This in particular involves providing adequate health and safety information and managing health and safety risks. Further the plans aim to provide a European system of technical standards and certification for rail and road safety. In 2006/07 the total recorded crime rate in London was 124 offences per 1,000 population (national average of 100). The London crime rate has fallen from 145 in 2003/04 (Source: Focus on London 2008). In 2006/07 there was an overall rate of detection of recorded crime of 21% (lowest of UK regions) (Source: Focus on London 2008). In 2005/2006 per 100,000 of the population of London there were : 2,668 violent crimes against the person (1,971 on average in England and Wales) 139 sexual offences (115 on average in England and Wales) 1,398 burglaries (1,214 on average in England and Wales) 610 robberies (181 on average in England and Wales) 5,451 thefts/handling stolen goods (3,733 on average in England and Wales) 1,858 thefts from vehicles (1,351 on average in England and Wales) 1,651 criminal damages (2,209 on average in England and Wales) 726 drugs and other offences (471 on average in England and Wales) (Source: ONS, 2007 Focus on London).
In 2005/2006 the following percentage of Londoners felt insecure perceived crime rates about burglary (16%), mugging (14%), theft of car (17%), theft from car (16%) & rape (7%) (Source: ONS (2007) Focus on London). In London crime figures are rising as a result of the recession (particularly burglary related crime) (Source: www.lga.gov.uk/lga/events/displayevent.do?id=1538312).
Page 12
Entec UK Limited

Objectives There are no key effects associated with this
objective.
None.
None.
Open Space To protect and enhance natural open space in London.
Context: The plans and programmes relating to landscape aim to promote landscape protection, management and planning, and to organise European wide co-operation on landscape issues. National policy seeks to retain and provide well-designed open spaces of high quality and promote access to the countryside. Notably this ties in with maintaining biodiversity and habitats in the UK. Development plans within the UK set out how landscape can be regarded as a material consideration within development decisions. London covers an area of 1,572km2 (1.2% of England) (Source: English Heritage). Londons designation of Metropolitan Open Land (MOL) protects strategically important open spaces within the built environment, such as Richmond Park, Wimbledon Common, Hampstead Heath, Hackney Marshes, Oxleas Wood, Hyde Park and Mitcham Common (Source: Greener London, 2007). Green belt forms 22% of the area within the Greater London boundary, whilst 9.6% of Greater London is Metropolitan Open Land (Source: Greener London (2007)). In 2008 London had 148 Registered Parks and Gardens (just over 9% of the total for England) (Source: English Heritage). London has over 600 Garden Squares, of which 461 are protected by the London Squares Preservation Act 1931 (Source: English Heritage). London has 8 Royal Parks, numerous public parks and approximately122 heaths, commons and greens (Source: English Heritage). London has 68km of the River Thames and 80km of canal network, both bordered by numerous historic assets and historic areas and open spaces.(Source: English Heritage). Thirty thousand Londoners rent allotments to grow vegetables and fruit and 14% of households grow vegetables in their garden. There is a shortage of allotment sites in inner London (Source: Greener London, 2007). London contains approximately 7,000 hectares of woodland, covering approximately 4.6% of the total land area, a third of which is classified as ancient forest (Source: Natural England, 2008).

objective.
None.
None.
Air Quality
Context: The plans and programmes relating to air quality establish a framework for the monitoring and limiting of pollutants. The Air Quality
Page 13
Entec UK Limited

Objectives To improve Londons air quality. Strategy (The Air Quality Strategy for England, Scotland, Wales and Northern Ireland (2007)) sets national air quality targets for nine air pollutants. Objectives for seven of the air pollutants have been included in national air quality regulations for the purpose of local air quality management, with local authorities being required to work towards the objectives. There is also a system of Pollution Prevention and Control to improve air quality through the regulation of industrial facilities. This system incorporates specific EU requirements in respect of large combustion plants, waste incineration plants and activities emitting solvents. Planning policies across the UK stipulate that Air Quality is capable of being a material planning consideration. The Mayors Air Quality Strategy seeks to minimise the adverse effects of air pollution on human health and in turn improve quality of life in the city. London air pollution concentrations exceeded the UK Air Quality Strategy Objective (AQS) and EU Limit Values during 2006 and 2007 (Source: London Air Quality Network, Report). In London between 1997 and 2008, PM10 concentrations decreased by 26%; NOx concentrations decreased by around 36%; NO2 concentrations decreased by 13%; O3 concentrations increased by 31%; and CO concentrations decreased by 59%; and SO2 concentrations decreased by 77% (Source: Focus on London 2008). All London Boroughs have declared, all or in part, as Air Quality Management Areas (AQMAs). (75% of London (1,175 km2) was covered by AQMAs in April 2007) (Source: Greener London, 2007). London currently meets EU limits for carbon monoxide (CO) and sulphur dioxide (SO2), but fails the World Health Organisation levels of SO2. NO2 is a widespread problem that affects large areas of central and inner London, parts of suburban London and all busy roads. PM10 is more of a localised problem to the busiest roads in London. Road transport, and in particular older diesel vehicles, are the main cause of air pollution in London. 30% of all cars registered in 2007 were diesel, compared with eight per cent in 1993. Although newer diesels have lower emissions than the most polluting old vehicles and emit less CO2, they still emit much higher levels of PM10 and NO2 than petrol vehicles. In Greater London, the total Oxides of nitrogen (NO2 and NO) emissions from all sources are expected to fall to 53,908 tonnes by 2010 (from 67,179 tonnes in 2003). The reductions are attributed to road transport and gas sources (Source: Mayor of London). The Mayor has set a target for London to stabilise its emissions at 60% below 1990 levels by 2025 (Source: Mayor of London).
Short term score: Neutral Key Impacts: Medium term score: Neutral Uncertainty: Long term score: Neutral Mitigation or enhancement:

objective.
None.
None.
Page 14
Entec UK Limited

Table G.2
Chapter 2: Improving Londons competitiveness

0
0
Mitigation or enhancement:
Proposals which seek to improve the quality of

the physical environment and increase the
The effects of policies depend on the location of
Ensure a joined up approach to implementation of
Page 15
Entec UK Limited

Objectives
provision of sporting and cultural facilities can have positive effects in conjunction with other regeneration plans. However it is considered proposals here would achieve regeneration in isolation but would need to form part of larger regeneration strategy. proposal activities in areas in need of regeneration. It is also questionable whether proposals here would achieve regeneration effects unless in conjunction with other local area regeneration initiatives. initiatives to ensure maximum impact.
Short term score: Minor positive Medium term score: Minor positive Long term score: Minor positive
+
+
Proposals which aim to extend the network and
quality of green spaces will positively contribute to creating habitats supportive of biodiversity.
None.
None.
Health being
and
Well-
To maximise the health and wellbeing of the population and
Context: The plans and policies relating to health set out and inform further, scientifically grounded information needed to help EU member states to reduce the adverse health impacts of certain environmental factors. This involves providing a good health service to an ageing Europe and at the national level providing an National Health Service that helps people stay healthy and grants patients greater rights. A number of documents seek to improve air quality and provide noise level guidelines and restrictions. Objectives are also provided that seek to reduce health inequalities. Through sustainable development, health policies filter down into planning policies, promoting health and well being.
Page 16
Entec UK Limited

Objectives reduce inequalities in health. The overall age-standardised mortality rate in London (830 per 100,000 population) is lower than the UK average (875 per 100,000 population) (Source: Focus on London 2008). The main causes of mortality (rates per 100,000 population) in London are ischaemic heart disease and cancer (Source: Focus on London 2008). In 2001 15.5% of Londoners had a limiting long term illness (Source: ONS / Census Data, 2001). In 2005-06 in London the rate of: domestic noise source complaints was about 12,000 per million (Source: Focus on London 2008). In 2003 13% of Londoners reported that noise from road traffic in their locality was a serious problem (Source: Mayor of London (2004)).
Short term score: Major positive Key Impacts: Medium term score: Major positive Uncertainty: Long term score: Major positive Mitigation or enhancement:
++
++
++
Proposal 2H seeks to improve provision of

healthcare services and reduce inequalities which will strongly contribute to this objective. Proposals 2J and 2I seek to improve peoples wider quality of life which can improve general levels of health and well-being
Uncertainty relates to measures that will be taken

to reduce crime and whether the wider causes of crime will be addressed.
Prioritising Biodiversity Action Plan (BAP) species

and habitats.
Context: The plans and programmes on equality have the overall objective of creating equality in various fields including providing racial and ethnic equality, tackling discrimination in employment or occupation, gender equality and providing equal access for the disabled. On a wider level this involves providing inclusive, balanced and sustainable communities. Londons population encompasses 300 languages, and over 150 countries (Source: GLA, 2007 State of Equality in London). London is home to 42.7% of Englands non-white population (Source: GLA, 2008). 41.6% of Londons population is non-white British (Source: GLA, 2008). In 2005 the economic activity rate for white people in London was 78.9% compared to 65.6% for ethnic minorities (Source: ONS, 2007 Focus on London). 58% of Londoners profess being Christian, 8% Muslim, 4% Hindu, 2% Jewish, 1% Sikh, 16% no religion and 11% other (Source: GLA, 2008). The number of older people from Black, Asian and Minority Ethnic (BAME) communities in London will increase from 12% to 23% by 2021 (Source: GLA (2006)). Between 2001 and 2006 69.2% of the most deprived people in London were affected by adverse environmental conditions compared to 1% of least deprived people (Source: Defra, 2008). Between 2003 and 2006 41% of children and 21% of pensioners in London lived in households below 60% of the median deprivation level (national average of 29%) (Source: Defra, 2008). In 2006 13% of 16-18 year-olds were not in education, employment or training (Source: Defra, 2008).
Page 17
Entec UK Limited

Objectives Out of 498 rough sleepers recorded in the UK during 2007, 248 were in London (Source: Defra, 2008). There are almost 250,000 people aged 80 or over living in London the population aged 60 and over is expected to increase by 9% between 2001 and 2021. (Source: GLA (2006)). 40.6% of disabled women and 45.6% of disabled men are in employment (Source: GLA, 2008). Approximately 50.6% of Londons population are female and 49.4% are male (nationally 51% female and 49% male). (Source: Focus on London 2008). London males earn on average 37% more than their female counterparts (Source: Focus on London 2008). In London 10% of people are estimated to be gay, lesbian or bisexual (Source: GLA, 2007).
Short term score: Minor negative Key Impacts: Medium term score: Minor positive
There may be positive effects for equality
Uncertainty:
through proposals which promote SME business support and reduce costs to businesses. There will also be positive effects from proposals which seek to increase provision of, and access to health services and cultural facilities.
There is some uncertainty as to the prominence

of equality objectives in SME business support programme design given that the proposal includes the dual focus of maximising returns to the London economy as well as delivering equality objectives. These objectives could be at odds with one another
Business support programme design should make

adequate account for delivering the dual stated objectives in providing a range of support instruments.
Context: The relevant plans and programmes covering housing seek to provide more homes and a better mix of homes and create mixed communities. This should provide lower cost home ownership and thus widening eligibility to the housing market. There are also aims within the documents for more sustainable homes and to reduce homelessness. In London conventional housing supply has risen from 17,130 in 1999 to 27,290 in 2006/07 (Source: Focus on London 2008). In London in 2007/08 28,199 net additional homes were provided (Source: London Plan Annual Monitoring Report 5, 2009). In London in 2007-08 10,394 net affordable homes were provided (Source: Housing in London, 2008). There are currently 84,000 empty homes in London (2.7% of total stock) (Source: Housing in London, 2008). The DCLG reported a fall in annual house prices in both London and the UK in Q1 2009. Annual house price inflation in London decreased to -14.0% in Q1 2009 from -7.9% in Q4 2008. Annual house price inflation in the UK decreased to -12.5% in Q1 2009 from -8.7% in Q4 2008 (Source: Londons
Page 18
Entec UK Limited

Objectives Economy Today, Issue 82, June 2009). London has a very high percentage of developments using previously developed land. As London has limited land stock and already has around 95% of development on previously developed land, the trend of increasing use of brownfield sites is likely to stabilise at this high level. London has a trend of very high development density, although this is showing a moderate decline from a peak of around 85 dwellings per ha in 2003 (Source: DCLG, Land use change statistics).
Short term score: Minor negative Key Impacts:
There could positive effects for housing if
Uncertainty:
proposal 2E to address costs to business addresses this cost issue.
The types of measures that will be undertaken to
reduce costs to business could include housing as one of several and cannot be predicted at this stage.
None.
Context: Relevant plans and programmes aim to provide long-term sustainable employment levels. In turn the documents aim to increase the skill base of the nations workforce. These skills are to be geared towards areas of the economy earmarked for growth. The relevant plans also aim to improve accessibility to the labour market. Annual employment growth in London turned negative in the fourth quarter of 2008 to -0.4 per cent from 0.5 per cent in the third quarter (Source: Londons Economic Outlook: Spring 2009). In January to March 2009 the unemployment rate in London was 8.2%, up 1.3 percentage points on the same period a year earlier (Source: ONS, 2009). Small and medium-sized enterprises account for 49% and large firms account for 51% of private sector employment in London (Source: Focus on London 2008). London has had a higher net business start up rate than the UK for nine of the past ten years (Source: Focus on London 2008). In the past 20 years 546,000 jobs have been created in the financial and business services while 292,000 jobs have been lost from manufacturing (Source: Mayor of London, 2008a). Londons annual employment growth decreased to -0.2% in Q4 2008 from a downwardly revised 0.7% in Q3 2008. Annual employment growth in the rest of the UK decreased to -1.3% in Q4 2008 from a downwardly revised -0.5% in Q3 2008. (Source: Londons Economy Today, Issue 82, June 2009). Londons GDP is 160 billion a year its productivity is 27% higher than the rest of the rest of the country (Source: GLA, 2008).
Page 19
Entec UK Limited

Objectives In 2007 24.6% of Londoners were economically inactive (over 2% higher than the UK average) (Source: Defra, 2008c). Employment in London is forecast to fall in 2009, 2010 and 2011 from 4.69 million in 2008 to 4.40 million by 2011. (Source: Londons Economic Outlook: Spring 2009).
Long term score: Minor positive
Proposals which contribute to improvements in

business skills can positively contribute to career progression and rewarding jobs Support for SMEs can have positive employment effects.
Uncertainty:
None.
None.
Stable Economy To encourage a strong, diverse and stable economy and to improve the resilience of businesses. This should also support the development of an efficient, low carbon economy (including new green technologies).
Context: The plans and programmes relating to the economy have an overall aim of achieving a diverse sustainable economy. In particular the documents seek balanced economic growth and in turn to provide long-term employment and provide effective regeneration. Further this involves responding to climate change, improving the tourism sector and investing in transport infrastructure. At a regional level the documents aim to maintain London as a globally competitive city and direct resources sufficiently to respond to the economic downturn. Londons economy grew by 59% between 1993 and 2007. However the UK and London economies are currently in recession (Source: TfL, Travel in London 2009). Londons annual growth in output decreased to -1.0% in Q4 2008 from a downwardly revised 1.2% in Q3 2008. In the rest of the UK, annual growth in output decreased to -2.2% in Q4 2008 from an upwardly revised 0.3% in Q3 2008 (Source: Londons Economy Today, Issue 82, June 2009). Londons economic output grew at an annualised rate of 2.7 per cent in quarter three of 2008 compared to 0.3% in the UK (Source: Londons Economic Outlook: Spring 2009). In 2007 Gross Value Added (GVA) per head in inner London was 52,857, nearly three times the national average (Source: Focus on London 2008). In 2006 London accounted for 18.8% of total UK GVA (Source: Focus on London 2008). In 2004 Londons business services sector contributed 67.0bn and the financial services sector contributed 37.0bn to Londons GVA (Source: Focus on London 2008).
Short term score: Minor positive
++
++
Page 20
Entec UK Limited

Objectives
Key Impacts:
Positive effects may be felt from building on the

advantages of agglomeration and promote business linkages. Relationships take time to develop and will likely be realised in the medium to longer term Proposals which promote a business friendly environment can have positive effects. These are likely to have a shorter implementation time and benefits will be felt in the short term. Proposals which contribute to quality of life of Londoners can indirectly and positively affect the economy through improved productivity of its workforce.
Uncertainty:
Mitigation:
The extent to which proposals to monitor the

factors affecting Londons productivity can positively affect the economy is uncertain at this stage.
None.
Flood Risk and Climate Change Adaptation. To ensure London adapts to the effects of climate change (both now and in the future). The effects on London particularly concern flooding, drought and overheating.
Context: The plans and programmes on climate change have the overall objective of seeking to stabilise and reduce greenhouse gas emissions with the aim of minimising and mitigating the adverse effects of climate change on human health and the environment. The solution to this requires a coordinated effort. The Kyoto Protocol sets targets to reduce the collective emissions of developed countries by 5.2% from 1990 levels by the period 2008 to 2012. The UK Climate Change Act (2008) also sets binding targets for reduction of CO2 emissions (leading to an 80% reduction by 2050 compared to a 1990 baseline) (UK only). The plans also set out the likely effects of climate change on the regions of the UK and how the targets are to be achieved. Overall, the trend for London is towards warmer and wetter weather. 2006 was the warmest year in London on record. The average temperature in the last decade in London was over a degree warmer compared with 1975 to 1984 (Source: Focus on London 2008). UKCIPs key findings for London in the 2080s are: Under medium emissions, the central estimate of increase in winter mean temperature is 3C; it is very unlikely to be less than 1.6C and is very unlikely to be more than 4.7C. Under medium emissions, the central estimate of increase in summer mean temperature is 3.9C; it is very unlikely to be less than 2C and is very unlikely to be more than 6.4C. Under medium emissions, the central estimate of change in winter mean precipitation is 20%; it is very unlikely to be less than 3% and is very unlikely to be more than 46%. Under medium emissions, the central estimate of change in summer mean precipitation is 22%; it is very unlikely to be less than 46% and is very unlikely to be more than 7%.
In London about 1.25 million people and 480,000 properties (15% of London) lie within identified flood risk zones. These areas are protected by flood
Page 21
Entec UK Limited

Objectives defences (Source: GLA/Entec, 2009). The River Thames has a tidal range in excess of 7 metres on spring tides. 6,200ha and parts of 12 London boroughs are below the normal high tide mark. The area that could potentially be affected by a storm surge covers 11 600ha and 20 London boroughs. The Thames Barrier and associated systems provide protection against tidal flooding. The present system of flood risk management for tidal flooding can continue to provide an acceptable level of risk management up to 2030. Beyond 2030 more actions may be needed (Source: Regional Flood Risk Appraisal (RFRA) for the London Plan Draft London Plan Implementation Report 2007). Surface water drainage networks are normally designed to cope with storms of a 1 in 20 year intensity. Many areas with large roof areas, at low points in the drainage network or that have suffered blockages in the surface water system have experienced surface water flooding (including rail stations and road network underpasses) (Source: Regional Flood Risk Appraisal (RFRA) for the London Plan Draft London Plan Implementation Report 2007).
Medium term score: Neutral
Long term score: Uncertain/positive
+/?
There could be positive long term effects for
Uncertainty:
climate change adaptation through collaboration (e.g. on flood infrastructure) with neighbouring regions but the extent of this cannot be determined at this stage.
Effects depend on whether regions will

collaborate on relevant projects. Since none have been identified here it cannot be predicted whether this will come to fruition or not.
None
Climate Mitigation Energy
Change and
To ensure London contributes to global climate change mitigation, achieve greater energy efficiency and reduces its reliance on fossil fuels.
Context: The Climate Change Act 2008 has set the target of an 80% cut in net UK carbon emission by 2050 compared to 1990 levels. This seeks to maintain the reliability of energy supplies; promote competitive markets to help sustainable economic growth and improved productivity; and ensure that every home is adequately and affordably heated throughout the UK. More specifically, the London Mayors Strategy sets out that London should aim to generate at least 665GWh of electricity and 280GWh of heat, from up to 40,000 renewable energy schemes by 2010. In 2003 the total carbon dioxide emissions for London were 43,665 Kilotonnes of carbon dioxide. The five non-CO2 greenhouse gases contribute the equivalent of approximately 2% of Londons total CO2 emission output. (Source: Focus on London 2008). London produces 8% of the UKs total CO2 emissions. Londons per capita CO2 emissions are 25% lower than the UK average (Source: Mayor of London (2007) Action Today to Protect Tomorrow The Mayors Climate Change Action Plan). Ground-based transport is responsible for 22% of Londons total CO2 emissions (excluding aviation) (Source: Mayor of London (2007) Action Today to Protect Tomorrow The Mayors Climate Change Action Plan). The principal transport sources of CO2 are: the London bus and London Underground networks (0.6 million tonnes of CO2 each per year); and
Page 22
Entec UK Limited

Objectives taxis and private hire vehicles (0.3 million tonnes of CO2 each per year) (Source: TfL (2009) London Travel Report 2008 (unpublished) Mayor of London). The total energy consumption of London was 160,883 Gigawatt hours (GWh) in 2003 (2,120,261.5 GWh in UK in 2006), emitting a total of 43,665 Kilotonnes of carbon dioxide. (Source: Focus on London 2008). The projected economic and population growth forecasted for London will increase all of Londons CO2 emissions by 15%, from 43.6 million tonnes to an estimated 51 million tonnes per year by 2025 (excluding aviation emissions) (Mayor of London 2007). It is currently unclear what effect the recent recession will have on these projections.
Short term score: Uncertain Key Impacts:
Medium term score: Uncertain
Long term score: Uncertain/positive.
+/?
Policies supporting innovation and collaboration

with neighbouring regions could result in positive long term effects. Negative effects could be associated with increased economic growth but other chapters in the EDS and national and international legislation will reduce the significance of this effect.
Uncertainty:
The extent to which regions will collaborate on

relevant projects cannot be determined at this stage..
None
Water Quality & Water Resources To protect and enhance Londons water bodies and the Blue Ribbon network.
Context: The plans and programmes relating to water quality set standards for drinking water and the wider water environment. Further plans seek to improve water efficiency with a key target being to reduce the average amount of water used per person in the home to 130 litres each day by 2030. The programmes aim to reduce and manage the risks that floods pose to human health, the environment, cultural heritage and economic activity. The plans require Members States to review all watercourses and coastlines to assess the risk from flooding, to map the flood extent and the population and assets at risk in these areas. In 2007 76.2% of surface water within the Thames region was rated as being of good or better chemical quality (decrease from 80.5% in 2002) (Source: Environment Agency, 2007). Furthermore in 2007 64.5% of surface water within the Thames region was rated as being of good or better biological quality (decrease from 75.7% in 2002). (Source: Environment Agency, 2007). In 2008 about 55.5% of the total river length in the Thames region had either high or very high Nitrate concentrations (Source: Focus on London 2008). 80% of Londons water comes from the Thames and the River Lee, and the remaining 20% comes from Londons subterranean aquifer (all mostly fed by winter rainfall) (Source: Focus on London 2008).
Page 23
Entec UK Limited

Objectives Londoners consume approximately 168 litres of water per day (national average of 150 litres per person per day) (Source: GLA/Entec, 2009). Approximately a quarter of all water distributed in the mains network is lost to leakage (Source: GLA/Entec, 2009). Rivers and canals in London are subject to a number of pressures including pollution, low flows, habitat degradation and recreation (Source: Focus on London 2008).
+/?
Policies supporting collaboration with
Uncertainty:
neighbouring regions could result in positive long term effects.

relevant projects cannot be determined at this stage.
None
Context: Relevant plans and programmes establish a framework for the management of waste across the European Community; priority is given to waste prevention, re-use and recovery of waste; prohibition of the uncontrolled disposal of waste; establishment of an integrated network of disposal installations; preparation of waste management plans; ensuring that the cost of disposal is borne by the waste holder; ensuring that waste carriers are registered; ensuring that waste is recovered or disposed of without endangering human health. This is in light of the waste hierarchy and initiatives filtering down to the local level to shift waste management up it. Plans on a regional level in particular aim to change individual lifestyle habits and promote advanced waste technologies. London produces around 7 million tonnes of C&I waste per year (as compared to approximately 4 million tonnes of municipal waste). Approximately 3 million tonnes of this C&I waste goes to landfill or incineration within, and outside London (Source: London Commercial Waste and Recycling Programme, 2008). The amount of household waste collected in England in 2007-8 was 25.3 million tonnes, and 34.5% of this was recycled or composted (Source: Defra, Environment in your Pocket Statistics, 2008). In 2006/07, London produced the second highest amount of municipal waste in England, over 4.2 million tonnes, of which just over 80% was from households. The amount of waste per household was just above average at 1.33 tonnes compared with 1.36 tonnes for England as a whole (Source: Focus on London 2008). In 2006/07, 23% of Londons household municipal waste was recycled; 57% of Londons municipal waste was sent to landfill (the third highest percentage in England); and London incinerated more municipal waste than any other region (929,000 tonnes), (Source: Focus on London 2008).
Page 24
Entec UK Limited

Objectives In 2007/08 Londons municipal waste arisings were 4,149 thousand tonnes and household arisings were 3,342 thousand tonnes (Source: Capital Waste Facts).
+/?
Policies supporting collaboration with

neighbouring regions could result in positive long term effects.
Uncertainty:

relevant projects cannot be determined at this stage.
None
and
Context: The overall aim of the plans and programmes relating to traffic and transport is to improve the quality and effectiveness of transport infrastructure in terms of efficiency, pollution and social justice. The plans seek to strike a balance between the growing economy and the increasing demand for travel, and also achieving environmental objectives. Ultimately therefore the goal is to improve the quality and efficiency of transport in Europe to supplement the economy. Further plans seek to support targets for the improvement of air quality and the reduction of greenhouse gas emissions by providing sustainable transport alternative and promoting health. In the UK this particularly relates to improving rail infrastructure. Throughout the UK a number of programmes have established indicators and baselines to monitor the performance of transport. In 2006/2007 9% of Londoners found it very or fairly difficult to get to a corner shop or supermarket (2% lower than the national average) (Source: Defra, 2008). In 2006/2007 10% of Londoners found it very or fairly difficult to get to a post office (in line with the national average) (Source: Defra, 2008). In 2006/2007 22% of Londoners found it very or fairly difficult to get to a doctor or hospital (6% lower than the national average) (Source: Defra, 2008). Between 2000 and 2009, total distance travelled in London has increased by an estimated 6%. Over this period the total number of trips has increased, by an estimated 5%. Therefore distance travelled per person has been broadly constant after taking account of increased population and changes to in commuters and visitors (Source: TfL, Travel in London, 2009). In 2007 23.8 million trips were made in, to, or from London on an average day, 33% of these trips were by public transport (Source: TfL, Travel in London, 2009). In 2006, there was the following breakdown in mode of travel in London: 43% by car, 13% by bus or tram, 9% by Underground, 8% by rail, 2% by cycle and 24% were on foot (Source: Focus on London, 2008). In London between 2001 and 2007 there was a 22% increase in public transport journeys per head of population, (and a 9% decrease in car journeys per head) (Source: Focus on London 2008). In London 31% of trips are for shopping and personal business, 16% for commuting, and 26% for leisure (Source: Focus on London 2008).
Page 25
Entec UK Limited

Objectives In 2007/2008 the mode of travel for London residents was: 37.9% by car, 1.3% by taxi, 0.6% by motorcycle, 14.5% by bus or tram, 7.6% by Underground and DLR, 4.8% by rail, 2% by cycle and 31.4% by foot (nationally 63% of journeys are by car) (Source: TfL, 2009 London Travel Report 2008). The number of bus journeys in London in 2006/2007 was 45% higher than in 1999/2000 (Source: GLA, 2008). Between 2000 and 2006 there was an 83% increase in the number of people cycling (Source: GLA (2008)). However, this still only accounts for 2% of all travel in London (Source: TfL, 2009). Whilst walking currently accounts for 21% of Londoners journeys (Source: GLA, 2008). There has been a 35% reduction in the number of road casualties since 2000. In 2006 33% of those killed or injured in road casualties were pedestrians (Source: GLA, 2008). In London car use is on a declining trend, whilst public transport and cycle use is on an increasing trend.
Short term score: Minor positive Key Impacts: Medium term score: Minor positive
Proposals which seek to increase the provision
Uncertainty:
Mitigation:
of arts and cultural facilities, especially in Outer London will positively contribute to accessibility of these facilities. There could be positive long term effects through collaboration on transport infrastructure with neighbouring regions.

relevant projects cannot be determined at this stage
None.
Built and Historic Environment To enhance and protect the existing built environment (including the architectural distinctiveness, townscape/landscape and archaeological heritage) and landscapes, and ensure new buildings
Context: The plans and programmes relating to cultural heritage have the overall aim of protecting, conserving and transmitting archaeology and heritage to future generations. They aim to place the historic environment at the heart of the planning system and to implement a unified heritage protection system that will be easier to understand and use, more efficient, accountable and transparent and that will maximise opportunities for public inclusion and involvement. Across the UK the policies explain how, the development plan and development control systems, give weight to archaeology and heritage in planning decisions and planning conditions. In 2008 London had 152 Scheduled Ancient Monuments (19,446 in England), 121 of these were considered at risk (Source: English Heritage). In 2008 London had 18,461 listed buildings (372,905 in England). This breaks down to 582 Grade 1, 1,321 Grade 11* and 16,558 Grade 11 listed buildings entries, 487 of which were considered at risk (Source: English Heritage). In 2008 London had 148 Registered Parks and Gardens (Source: English Heritage). London has one historic battlefield at Banet (Source: English Heritage). London has 4 of the UKs 28 World Heritage Sites (Source: English Heritage).
Page 26
Entec UK Limited

Objectives and spaces appropriately designed. are In 2008 London had 955 conservation areas (Source: English Heritage). The London Historic Parks & Gardens Trust Inventory of Historic Green Spaces includes nearly 2,000 sites (Source: English Heritage).
Proposals intent to improve the quality of the
Uncertainty:
environment through appropriate and visually pleasing design which can help maintain Londons the character of Londons built environment but is unlikely, on its own, to significantly affect this objective.
None.
None.
Liveability Place
and
Context: The plans and programmes relating to population seek to provide strong, balanced and prosperous communities. This involves narrowing the gap between the most deprived neighbourhoods and the rest of the country and giving local communities more influence and power to improve their lives. A key element of achieving such aims is to ensure equality of opportunity for all Londons population and in turn provide sustainable lifestyles. Furthermore a number of plans and programmes relating to community safety seek to manage health and safety in a number of areas by reducing both general crime and anti-social behaviour. This in particular involves providing adequate health and safety information and managing health and safety risks. Further the plans aim to provide a European system of technical standards and certification for rail and road safety. In 2006/07 the total recorded crime rate in London was 124 offences per 1,000 population (national average of 100). The London crime rate has fallen from 145 in 2003/04 (Source: Focus on London 2008). In 2006/07 there was an overall rate of detection of recorded crime of 21% (lowest of UK regions) (Source: Focus on London 2008). In 2005/2006 per 100,000 of the population of London there were : 2,668 violent crimes against the person (1,971 on average in England and Wales) 139 sexual offences (115 on average in England and Wales) 1,398 burglaries (1,214 on average in England and Wales) 610 robberies (181 on average in England and Wales) 5,451 thefts/handling stolen goods (3,733 on average in England and Wales) 1,858 thefts from vehicles (1,351 on average in England and Wales)
Page 27
Entec UK Limited

Objectives 1,651 criminal damages (2,209 on average in England and Wales) 726 drugs and other offences (471 on average in England and Wales) (Source: ONS, 2007 Focus on London).

the environment increase the provision of arts and cultural facilities will positively contribute to creating a sense of vibrancy and place for communities.
Uncertainty:
None.
None.
Context: The plans and programmes relating to landscape aim to promote landscape protection, management and planning, and to organise European wide co-operation on landscape issues. National policy seeks to retain and provide well-designed open spaces of high quality and promote access to the countryside. Notably this ties in with maintaining biodiversity and habitats in the UK. Development plans within the UK set out how landscape can be regarded as a material consideration within development decisions. London covers an area of 1,572km2 (1.2% of England) (Source: English Heritage). Londons designation of Metropolitan Open Land (MOL) protects strategically important open spaces within the built environment, such as Richmond Park, Wimbledon Common, Hampstead Heath, Hackney Marshes, Oxleas Wood, Hyde Park and Mitcham Common (Source: Greener London, 2007). Green belt forms 22% of the area within the Greater London boundary, whilst 9.6% of Greater London is Metropolitan Open Land (Source: Greener London (2007)). In 2008 London had 148 Registered Parks and Gardens (just over 9% of the total for England) (Source: English Heritage). London has over 600 Garden Squares, of which 461 are protected by the London Squares Preservation Act 1931 (Source: English Heritage). London has 8 Royal Parks, numerous public parks and approximately122 heaths, commons and greens (Source: English Heritage).
Page 28
Entec UK Limited

Objectives London has 68km of the River Thames and 80km of canal network, both bordered by numerous historic assets and historic areas and open spaces.(Source: English Heritage). Thirty thousand Londoners rent allotments to grow vegetables and fruit and 14% of households grow vegetables in their garden. There is a shortage of allotment sites in inner London (Source: Greener London, 2007). London contains approximately 7,000 hectares of woodland, covering approximately 4.6% of the total land area, a third of which is classified as ancient forest (Source: Natural England, 2008).

the environment will have positive effects for open space.
Uncertainty:
None.
None.
Air Quality To improve Londons air quality.
Context: The plans and programmes relating to air quality establish a framework for the monitoring and limiting of pollutants. The Air Quality Strategy (The Air Quality Strategy for England, Scotland, Wales and Northern Ireland (2007)) sets national air quality targets for nine air pollutants. Objectives for seven of the air pollutants have been included in national air quality regulations for the purpose of local air quality management, with local authorities being required to work towards the objectives. There is also a system of Pollution Prevention and Control to improve air quality through the regulation of industrial facilities. This system incorporates specific EU requirements in respect of large combustion plants, waste incineration plants and activities emitting solvents. Planning policies across the UK stipulate that Air Quality is capable of being a material planning consideration. The Mayors Air Quality Strategy seeks to minimise the adverse effects of air pollution on human health and in turn improve quality of life in the city. London air pollution concentrations exceeded the UK Air Quality Strategy Objective (AQS) and EU Limit Values during 2006 and 2007 (Source: London Air Quality Network, Report). In London between 1997 and 2008, PM10 concentrations decreased by 26%; NOx concentrations decreased by around 36%; NO2 concentrations decreased by 13%; O3 concentrations increased by 31%; and CO concentrations decreased by 59%; and SO2 concentrations decreased by 77% (Source: Focus on London 2008). All London Boroughs have declared, all or in part, as Air Quality Management Areas (AQMAs). (75% of London (1,175 km2) was covered by AQMAs in April 2007) (Source: Greener London, 2007). London currently meets EU limits for carbon monoxide (CO) and sulphur dioxide (SO2), but fails the World Health Organisation levels of SO2. NO2 is a widespread problem that affects large areas of central and inner London, parts of suburban London and all busy roads. PM10 is more of a
Page 29
Entec UK Limited

Objectives localised problem to the busiest roads in London. Road transport, and in particular older diesel vehicles, are the main cause of air pollution in London. 30% of all cars registered in 2007 were diesel, compared with eight per cent in 1993. Although newer diesels have lower emissions than the most polluting old vehicles and emit less CO2, they still emit much higher levels of PM10 and NO2 than petrol vehicles. In Greater London, the total Oxides of nitrogen (NO2 and NO) emissions from all sources are expected to fall to 53,908 tonnes by 2010 (from 67,179 tonnes in 2003). The reductions are attributed to road transport and gas sources (Source: Mayor of London). The Mayor has set a target for London to stabilise its emissions at 60% below 1990 levels by 2025 (Source: Mayor of London).
There may be positive effects for air quality

through the implementation of the Air Quality Strategy for London.
Uncertainty:
None.
None.
Page 30
Entec UK Limited

Table G.3
Chapter 3: Transforming to a low carbon economy

0
0
There are no key impacts associated with this

objective.
None.
None.
Biodiversity and
Context: The plans and programmes covering biodiversity, fauna and flora seek to ensure the conservation of biological diversity; the sustainable
Page 31
Entec UK Limited

Objectives Nature Conservation To protect, enhance and promote the natural biodiversity of London use of its components; and the fair and equitable sharing of the benefits arising from the use of genetic resources. Policy particularly seeks to protect those species and habitats that are rare and endangered. A framework is provided that seeks to maintain or restore at favourable conservation status, natural habitats and species of community importance using designations such as Special Areas of Conservation (SAC), Special Protection Areas (SPA) and Ramsar sites. A target is set in Conserving Biodiversity The UK Approach to halt the loss of biodiversity in the UK by 2010. Such objectives filter down into UK planning policy at the national and regional level in order to protect such sites and habitats. There are 38 Sites of Special Scientific Interest (SSSI) in London (with over 4,000 nationally) (Source: Mayor of London, 2002). 10 of Londons SSSIs are ancient woodlands, 7 are grassland, 3 are mixed woodland and grassland, 9 are wetlands, 2 are heathland and bog, and 1 is parkland. The other 5 are notified for geological interest. (Source: Mayor of London, 2002). London has 5 European protected sites. These are Epping Forest SAC; Lea Valley SPA/Ramsar site; Richmond Park SAC; South West London Waterbodies SPA/Ramsar; and Wimbledon Common SAC (Source: Natural England, 2008). London has over 1,400 wildlife sites that have been classified as Sites of Importance for Nature Conservation. About 140 are Sites of Metropolitan Importance, 780 are Sites of Borough Importance and 460 sites are Sites of Local Importance (Mayor of London). Targets have been set by the London Biodiversity Partnership for the re-creation and restoration of priority habitats through to 2015, as advocated by PPS9 (Source: The London Plan).
0
0

objective.
None.
None.
Health being
and
Well-
To maximise the health and wellbeing of the population and reduce inequalities in health.
Context: The plans and policies relating to health set out and inform further, scientifically grounded information needed to help EU member states to reduce the adverse health impacts of certain environmental factors. This involves providing a good health service to an ageing Europe and at the national level providing an National Health Service that helps people stay healthy and grants patients greater rights. A number of documents seek to improve air quality and provide noise level guidelines and restrictions. Objectives are also provided that seek to reduce health inequalities. Through sustainable development, health policies filter down into planning policies, promoting health and well being. The overall age-standardised mortality rate in London (830 per 100,000 population) is lower than the UK average (875 per 100,000 population) (Source: Focus on London 2008). The main causes of mortality (rates per 100,000 population) in London are ischaemic heart disease and cancer (Source: Focus on London 2008). In 2001 15.5% of Londoners had a limiting long term illness (Source: ONS / Census Data, 2001). In 2005-06 in London the rate of: domestic noise source complaints was about 12,000 per million (Source: Focus on London 2008). In 2003 13% of Londoners reported that noise from road traffic in their locality was a serious problem (Source: Mayor of London (2004)).
Page 32
Entec UK Limited

Objectives
Short term score: Uncertain/positive Key Impacts: Medium term score: Uncertain/positive Long term score: Uncertain/positive
Proposals which seek to reduce emissions may

improve local air quality and thereby improve general levels of health and well-being in the capital.
Uncertainty:
The extent, in terms of scale and location, of this
effect cannot be reliably ascertained at this stage and is dependent on localised reductions in emissions and the effects are uncertain.
None.
Context: The plans and programmes on equality have the overall objective of creating equality in various fields including providing racial and ethnic equality, tackling discrimination in employment or occupation, gender equality and providing equal access for the disabled. On a wider level this involves providing inclusive, balanced and sustainable communities. Londons population encompasses 300 languages, and over 150 countries (Source: GLA, 2007 State of Equality in London). London is home to 42.7% of Englands non-white population (Source: GLA, 2008). 41.6% of Londons population is non-white British (Source: GLA, 2008). In 2005 the economic activity rate for white people in London was 78.9% compared to 65.6% for ethnic minorities (Source: ONS, 2007 Focus on London). 58% of Londoners profess being Christian, 8% Muslim, 4% Hindu, 2% Jewish, 1% Sikh, 16% no religion and 11% other (Source: GLA, 2008). The number of older people from Black, Asian and Minority Ethnic (BAME) communities in London will increase from 12% to 23% by 2021 (Source: GLA (2006)). Between 2001 and 2006 69.2% of the most deprived people in London were affected by adverse environmental conditions compared to 1% of least deprived people (Source: Defra, 2008). Between 2003 and 2006 41% of children and 21% of pensioners in London lived in households below 60% of the median deprivation level (national average of 29%) (Source: Defra, 2008). In 2006 13% of 16-18 year-olds were not in education, employment or training (Source: Defra, 2008). Out of 498 rough sleepers recorded in the UK during 2007, 248 were in London (Source: Defra, 2008). There are almost 250,000 people aged 80 or over living in London the population aged 60 and over is expected to increase by 9% between 2001 and 2021. (Source: GLA (2006)). 40.6% of disabled women and 45.6% of disabled men are in employment (Source: GLA, 2008). Approximately 50.6% of Londons population are female and 49.4% are male (nationally 51% female and 49% male). (Source: Focus on London 2008). London males earn on average 37% more than their female counterparts (Source: Focus on London 2008).
Page 33
Entec UK Limited

Objectives In London 10% of people are estimated to be gay, lesbian or bisexual (Source: GLA, 2007).
Long term score: Neutral Mitigation or enhancement:

objective.
None.
None.
Context: The relevant plans and programmes covering housing seek to provide more homes and a better mix of homes and create mixed communities. This should provide lower cost home ownership and thus widening eligibility to the housing market. There are also aims within the documents for more sustainable homes and to reduce homelessness. In London conventional housing supply has risen from 17,130 in 1999 to 27,290 in 2006/07 (Source: Focus on London 2008). In London in 2007/08 28,199 net additional homes were provided (Source: London Plan Annual Monitoring Report 5, 2009). In London in 2007-08 10,394 net affordable homes were provided (Source: Housing in London, 2008). There are currently 84,000 empty homes in London (2.7% of total stock) (Source: Housing in London, 2008). The DCLG reported a fall in annual house prices in both London and the UK in Q1 2009. Annual house price inflation in London decreased to -14.0% in Q1 2009 from -7.9% in Q4 2008. Annual house price inflation in the UK decreased to -12.5% in Q1 2009 from -8.7% in Q4 2008 (Source: Londons Economy Today, Issue 82, June 2009). London has a very high percentage of developments using previously developed land. As London has limited land stock and already has around 95% of development on previously developed land, the trend of increasing use of brownfield sites is likely to stabilise at this high level. London has a trend of very high development density, although this is showing a moderate decline from a peak of around 85 dwellings per ha in 2003 (Source: DCLG, Land use change statistics).

objective.
None.
None.
Employment To offer everyone the opportunity for rewarding, welllocated and satisfying
Context: Relevant plans and programmes aim to provide long-term sustainable employment levels. In turn the documents aim to increase the skill base of the nations workforce. These skills are to be geared towards areas of the economy earmarked for growth. The relevant plans also aim to improve accessibility to the labour market. Annual employment growth in London turned negative in the fourth quarter of 2008 to -0.4 per cent from 0.5 per cent in the third quarter (Source: Londons Economic Outlook: Spring 2009).
Page 34
Entec UK Limited

Objectives employment. In January to March 2009 the unemployment rate in London was 8.2%, up 1.3 percentage points on the same period a year earlier (Source: ONS, 2009). Small and medium-sized enterprises account for 49% and large firms account for 51% of private sector employment in London (Source: Focus on London 2008). London has had a higher net business start up rate than the UK for nine of the past ten years (Source: Focus on London 2008). In the past 20 years 546,000 jobs have been created in the financial and business services while 292,000 jobs have been lost from manufacturing (Source: Mayor of London, 2008a). Londons annual employment growth decreased to -0.2% in Q4 2008 from a downwardly revised 0.7% in Q3 2008. Annual employment growth in the rest of the UK decreased to -1.3% in Q4 2008 from a downwardly revised -0.5% in Q3 2008. (Source: Londons Economy Today, Issue 82, June 2009). Londons GDP is 160 billion a year its productivity is 27% higher than the rest of the rest of the country (Source: GLA, 2008). In 2007 24.6% of Londoners were economically inactive (over 2% higher than the UK average) (Source: Defra, 2008c). Employment in London is forecast to fall in 2009, 2010 and 2011 from 4.69 million in 2008 to 4.40 million by 2011. (Source: Londons Economic Outlook: Spring 2009).
The shift to a low carbon economy is likely to
Uncertainty:
create a wide range of green jobs Proposals which aim to develop low carbon skills may have positive effects on incomes and career progression.
None.
None.
Stable Economy To encourage a strong, diverse and stable economy and to improve the resilience of businesses. This
Context: The plans and programmes relating to the economy have an overall aim of achieving a diverse sustainable economy. In particular the documents seek balanced economic growth and in turn to provide long-term employment and provide effective regeneration. Further this involves responding to climate change, improving the tourism sector and investing in transport infrastructure. At a regional level the documents aim to maintain London as a globally competitive city and direct resources sufficiently to respond to the economic downturn. Londons economy grew by 59% between 1993 and 2007. However the UK and London economies are currently in recession (Source: TfL, Travel in London 2009).
Page 35
Entec UK Limited

Objectives should also support the development of an efficient, low carbon economy (including new green technologies). Londons annual growth in output decreased to -1.0% in Q4 2008 from a downwardly revised 1.2% in Q3 2008. In the rest of the UK, annual growth in output decreased to -2.2% in Q4 2008 from an upwardly revised 0.3% in Q3 2008 (Source: Londons Economy Today, Issue 82, June 2009). Londons economic output grew at an annualised rate of 2.7 per cent in quarter three of 2008 compared to 0.3% in the UK (Source: Londons Economic Outlook: Spring 2009). In 2007 Gross Value Added (GVA) per head in inner London was 52,857, nearly three times the national average (Source: Focus on London 2008). In 2006 London accounted for 18.8% of total UK GVA (Source: Focus on London 2008). In 2004 Londons business services sector contributed 67.0bn and the financial services sector contributed 37.0bn to Londons GVA (Source: Focus on London 2008).
++
++
There are significant business and job
Uncertainty:
opportunities associated with the growth in green industries and sectors. There are longer term benefits from London being a leader in the shift to a low carbon economy. There may be negative effects from increased costs to businesses from upgrading energy efficient systems. Negative effects would likely be short term and be cost neutral to positive in the longer term.
None.
None.
Flood Risk and Climate Change Adaptation. To ensure London adapts to the effects of climate change (both now and in the future). The effects on London particularly concern flooding, drought and
Context: The plans and programmes on climate change have the overall objective of seeking to stabilise and reduce greenhouse gas emissions with the aim of minimising and mitigating the adverse effects of climate change on human health and the environment. The solution to this requires a coordinated effort. The Kyoto Protocol sets targets to reduce the collective emissions of developed countries by 5.2% from 1990 levels by the period 2008 to 2012. The UK Climate Change Act (2008) also sets binding targets for reduction of CO2 emissions (leading to an 80% reduction by 2050 compared to a 1990 baseline) (UK only). The plans also set out the likely effects of climate change on the regions of the UK and how the targets are to be achieved. Overall, the trend for London is towards warmer and wetter weather. 2006 was the warmest year in London on record. The average temperature in the last decade in London was over a degree warmer compared with 1975 to 1984 (Source: Focus on London 2008).
Page 36
Entec UK Limited

Objectives overheating. UKCIPs key findings for London in the 2080s are: Under medium emissions, the central estimate of increase in winter mean temperature is 3C; it is very unlikely to be less than 1.6C and is very unlikely to be more than 4.7C. Under medium emissions, the central estimate of increase in summer mean temperature is 3.9C; it is very unlikely to be less than 2C and is very unlikely to be more than 6.4C. Under medium emissions, the central estimate of change in winter mean precipitation is 20%; it is very unlikely to be less than 3% and is very unlikely to be more than 46%. Under medium emissions, the central estimate of change in summer mean precipitation is 22%; it is very unlikely to be less than 46% and is very unlikely to be more than 7%.
In London about 1.25 million people and 480,000 properties (15% of London) lie within identified flood risk zones. These areas are protected by flood defences (Source: GLA/Entec, 2009). The River Thames has a tidal range in excess of 7 metres on spring tides. 6,200ha and parts of 12 London boroughs are below the normal high tide mark. The area that could potentially be affected by a storm surge covers 11 600ha and 20 London boroughs. The Thames Barrier and associated systems provide protection against tidal flooding. The present system of flood risk management for tidal flooding can continue to provide an acceptable level of risk management up to 2030. Beyond 2030 more actions may be needed (Source: Regional Flood Risk Appraisal (RFRA) for the London Plan Draft London Plan Implementation Report 2007). Surface water drainage networks are normally designed to cope with storms of a 1 in 20 year intensity. Many areas with large roof areas, at low points in the drainage network or that have suffered blockages in the surface water system have experienced surface water flooding (including rail stations and road network underpasses) (Source: Regional Flood Risk Appraisal (RFRA) for the London Plan Draft London Plan Implementation Report 2007).
Medium term score: Neutral
Proposals which seek to help businesses adapt
Uncertainty:
to the future impacts of climate change (through building design or continuity plans) are likely to have positive longer term effects.
None.
None.
Climate Mitigation Energy To ensure
Change and London
Context: The Climate Change Act 2008 has set the target of an 80% cut in net UK carbon emission by 2050 compared to 1990 levels. This seeks to maintain the reliability of energy supplies; promote competitive markets to help sustainable economic growth and improved productivity; and ensure that every home is adequately and affordably heated throughout the UK. More specifically, the London Mayors Strategy sets out that London should aim to generate at least 665GWh of electricity and 280GWh of heat, from up to 40,000 renewable energy schemes by 2010.
Page 37
Entec UK Limited

Objectives contributes to global climate change mitigation, achieve greater energy efficiency and reduces its reliance on fossil fuels. In 2003 the total carbon dioxide emissions for London were 43,665 Kilotonnes of carbon dioxide. The five non-CO2 greenhouse gases contribute the equivalent of approximately 2% of Londons total CO2 emission output. (Source: Focus on London 2008). London produces 8% of the UKs total CO2 emissions. Londons per capita CO2 emissions are 25% lower than the UK average (Source: Mayor of London (2007) Action Today to Protect Tomorrow The Mayors Climate Change Action Plan). Ground-based transport is responsible for 22% of Londons total CO2 emissions (excluding aviation) (Source: Mayor of London (2007) Action Today to Protect Tomorrow The Mayors Climate Change Action Plan). The principal transport sources of CO2 are: the London bus and London Underground networks (0.6 million tonnes of CO2 each per year); and taxis and private hire vehicles (0.3 million tonnes of CO2 each per year) (Source: TfL (2009) London Travel Report 2008 (unpublished) Mayor of London). The total energy consumption of London was 160,883 Gigawatt hours (GWh) in 2003 (2,120,261.5 GWh in UK in 2006), emitting a total of 43,665 Kilotonnes of carbon dioxide. (Source: Focus on London 2008). The projected economic and population growth forecasted for London will increase all of Londons CO2 emissions by 15%, from 43.6 million tonnes to an estimated 51 million tonnes per year by 2025 (excluding aviation emissions) (Mayor of London 2007). It is currently unclear what effect the recent recession will have on these projections.
++
++
++
Reducing emissions is a major theme of this

chapter and the effects will be positive and significant. This will be achieved through infrastructure provision and direct funding to encourage retrofitting etc.
Uncertainty:
None.
None.
Context: The plans and programmes relating to water quality set standards for drinking water and the wider water environment. Further plans seek to improve water efficiency with a key target being to reduce the average amount of water used per person in the home to 130 litres each day by 2030. The programmes aim to reduce and manage the risks that floods pose to human health, the environment, cultural heritage and economic activity. The plans require Members States to review all watercourses and coastlines to assess the risk from flooding, to map the flood extent and the population and assets at risk in these areas. In 2007 76.2% of surface water within the Thames region was rated as being of good or better chemical quality (decrease from 80.5% in 2002)
Page 38
Entec UK Limited

Objectives (Source: Environment Agency, 2007). Furthermore in 2007 64.5% of surface water within the Thames region was rated as being of good or better biological quality (decrease from 75.7% in 2002). (Source: Environment Agency, 2007). In 2008 about 55.5% of the total river length in the Thames region had either high or very high Nitrate concentrations (Source: Focus on London 2008). 80% of Londons water comes from the Thames and the River Lee, and the remaining 20% comes from Londons subterranean aquifer (all mostly fed by winter rainfall) (Source: Focus on London 2008). Londoners consume approximately 168 litres of water per day (national average of 150 litres per person per day) (Source: GLA/Entec, 2009). Approximately a quarter of all water distributed in the mains network is lost to leakage (Source: GLA/Entec, 2009). Rivers and canals in London are subject to a number of pressures including pollution, low flows, habitat degradation and recreation (Source: Focus on London 2008).
++
++
++
Proposals aim to work with businesses and

water companies to manage and reduce water consumption. This will have positive effects for water resources.
Uncertainty:
None.
None.
Context: Relevant plans and programmes establish a framework for the management of waste across the European Community; priority is given to waste prevention, re-use and recovery of waste; prohibition of the uncontrolled disposal of waste; establishment of an integrated network of disposal installations; preparation of waste management plans; ensuring that the cost of disposal is borne by the waste holder; ensuring that waste carriers are registered; ensuring that waste is recovered or disposed of without endangering human health. This is in light of the waste hierarchy and initiatives filtering down to the local level to shift waste management up it. Plans on a regional level in particular aim to change individual lifestyle habits and promote advanced waste technologies. London produces around 7 million tonnes of C&I waste per year (as compared to approximately 4 million tonnes of municipal waste). Approximately 3 million tonnes of this C&I waste goes to landfill or incineration within, and outside London (Source: London Commercial Waste and Recycling Programme, 2008). The amount of household waste collected in England in 2007-8 was 25.3 million tonnes, and 34.5% of this was recycled or composted (Source: Defra, Environment in your Pocket Statistics, 2008).
Page 39
Entec UK Limited

Objectives In 2006/07, London produced the second highest amount of municipal waste in England, over 4.2 million tonnes, of which just over 80% was from households. The amount of waste per household was just above average at 1.33 tonnes compared with 1.36 tonnes for England as a whole (Source: Focus on London 2008). In 2006/07, 23% of Londons household municipal waste was recycled; 57% of Londons municipal waste was sent to landfill (the third highest percentage in England); and London incinerated more municipal waste than any other region (929,000 tonnes), (Source: Focus on London 2008). In 2007/08 Londons municipal waste arisings were 4,149 thousand tonnes and household arisings were 3,342 thousand tonnes (Source: Capital Waste Facts).
++
++
++
Proposals aim to work with to manage and
Uncertainty:
reduce waste. This will have positive effects for reducing the amount of waste produced by Londoners.
None.
None.
and
Context: The overall aim of the plans and programmes relating to traffic and transport is to improve the quality and effectiveness of transport infrastructure in terms of efficiency, pollution and social justice. The plans seek to strike a balance between the growing economy and the increasing demand for travel, and also achieving environmental objectives. Ultimately therefore the goal is to improve the quality and efficiency of transport in Europe to supplement the economy. Further plans seek to support targets for the improvement of air quality and the reduction of greenhouse gas emissions by providing sustainable transport alternative and promoting health. In the UK this particularly relates to improving rail infrastructure. Throughout the UK a number of programmes have established indicators and baselines to monitor the performance of transport. In 2006/2007 9% of Londoners found it very or fairly difficult to get to a corner shop or supermarket (2% lower than the national average) (Source: Defra, 2008). In 2006/2007 10% of Londoners found it very or fairly difficult to get to a post office (in line with the national average) (Source: Defra, 2008). In 2006/2007 22% of Londoners found it very or fairly difficult to get to a doctor or hospital (6% lower than the national average) (Source: Defra, 2008). Between 2000 and 2009, total distance travelled in London has increased by an estimated 6%. Over this period the total number of trips has increased, by an estimated 5%. Therefore distance travelled per person has been broadly constant after taking account of increased population and changes to in commuters and visitors (Source: TfL, Travel in London, 2009). In 2007 23.8 million trips were made in, to, or from London on an average day, 33% of these trips were by public transport (Source: TfL, Travel in London, 2009).
Page 40
Entec UK Limited

Objectives In 2006, there was the following breakdown in mode of travel in London: 43% by car, 13% by bus or tram, 9% by Underground, 8% by rail, 2% by cycle and 24% were on foot (Source: Focus on London, 2008). In London between 2001 and 2007 there was a 22% increase in public transport journeys per head of population, (and a 9% decrease in car journeys per head) (Source: Focus on London 2008). In London 31% of trips are for shopping and personal business, 16% for commuting, and 26% for leisure (Source: Focus on London 2008). In 2007/2008 the mode of travel for London residents was: 37.9% by car, 1.3% by taxi, 0.6% by motorcycle, 14.5% by bus or tram, 7.6% by Underground and DLR, 4.8% by rail, 2% by cycle and 31.4% by foot (nationally 63% of journeys are by car) (Source: TfL, 2009 London Travel Report 2008). The number of bus journeys in London in 2006/2007 was 45% higher than in 1999/2000 (Source: GLA, 2008). Between 2000 and 2006 there was an 83% increase in the number of people cycling (Source: GLA (2008)). However, this still only accounts for 2% of all travel in London (Source: TfL, 2009). Whilst walking currently accounts for 21% of Londoners journeys (Source: GLA, 2008). There has been a 35% reduction in the number of road casualties since 2000. In 2006 33% of those killed or injured in road casualties were pedestrians (Source: GLA, 2008). In London car use is on a declining trend, whilst public transport and cycle use is on an increasing trend.
Medium term score: Minor positive Uncertainty:
Long term score: Minor positive Mitigation or enhancement:
Proposal 3B supports the shift to an alternative

mode of transport (electric vehicles ) and will likely result in medium to longer term beneficial effects.
None.
None.
Built and Historic Environment To enhance and protect the existing built environment (including the architectural distinctiveness, townscape/landscape and archaeological
Context: The plans and programmes relating to cultural heritage have the overall aim of protecting, conserving and transmitting archaeology and heritage to future generations. They aim to place the historic environment at the heart of the planning system and to implement a unified heritage protection system that will be easier to understand and use, more efficient, accountable and transparent and that will maximise opportunities for public inclusion and involvement. Across the UK the policies explain how, the development plan and development control systems, give weight to archaeology and heritage in planning decisions and planning conditions. In 2008 London had 152 Scheduled Ancient Monuments (19,446 in England), 121 of these were considered at risk (Source: English Heritage). In 2008 London had 18,461 listed buildings (372,905 in England). This breaks down to 582 Grade 1, 1,321 Grade 11* and 16,558 Grade 11 listed buildings entries, 487 of which were considered at risk (Source: English Heritage).
Page 41
Entec UK Limited

Objectives heritage) and landscapes, and ensure new buildings and spaces are appropriately designed. In 2008 London had 148 Registered Parks and Gardens (Source: English Heritage). London has one historic battlefield at Banet (Source: English Heritage). London has 4 of the UKs 28 World Heritage Sites (Source: English Heritage). In 2008 London had 955 conservation areas (Source: English Heritage). The London Historic Parks & Gardens Trust Inventory of Historic Green Spaces includes nearly 2,000 sites (Source: English Heritage).
Short term score: Neutral Key Impacts: Medium term score: Neutral
Long term score: Neutral

objective.
Uncertainty:
None.
None.
Liveability Place
and
Context: The plans and programmes relating to population seek to provide strong, balanced and prosperous communities. This involves narrowing the gap between the most deprived neighbourhoods and the rest of the country and giving local communities more influence and power to improve their lives. A key element of achieving such aims is to ensure equality of opportunity for all Londons population and in turn provide sustainable lifestyles. Furthermore a number of plans and programmes relating to community safety seek to manage health and safety in a number of areas by reducing both general crime and anti-social behaviour. This in particular involves providing adequate health and safety information and managing health and safety risks. Further the plans aim to provide a European system of technical standards and certification for rail and road safety. In 2006/07 the total recorded crime rate in London was 124 offences per 1,000 population (national average of 100). The London crime rate has fallen from 145 in 2003/04 (Source: Focus on London 2008). In 2006/07 there was an overall rate of detection of recorded crime of 21% (lowest of UK regions) (Source: Focus on London 2008). In 2005/2006 per 100,000 of the population of London there were : 2,668 violent crimes against the person (1,971 on average in England and Wales) 139 sexual offences (115 on average in England and Wales) 1,398 burglaries (1,214 on average in England and Wales) 610 robberies (181 on average in England and Wales) 5,451 thefts/handling stolen goods (3,733 on average in England and Wales) 1,858 thefts from vehicles (1,351 on average in England and Wales)
Page 42
Entec UK Limited

Objectives 1,651 criminal damages (2,209 on average in England and Wales) 726 drugs and other offences (471 on average in England and Wales) (Source: ONS, 2007 Focus on London).

objective.
None.
None.
Context: The plans and programmes relating to landscape aim to promote landscape protection, management and planning, and to organise European wide co-operation on landscape issues. National policy seeks to retain and provide well-designed open spaces of high quality and promote access to the countryside. Notably this ties in with maintaining biodiversity and habitats in the UK. Development plans within the UK set out how landscape can be regarded as a material consideration within development decisions. London covers an area of 1,572km2 (1.2% of England) (Source: English Heritage). Londons designation of Metropolitan Open Land (MOL) protects strategically important open spaces within the built environment, such as Richmond Park, Wimbledon Common, Hampstead Heath, Hackney Marshes, Oxleas Wood, Hyde Park and Mitcham Common (Source: Greener London, 2007). Green belt forms 22% of the area within the Greater London boundary, whilst 9.6% of Greater London is Metropolitan Open Land (Source: Greener London (2007)). In 2008 London had 148 Registered Parks and Gardens (just over 9% of the total for England) (Source: English Heritage). London has over 600 Garden Squares, of which 461 are protected by the London Squares Preservation Act 1931 (Source: English Heritage). London has 8 Royal Parks, numerous public parks and approximately122 heaths, commons and greens (Source: English Heritage). London has 68km of the River Thames and 80km of canal network, both bordered by numerous historic assets and historic areas and open spaces.(Source: English Heritage).
Page 43
Entec UK Limited

Objectives Thirty thousand Londoners rent allotments to grow vegetables and fruit and 14% of households grow vegetables in their garden. There is a shortage of allotment sites in inner London (Source: Greener London, 2007). London contains approximately 7,000 hectares of woodland, covering approximately 4.6% of the total land area, a third of which is classified as ancient forest (Source: Natural England, 2008).

objective.
None.
None.
Context: The plans and programmes relating to air quality establish a framework for the monitoring and limiting of pollutants. The Air Quality Strategy (The Air Quality Strategy for England, Scotland, Wales and Northern Ireland (2007)) sets national air quality targets for nine air pollutants. Objectives for seven of the air pollutants have been included in national air quality regulations for the purpose of local air quality management, with local authorities being required to work towards the objectives. There is also a system of Pollution Prevention and Control to improve air quality through the regulation of industrial facilities. This system incorporates specific EU requirements in respect of large combustion plants, waste incineration plants and activities emitting solvents. Planning policies across the UK stipulate that Air Quality is capable of being a material planning consideration. The Mayors Air Quality Strategy seeks to minimise the adverse effects of air pollution on human health and in turn improve quality of life in the city. London air pollution concentrations exceeded the UK Air Quality Strategy Objective (AQS) and EU Limit Values during 2006 and 2007 (Source: London Air Quality Network, Report). In London between 1997 and 2008, PM10 concentrations decreased by 26%; NOx concentrations decreased by around 36%; NO2 concentrations decreased by 13%; O3 concentrations increased by 31%; and CO concentrations decreased by 59%; and SO2 concentrations decreased by 77% (Source: Focus on London 2008). All London Boroughs have declared, all or in part, as Air Quality Management Areas (AQMAs). (75% of London (1,175 km2) was covered by AQMAs in April 2007) (Source: Greener London, 2007). London currently meets EU limits for carbon monoxide (CO) and sulphur dioxide (SO2), but fails the World Health Organisation levels of SO2. NO2 is a widespread problem that affects large areas of central and inner London, parts of suburban London and all busy roads. PM10 is more of a localised problem to the busiest roads in London. Road transport, and in particular older diesel vehicles, are the main cause of air pollution in London. 30% of all cars registered in 2007 were diesel, compared with eight per cent in 1993. Although newer diesels have lower emissions than the most polluting old vehicles and emit less CO2, they still emit much higher levels of PM10 and NO2 than petrol vehicles.
Page 44
Entec UK Limited

Objectives In Greater London, the total Oxides of nitrogen (NO2 and NO) emissions from all sources are expected to fall to 53,908 tonnes by 2010 (from 67,179 tonnes in 2003). The reductions are attributed to road transport and gas sources (Source: Mayor of London). The Mayor has set a target for London to stabilise its emissions at 60% below 1990 levels by 2025 (Source: Mayor of London).
There may be indirect and positive long term

effects for Londons air quality as a result of policies aimed at reducing emissions
Uncertainty:
Mitigation:
None.
None.
Page 45
Entec UK Limited

Table G.4
Chapter 4: Extending opportunity to all Londoners

Medium term score: Uncertain/uncertain Long term score: Uncertain/positive
Short term score: Uncertain/positive
?/+
?/+
?/+
The delivery of housing, including affordable

housing, can positively contribute to existing
The extent of this effect is uncertain at this stage
None
Page 46
Entec UK Limited

Objectives
regeneration plans for a local area, although the extent of this is uncertain at this stage and can only be determined at a project specific level. and can only be determined at a project specific level.
0
0

objective.
None.
None.
Health being
and
Well-
To maximise the health and wellbeing of the population and reduce inequalities in health.
Context: The plans and policies relating to health set out and inform further, scientifically grounded information needed to help EU member states to reduce the adverse health impacts of certain environmental factors. This involves providing a good health service to an ageing Europe and at the national level providing an National Health Service that helps people stay healthy and grants patients greater rights. A number of documents seek to improve air quality and provide noise level guidelines and restrictions. Objectives are also provided that seek to reduce health inequalities. Through sustainable development, health policies filter down into planning policies, promoting health and well being. The overall age-standardised mortality rate in London (830 per 100,000 population) is lower than the UK average (875 per 100,000 population) (Source: Focus on London 2008).
Page 47
Entec UK Limited

Objectives The main causes of mortality (rates per 100,000 population) in London are ischaemic heart disease and cancer (Source: Focus on London 2008). In 2001 15.5% of Londoners had a limiting long term illness (Source: ONS / Census Data, 2001). In 2005-06 in London the rate of: domestic noise source complaints was about 12,000 per million (Source: Focus on London 2008). In 2003 13% of Londoners reported that noise from road traffic in their locality was a serious problem (Source: Mayor of London (2004)).
Proposals which improve access to adequate

housing and rewarding jobs can indirectly contribute to improved levels of health and wellbeing.
Uncertainty:
Mitigation:
None.
None.
Context: The plans and programmes on equality have the overall objective of creating equality in various fields including providing racial and ethnic equality, tackling discrimination in employment or occupation, gender equality and providing equal access for the disabled. On a wider level this involves providing inclusive, balanced and sustainable communities. Londons population encompasses 300 languages, and over 150 countries (Source: GLA, 2007 State of Equality in London). London is home to 42.7% of Englands non-white population (Source: GLA, 2008). 41.6% of Londons population is non-white British (Source: GLA, 2008). In 2005 the economic activity rate for white people in London was 78.9% compared to 65.6% for ethnic minorities (Source: ONS, 2007 Focus on London). 58% of Londoners profess being Christian, 8% Muslim, 4% Hindu, 2% Jewish, 1% Sikh, 16% no religion and 11% other (Source: GLA, 2008). The number of older people from Black, Asian and Minority Ethnic (BAME) communities in London will increase from 12% to 23% by 2021 (Source: GLA (2006)). Between 2001 and 2006 69.2% of the most deprived people in London were affected by adverse environmental conditions compared to 1% of least deprived people (Source: Defra, 2008). Between 2003 and 2006 41% of children and 21% of pensioners in London lived in households below 60% of the median deprivation level (national average of 29%) (Source: Defra, 2008). In 2006 13% of 16-18 year-olds were not in education, employment or training (Source: Defra, 2008). Out of 498 rough sleepers recorded in the UK during 2007, 248 were in London (Source: Defra, 2008). There are almost 250,000 people aged 80 or over living in London the population aged 60 and over is expected to increase by 9% between 2001 and 2021. (Source: GLA (2006)).
Page 48
Entec UK Limited

Objectives 40.6% of disabled women and 45.6% of disabled men are in employment (Source: GLA, 2008). Approximately 50.6% of Londons population are female and 49.4% are male (nationally 51% female and 49% male). (Source: Focus on London 2008). London males earn on average 37% more than their female counterparts (Source: Focus on London 2008). In London 10% of people are estimated to be gay, lesbian or bisexual (Source: GLA, 2007).
Proposals which seek to reduce child poverty

will positively contribute to longer term equality in the capital. Proposals which seek to reduce barriers in the labour market will positively contribute to improving equality. Proposals which seek to improve the delivery of affordable housing will positively contribute to reducing housing inequality
Uncertainty:
None
None.
Context: The relevant plans and programmes covering housing seek to provide more homes and a better mix of homes and create mixed communities. This should provide lower cost home ownership and thus widening eligibility to the housing market. There are also aims within the documents for more sustainable homes and to reduce homelessness. In London conventional housing supply has risen from 17,130 in 1999 to 27,290 in 2006/07 (Source: Focus on London 2008). In London in 2007/08 28,199 net additional homes were provided (Source: London Plan Annual Monitoring Report 5, 2009). In London in 2007-08 10,394 net affordable homes were provided (Source: Housing in London, 2008). There are currently 84,000 empty homes in London (2.7% of total stock) (Source: Housing in London, 2008). The DCLG reported a fall in annual house prices in both London and the UK in Q1 2009. Annual house price inflation in London decreased to -14.0% in Q1 2009 from -7.9% in Q4 2008. Annual house price inflation in the UK decreased to -12.5% in Q1 2009 from -8.7% in Q4 2008 (Source: Londons Economy Today, Issue 82, June 2009). London has a very high percentage of developments using previously developed land. As London has limited land stock and already has around 95% of development on previously developed land, the trend of increasing use of brownfield sites is likely to stabilise at this high level. London has a
Page 49
Entec UK Limited

Objectives trend of very high development density, although this is showing a moderate decline from a peak of around 85 dwellings per ha in 2003 (Source: DCLG, Land use change statistics).
Short term score: Uncertain/positive Key Impacts:
?/+
Medium term score: Uncertain/positive
?/+
Long term score: Uncertain/positive
?/+
Proposals seek to improve access to affordable

housing by target communities and improve delivery of new homes which would be a positive effect.
Uncertainty:
Mitigation:
The extent to which the Mayor is able to influence

investment to achieve these objectives is uncertain at this stage.
None
Context: Relevant plans and programmes aim to provide long-term sustainable employment levels. In turn the documents aim to increase the skill base of the nations workforce. These skills are to be geared towards areas of the economy earmarked for growth. The relevant plans also aim to improve accessibility to the labour market. Annual employment growth in London turned negative in the fourth quarter of 2008 to -0.4 per cent from 0.5 per cent in the third quarter (Source: Londons Economic Outlook: Spring 2009). In January to March 2009 the unemployment rate in London was 8.2%, up 1.3 percentage points on the same period a year earlier (Source: ONS, 2009). Small and medium-sized enterprises account for 49% and large firms account for 51% of private sector employment in London (Source: Focus on London 2008). London has had a higher net business start up rate than the UK for nine of the past ten years (Source: Focus on London 2008). In the past 20 years 546,000 jobs have been created in the financial and business services while 292,000 jobs have been lost from manufacturing (Source: Mayor of London, 2008a). Londons annual employment growth decreased to -0.2% in Q4 2008 from a downwardly revised 0.7% in Q3 2008. Annual employment growth in the rest of the UK decreased to -1.3% in Q4 2008 from a downwardly revised -0.5% in Q3 2008. (Source: Londons Economy Today, Issue 82, June 2009). Londons GDP is 160 billion a year its productivity is 27% higher than the rest of the rest of the country (Source: GLA, 2008). In 2007 24.6% of Londoners were economically inactive (over 2% higher than the UK average) (Source: Defra, 2008c). Employment in London is forecast to fall in 2009, 2010 and 2011 from 4.69 million in 2008 to 4.40 million by 2011. (Source: Londons Economic
Page 50
Entec UK Limited

Objectives Outlook: Spring 2009).
++
++
++
Proposals seek to remove barriers and

disincentives in the labour market, increase participation of young people and improve training and employability support which is expected to positively and significantly contribute to employment objectives.
Uncertainty:
There is some uncertainty as to what types of

actions will be undertaken to promote volunteering.
None.
Proposals which increase participation or
Uncertainty:
employment rates will increase the number of people contributing to the economic output of
None.
None.
Page 51
Entec UK Limited

Objectives
the economy.
Proposals which seek to reduce child poverty

may have positive longer term effects for the future workforce and positively contribute to the economy.
In London about 1.25 million people and 480,000 properties (15% of London) lie within identified flood risk zones. These areas are protected by flood defences (Source: GLA/Entec, 2009). The River Thames has a tidal range in excess of 7 metres on spring tides. 6,200ha and parts of 12 London boroughs are below the normal high tide mark. The area that could potentially be affected by a storm surge covers 11 600ha and 20 London boroughs. The Thames Barrier and associated systems provide protection against tidal flooding. The present system of flood risk management for tidal flooding can continue to provide an acceptable level of risk management up to 2030. Beyond 2030 more actions may be needed (Source: Regional Flood Risk Appraisal (RFRA) for the London Plan Draft London Plan Implementation Report 2007). Surface water drainage networks are normally designed to cope with storms of a 1 in 20 year intensity. Many areas with large roof areas, at low points in the drainage network or that have suffered blockages in the surface water system have experienced surface water flooding (including rail
Page 52
Entec UK Limited

Objectives stations and road network underpasses) (Source: Regional Flood Risk Appraisal (RFRA) for the London Plan Draft London Plan Implementation Report 2007).

objective.
None.
None.
Change and
Context: The Climate Change Act 2008 has set the target of an 80% cut in net UK carbon emission by 2050 compared to 1990 levels. This seeks to maintain the reliability of energy supplies; promote competitive markets to help sustainable economic growth and improved productivity; and ensure that every home is adequately and affordably heated throughout the UK. More specifically, the London Mayors Strategy sets out that London should aim to generate at least 665GWh of electricity and 280GWh of heat, from up to 40,000 renewable energy schemes by 2010. In 2003 the total carbon dioxide emissions for London were 43,665 Kilotonnes of carbon dioxide. The five non-CO2 greenhouse gases contribute the equivalent of approximately 2% of Londons total CO2 emission output. (Source: Focus on London 2008). London produces 8% of the UKs total CO2 emissions. Londons per capita CO2 emissions are 25% lower than the UK average (Source: Mayor of London (2007) Action Today to Protect Tomorrow The Mayors Climate Change Action Plan). Ground-based transport is responsible for 22% of Londons total CO2 emissions (excluding aviation) (Source: Mayor of London (2007) Action Today to Protect Tomorrow The Mayors Climate Change Action Plan). The principal transport sources of CO2 are: the London bus and London Underground networks (0.6 million tonnes of CO2 each per year); and taxis and private hire vehicles (0.3 million tonnes of CO2 each per year) (Source: TfL (2009) London Travel Report 2008 (unpublished) Mayor of London). The total energy consumption of London was 160,883 Gigawatt hours (GWh) in 2003 (2,120,261.5 GWh in UK in 2006), emitting a total of 43,665 Kilotonnes of carbon dioxide. (Source: Focus on London 2008). The projected economic and population growth forecasted for London will increase all of Londons CO2 emissions by 15%, from 43.6 million tonnes to an estimated 51 million tonnes per year by 2025 (excluding aviation emissions) (Mayor of London 2007). It is currently unclear what effect the recent recession will have on these projections.
There could be negative impacts through
Uncertainty:
Page 53
Entec UK Limited

Objectives
increased development but this will be mitigated through policies which impose overall impact of this propose stricter design standards which will reduce energy consumption of new developments.
None.
None.
Context: The plans and programmes relating to water quality set standards for drinking water and the wider water environment. Further plans seek to improve water efficiency with a key target being to reduce the average amount of water used per person in the home to 130 litres each day by 2030. The programmes aim to reduce and manage the risks that floods pose to human health, the environment, cultural heritage and economic activity. The plans require Members States to review all watercourses and coastlines to assess the risk from flooding, to map the flood extent and the population and assets at risk in these areas. In 2007 76.2% of surface water within the Thames region was rated as being of good or better chemical quality (decrease from 80.5% in 2002) (Source: Environment Agency, 2007). Furthermore in 2007 64.5% of surface water within the Thames region was rated as being of good or better biological quality (decrease from 75.7% in 2002). (Source: Environment Agency, 2007). In 2008 about 55.5% of the total river length in the Thames region had either high or very high Nitrate concentrations (Source: Focus on London 2008). 80% of Londons water comes from the Thames and the River Lee, and the remaining 20% comes from Londons subterranean aquifer (all mostly fed by winter rainfall) (Source: Focus on London 2008). Londoners consume approximately 168 litres of water per day (national average of 150 litres per person per day) (Source: GLA/Entec, 2009). Approximately a quarter of all water distributed in the mains network is lost to leakage (Source: GLA/Entec, 2009). Rivers and canals in London are subject to a number of pressures including pollution, low flows, habitat degradation and recreation (Source: Focus on London 2008).
Proposals supporting new housing development
Uncertainty:
may result in long term positive effects through reducing per capita water consumption through altering water usage in new buildings.
None.
None.
Waste
Context: Relevant plans and programmes establish a framework for the management of waste across the European Community; priority is given to
Page 54
Entec UK Limited

Objectives production of waste across all sectors and increase re-use, recycling, remanufacturing and recovery rates. waste prevention, re-use and recovery of waste; prohibition of the uncontrolled disposal of waste; establishment of an integrated network of disposal installations; preparation of waste management plans; ensuring that the cost of disposal is borne by the waste holder; ensuring that waste carriers are registered; ensuring that waste is recovered or disposed of without endangering human health. This is in light of the waste hierarchy and initiatives filtering down to the local level to shift waste management up it. Plans on a regional level in particular aim to change individual lifestyle habits and promote advanced waste technologies. London produces around 7 million tonnes of C&I waste per year (as compared to approximately 4 million tonnes of municipal waste). Approximately 3 million tonnes of this C&I waste goes to landfill or incineration within, and outside London (Source: London Commercial Waste and Recycling Programme, 2008). The amount of household waste collected in England in 2007-8 was 25.3 million tonnes, and 34.5% of this was recycled or composted (Source: Defra, Environment in your Pocket Statistics, 2008). In 2006/07, London produced the second highest amount of municipal waste in England, over 4.2 million tonnes, of which just over 80% was from households. The amount of waste per household was just above average at 1.33 tonnes compared with 1.36 tonnes for England as a whole (Source: Focus on London 2008). In 2006/07, 23% of Londons household municipal waste was recycled; 57% of Londons municipal waste was sent to landfill (the third highest percentage in England); and London incinerated more municipal waste than any other region (929,000 tonnes), (Source: Focus on London 2008). In 2007/08 Londons municipal waste arisings were 4,149 thousand tonnes and household arisings were 3,342 thousand tonnes (Source: Capital Waste Facts).
Proposals
which support new housing development can positively contribute to altering waste generation patterns in the home through compliance with relevant policies for new homes.
Uncertainty:
None.
None.
and
To maximise the accessibility for all in
Context: The overall aim of the plans and programmes relating to traffic and transport is to improve the quality and effectiveness of transport infrastructure in terms of efficiency, pollution and social justice. The plans seek to strike a balance between the growing economy and the increasing demand for travel, and also achieving environmental objectives. Ultimately therefore the goal is to improve the quality and efficiency of transport in Europe to supplement the economy. Further plans seek to support targets for the improvement of air quality and the reduction of greenhouse gas emissions by providing sustainable transport alternative and promoting health. In the UK this particularly relates to improving rail infrastructure.
Page 55
Entec UK Limited

Objectives and around London and increase the proportion of journeys made by sustainable transport modes (particularly public transport, walking and cycling). Throughout the UK a number of programmes have established indicators and baselines to monitor the performance of transport. In 2006/2007 9% of Londoners found it very or fairly difficult to get to a corner shop or supermarket (2% lower than the national average) (Source: Defra, 2008). In 2006/2007 10% of Londoners found it very or fairly difficult to get to a post office (in line with the national average) (Source: Defra, 2008). In 2006/2007 22% of Londoners found it very or fairly difficult to get to a doctor or hospital (6% lower than the national average) (Source: Defra, 2008). Between 2000 and 2009, total distance travelled in London has increased by an estimated 6%. Over this period the total number of trips has increased, by an estimated 5%. Therefore distance travelled per person has been broadly constant after taking account of increased population and changes to in commuters and visitors (Source: TfL, Travel in London, 2009). In 2007 23.8 million trips were made in, to, or from London on an average day, 33% of these trips were by public transport (Source: TfL, Travel in London, 2009). In 2006, there was the following breakdown in mode of travel in London: 43% by car, 13% by bus or tram, 9% by Underground, 8% by rail, 2% by cycle and 24% were on foot (Source: Focus on London, 2008). In London between 2001 and 2007 there was a 22% increase in public transport journeys per head of population, (and a 9% decrease in car journeys per head) (Source: Focus on London 2008). In London 31% of trips are for shopping and personal business, 16% for commuting, and 26% for leisure (Source: Focus on London 2008). In 2007/2008 the mode of travel for London residents was: 37.9% by car, 1.3% by taxi, 0.6% by motorcycle, 14.5% by bus or tram, 7.6% by Underground and DLR, 4.8% by rail, 2% by cycle and 31.4% by foot (nationally 63% of journeys are by car) (Source: TfL, 2009 London Travel Report 2008). The number of bus journeys in London in 2006/2007 was 45% higher than in 1999/2000 (Source: GLA, 2008). Between 2000 and 2006 there was an 83% increase in the number of people cycling (Source: GLA (2008)). However, this still only accounts for 2% of all travel in London (Source: TfL, 2009). Whilst walking currently accounts for 21% of Londoners journeys (Source: GLA, 2008). There has been a 35% reduction in the number of road casualties since 2000. In 2006 33% of those killed or injured in road casualties were pedestrians (Source: GLA, 2008). In London car use is on a declining trend, whilst public transport and cycle use is on an increasing trend.

objective.
None.
None.
Page 56
Entec UK Limited

Objectives Context: The plans and programmes relating to cultural heritage have the overall aim of protecting, conserving and transmitting archaeology and heritage to future generations. They aim to place the historic environment at the heart of the planning system and to implement a unified heritage protection system that will be easier to understand and use, more efficient, accountable and transparent and that will maximise opportunities for public inclusion and involvement. Across the UK the policies explain how, the development plan and development control systems, give weight to archaeology and heritage in planning decisions and planning conditions. In 2008 London had 152 Scheduled Ancient Monuments (19,446 in England), 121 of these were considered at risk (Source: English Heritage). In 2008 London had 18,461 listed buildings (372,905 in England). This breaks down to 582 Grade 1, 1,321 Grade 11* and 16,558 Grade 11 listed buildings entries, 487 of which were considered at risk (Source: English Heritage). In 2008 London had 148 Registered Parks and Gardens (Source: English Heritage). London has one historic battlefield at Banet (Source: English Heritage). London has 4 of the UKs 28 World Heritage Sites (Source: English Heritage). In 2008 London had 955 conservation areas (Source: English Heritage). The London Historic Parks & Gardens Trust Inventory of Historic Green Spaces includes nearly 2,000 sites (Source: English Heritage).
Built and Historic Environment To enhance and protect the existing built environment (including the architectural distinctiveness, townscape/landscap e and archaeological heritage) and landscapes, and ensure new buildings and spaces are appropriately designed.
New housing could affect the built environment

and historic setting of areas. However negative effects will be mitigated through building design standards laid out in the London Plan, London Housing Strategy and the Code for Sustainable Homes and the overall effect is assessed to be neutral.
None.
None.
Liveability Place
and
To create sustainable, mixed use environments that promote longterm social cohesion, sustainable lifestyles,
Context: The plans and programmes relating to population seek to provide strong, balanced and prosperous communities. This involves narrowing the gap between the most deprived neighbourhoods and the rest of the country and giving local communities more influence and power to improve their lives. A key element of achieving such aims is to ensure equality of opportunity for all Londons population and in turn provide sustainable lifestyles. Furthermore a number of plans and programmes relating to community safety seek to manage health and safety in a number of areas by reducing both general crime and anti-social behaviour. This in particular involves providing adequate health and safety information and managing health and safety risks. Further the plans aim to provide a European system of technical standards and certification for rail and road safety. In 2006/07 the total recorded crime rate in London was 124 offences per 1,000 population (national average of 100). The London crime rate has fallen from 145 in 2003/04 (Source: Focus on London 2008).
Page 57
Entec UK Limited

Objectives safety and security, and a sense of place. In 2006/07 there was an overall rate of detection of recorded crime of 21% (lowest of UK regions) (Source: Focus on London 2008). In 2005/2006 per 100,000 of the population of London there were : 2,668 violent crimes against the person (1,971 on average in England and Wales) 139 sexual offences (115 on average in England and Wales) 1,398 burglaries (1,214 on average in England and Wales) 610 robberies (181 on average in England and Wales) 5,451 thefts/handling stolen goods (3,733 on average in England and Wales) 1,858 thefts from vehicles (1,351 on average in England and Wales) 1,651 criminal damages (2,209 on average in England and Wales) 726 drugs and other offences (471 on average in England and Wales) (Source: ONS, 2007 Focus on London).
Proposals that seek to promote volunteering
Uncertainty:
can positively contribute to social cohesion and developing social networks from people of different backgrounds. Proposals which seek to encourage affordable housing as part of mixed use developments will positively contribute to creating mixed communities.
None.
None.
Page 58
Entec UK Limited

Objectives Context: The plans and programmes relating to landscape aim to promote landscape protection, management and planning, and to organise European wide co-operation on landscape issues. National policy seeks to retain and provide well-designed open spaces of high quality and promote access to the countryside. Notably this ties in with maintaining biodiversity and habitats in the UK. Development plans within the UK set out how landscape can be regarded as a material consideration within development decisions. London covers an area of 1,572km2 (1.2% of England) (Source: English Heritage). Londons designation of Metropolitan Open Land (MOL) protects strategically important open spaces within the built environment, such as Richmond Park, Wimbledon Common, Hampstead Heath, Hackney Marshes, Oxleas Wood, Hyde Park and Mitcham Common (Source: Greener London, 2007). Green belt forms 22% of the area within the Greater London boundary, whilst 9.6% of Greater London is Metropolitan Open Land (Source: Greener London (2007)). In 2008 London had 148 Registered Parks and Gardens (just over 9% of the total for England) (Source: English Heritage). London has over 600 Garden Squares, of which 461 are protected by the London Squares Preservation Act 1931 (Source: English Heritage). London has 8 Royal Parks, numerous public parks and approximately122 heaths, commons and greens (Source: English Heritage). London has 68km of the River Thames and 80km of canal network, both bordered by numerous historic assets and historic areas and open spaces.(Source: English Heritage). Thirty thousand Londoners rent allotments to grow vegetables and fruit and 14% of households grow vegetables in their garden. There is a shortage of allotment sites in inner London (Source: Greener London, 2007). London contains approximately 7,000 hectares of woodland, covering approximately 4.6% of the total land area, a third of which is classified as ancient forest (Source: Natural England, 2008).

objective.
None.
None.
Context: The plans and programmes relating to air quality establish a framework for the monitoring and limiting of pollutants. The Air Quality Strategy (The Air Quality Strategy for England, Scotland, Wales and Northern Ireland (2007)) sets national air quality targets for nine air pollutants. Objectives for seven of the air pollutants have been included in national air quality regulations for the purpose of local air quality management, with
Page 59
Entec UK Limited

Objectives local authorities being required to work towards the objectives. There is also a system of Pollution Prevention and Control to improve air quality through the regulation of industrial facilities. This system incorporates specific EU requirements in respect of large combustion plants, waste incineration plants and activities emitting solvents. Planning policies across the UK stipulate that Air Quality is capable of being a material planning consideration. The Mayors Air Quality Strategy seeks to minimise the adverse effects of air pollution on human health and in turn improve quality of life in the city. London air pollution concentrations exceeded the UK Air Quality Strategy Objective (AQS) and EU Limit Values during 2006 and 2007 (Source: London Air Quality Network, Report). In London between 1997 and 2008, PM10 concentrations decreased by 26%; NOx concentrations decreased by around 36%; NO2 concentrations decreased by 13%; O3 concentrations increased by 31%; and CO concentrations decreased by 59%; and SO2 concentrations decreased by 77% (Source: Focus on London 2008). All London Boroughs have declared, all or in part, as Air Quality Management Areas (AQMAs). (75% of London (1,175 km2) was covered by AQMAs in April 2007) (Source: Greener London, 2007). London currently meets EU limits for carbon monoxide (CO) and sulphur dioxide (SO2), but fails the World Health Organisation levels of SO2. NO2 is a widespread problem that affects large areas of central and inner London, parts of suburban London and all busy roads. PM10 is more of a localised problem to the busiest roads in London. Road transport, and in particular older diesel vehicles, are the main cause of air pollution in London. 30% of all cars registered in 2007 were diesel, compared with eight per cent in 1993. Although newer diesels have lower emissions than the most polluting old vehicles and emit less CO2, they still emit much higher levels of PM10 and NO2 than petrol vehicles. In Greater London, the total Oxides of nitrogen (NO2 and NO) emissions from all sources are expected to fall to 53,908 tonnes by 2010 (from 67,179 tonnes in 2003). The reductions are attributed to road transport and gas sources (Source: Mayor of London). The Mayor has set a target for London to stabilise its emissions at 60% below 1990 levels by 2025 (Source: Mayor of London).

objective.
None.
None.
Page 60
Entec UK Limited

TableG.5
Chapter 5: Investing in Londons future

Short term score: Minor positive Medium term score: Minor positive
+
Uncertainty:
Key Impacts:
There are a variety of proposals that support

regeneration objectives, especially the improved delivery thereof, in areas in Outer London and specific town centres identified in
There is some uncertainty as to the extent of the

proposals which will depend on the level of investment that can be secured.
None.
Page 61
Entec UK Limited

Objectives
the London Plan
This chapter also seeks to take full advangate

of regeneration opportunities associated with the 2012 Olympic Games.
Short term score: Uncertain Medium term score: Uncertain Long term score: Uncertain
?
?
Proposals that set out spatially defined

development areas could have positive or negative effects through potential loss or creation of habitat and effects are dependent on specific details of proposed schemes.
Uncertainty relates to specific details of proposed

schemes and the potential for loss or creation of habitats.
None.
Health being
and
Well-
To maximise the health and wellbeing
Context: The plans and policies relating to health set out and inform further, scientifically grounded information needed to help EU member states to reduce the adverse health impacts of certain environmental factors. This involves providing a good health service to an ageing Europe and at the national level providing an National Health Service that helps people stay healthy and grants patients greater rights. A number of documents seek to improve air quality and provide noise level guidelines and restrictions. Objectives are also provided that seek to reduce health inequalities. Through sustainable development, health policies filter down into planning policies, promoting health and well being.
Page 62
Entec UK Limited

Objectives of the population and reduce inequalities in health. The overall age-standardised mortality rate in London (830 per 100,000 population) is lower than the UK average (875 per 100,000 population) (Source: Focus on London 2008). The main causes of mortality (rates per 100,000 population) in London are ischaemic heart disease and cancer (Source: Focus on London 2008). In 2001 15.5% of Londoners had a limiting long term illness (Source: ONS / Census Data, 2001). In 2005-06 in London the rate of: domestic noise source complaints was about 12,000 per million (Source: Focus on London 2008). In 2003 13% of Londoners reported that noise from road traffic in their locality was a serious problem (Source: Mayor of London (2004)).
There are positive impacts in terms of
Uncertainty:
encouraging more active lifestyles both through encouraging more journeys by foot and bicycle and through the promotion of the 2012 Olympic Games promoting participation in sporting activities. Proposals which seek to reduce levels of vehicle usage could indirectly improve health through improvements in local air quality. Proposals that will affect reductions in poverty or improved access to services will positively contribute to health and well-being.
None.
None.
Equalities To ensure equitable outcomes for all communities, particularly those most at risk to experience discrimination, poverty and social exclusion. To also promote the cultural, ethnic, faith and
Context: The plans and programmes on equality have the overall objective of creating equality in various fields including providing racial and ethnic equality, tackling discrimination in employment or occupation, gender equality and providing equal access for the disabled. On a wider level this involves providing inclusive, balanced and sustainable communities. Londons population encompasses 300 languages, and over 150 countries (Source: GLA, 2007 State of Equality in London). London is home to 42.7% of Englands non-white population (Source: GLA, 2008). 41.6% of Londons population is non-white British (Source: GLA, 2008). In 2005 the economic activity rate for white people in London was 78.9% compared to 65.6% for ethnic minorities (Source: ONS, 2007 Focus on London). 58% of Londoners profess being Christian, 8% Muslim, 4% Hindu, 2% Jewish, 1% Sikh, 16% no religion and 11% other (Source: GLA, 2008). The number of older people from Black, Asian and Minority Ethnic (BAME) communities in London will increase from 12% to 23% by 2021 (Source: GLA (2006)).
Page 63
Entec UK Limited

Objectives racial diversity London. of Between 2001 and 2006 69.2% of the most deprived people in London were affected by adverse environmental conditions compared to 1% of least deprived people (Source: Defra, 2008). Between 2003 and 2006 41% of children and 21% of pensioners in London lived in households below 60% of the median deprivation level (national average of 29%) (Source: Defra, 2008). In 2006 13% of 16-18 year-olds were not in education, employment or training (Source: Defra, 2008). Out of 498 rough sleepers recorded in the UK during 2007, 248 were in London (Source: Defra, 2008). There are almost 250,000 people aged 80 or over living in London the population aged 60 and over is expected to increase by 9% between 2001 and 2021. (Source: GLA (2006)). 40.6% of disabled women and 45.6% of disabled men are in employment (Source: GLA, 2008). Approximately 50.6% of Londons population are female and 49.4% are male (nationally 51% female and 49% male). (Source: Focus on London 2008). London males earn on average 37% more than their female counterparts (Source: Focus on London 2008). In London 10% of people are estimated to be gay, lesbian or bisexual (Source: GLA, 2007).
Proposals seek to reduce the disparities in
Uncertainty:
development that exist between Inner and Outer London and can indirectly promote equality through greater access to jobs and services in Outer London. This is not considered to be significant.
None.
None.
Context: The relevant plans and programmes covering housing seek to provide more homes and a better mix of homes and create mixed communities. This should provide lower cost home ownership and thus widening eligibility to the housing market. There are also aims within the documents for more sustainable homes and to reduce homelessness. In London conventional housing supply has risen from 17,130 in 1999 to 27,290 in 2006/07 (Source: Focus on London 2008). In London in 2007/08 28,199 net additional homes were provided (Source: London Plan Annual Monitoring Report 5, 2009). In London in 2007-08 10,394 net affordable homes were provided (Source: Housing in London, 2008).
Page 64
Entec UK Limited

Objectives There are currently 84,000 empty homes in London (2.7% of total stock) (Source: Housing in London, 2008). The DCLG reported a fall in annual house prices in both London and the UK in Q1 2009. Annual house price inflation in London decreased to -14.0% in Q1 2009 from -7.9% in Q4 2008. Annual house price inflation in the UK decreased to -12.5% in Q1 2009 from -8.7% in Q4 2008 (Source: Londons Economy Today, Issue 82, June 2009). London has a very high percentage of developments using previously developed land. As London has limited land stock and already has around 95% of development on previously developed land, the trend of increasing use of brownfield sites is likely to stabilise at this high level. London has a trend of very high development density, although this is showing a moderate decline from a peak of around 85 dwellings per ha in 2003 (Source: DCLG, Land use change statistics).
Proposals which aim to influence the rate of

housing delivery or maximise delivery around the 2012 Olympic sites can positively contribute to housing.
Uncertainty:
None.
None.
Context: Relevant plans and programmes aim to provide long-term sustainable employment levels. In turn the documents aim to increase the skill base of the nations workforce. These skills are to be geared towards areas of the economy earmarked for growth. The relevant plans also aim to improve accessibility to the labour market. Annual employment growth in London turned negative in the fourth quarter of 2008 to -0.4 per cent from 0.5 per cent in the third quarter (Source: Londons Economic Outlook: Spring 2009). In January to March 2009 the unemployment rate in London was 8.2%, up 1.3 percentage points on the same period a year earlier (Source: ONS, 2009). Small and medium-sized enterprises account for 49% and large firms account for 51% of private sector employment in London (Source: Focus on London 2008). London has had a higher net business start up rate than the UK for nine of the past ten years (Source: Focus on London 2008). In the past 20 years 546,000 jobs have been created in the financial and business services while 292,000 jobs have been lost from manufacturing (Source: Mayor of London, 2008a). Londons annual employment growth decreased to -0.2% in Q4 2008 from a downwardly revised 0.7% in Q3 2008. Annual employment growth in the
Page 65
Entec UK Limited

Objectives rest of the UK decreased to -1.3% in Q4 2008 from a downwardly revised -0.5% in Q3 2008. (Source: Londons Economy Today, Issue 82, June 2009). Londons GDP is 160 billion a year its productivity is 27% higher than the rest of the rest of the country (Source: GLA, 2008). In 2007 24.6% of Londoners were economically inactive (over 2% higher than the UK average) (Source: Defra, 2008c). Employment in London is forecast to fall in 2009, 2010 and 2011 from 4.69 million in 2008 to 4.40 million by 2011. (Source: Londons Economic Outlook: Spring 2009).
The proposals can indirectly and positively

contribute to employment through creating new employment space for example in large-scale developments or maximising employment in town centres.
Uncertainty:
None.
None.
Page 66
Entec UK Limited

Objectives
Short term score: Minor positive Key Impacts: Medium term score: Minor positive Long term score: Minor positive
Supply of adequate employment space can

positively contribute to supporting future economic growth. Proposals to improve transport connectivity both within London and with neighbouring regions can support and effective and integrated environment for doing business.
Uncertainty:
The success of proposals in contributing to the
economy will ultimately be affected by wider macroeconomic factors affecting the global slowdown in economic activity..
None.
In London about 1.25 million people and 480,000 properties (15% of London) lie within identified flood risk zones. These areas are protected by flood defences (Source: GLA/Entec, 2009). The River Thames has a tidal range in excess of 7 metres on spring tides. 6,200ha and parts of 12 London boroughs are below the normal high tide
Page 67
Entec UK Limited

Objectives mark. The area that could potentially be affected by a storm surge covers 11 600ha and 20 London boroughs. The Thames Barrier and associated systems provide protection against tidal flooding. The present system of flood risk management for tidal flooding can continue to provide an acceptable level of risk management up to 2030. Beyond 2030 more actions may be needed (Source: Regional Flood Risk Appraisal (RFRA) for the London Plan Draft London Plan Implementation Report 2007). Surface water drainage networks are normally designed to cope with storms of a 1 in 20 year intensity. Many areas with large roof areas, at low points in the drainage network or that have suffered blockages in the surface water system have experienced surface water flooding (including rail stations and road network underpasses) (Source: Regional Flood Risk Appraisal (RFRA) for the London Plan Draft London Plan Implementation Report 2007).

objective.
None.
None.
Change and
Context: The Climate Change Act 2008 has set the target of an 80% cut in net UK carbon emission by 2050 compared to 1990 levels. This seeks to maintain the reliability of energy supplies; promote competitive markets to help sustainable economic growth and improved productivity; and ensure that every home is adequately and affordably heated throughout the UK. More specifically, the London Mayors Strategy sets out that London should aim to generate at least 665GWh of electricity and 280GWh of heat, from up to 40,000 renewable energy schemes by 2010. In 2003 the total carbon dioxide emissions for London were 43,665 Kilotonnes of carbon dioxide. The five non-CO2 greenhouse gases contribute the equivalent of approximately 2% of Londons total CO2 emission output. (Source: Focus on London 2008). London produces 8% of the UKs total CO2 emissions. Londons per capita CO2 emissions are 25% lower than the UK average (Source: Mayor of London (2007) Action Today to Protect Tomorrow The Mayors Climate Change Action Plan). Ground-based transport is responsible for 22% of Londons total CO2 emissions (excluding aviation) (Source: Mayor of London (2007) Action Today to Protect Tomorrow The Mayors Climate Change Action Plan). The principal transport sources of CO2 are: the London bus and London Underground networks (0.6 million tonnes of CO2 each per year); and taxis and private hire vehicles (0.3 million tonnes of CO2 each per year) (Source: TfL (2009) London Travel Report 2008 (unpublished) Mayor of London). The total energy consumption of London was 160,883 Gigawatt hours (GWh) in 2003 (2,120,261.5 GWh in UK in 2006), emitting a total of 43,665 Kilotonnes of carbon dioxide. (Source: Focus on London 2008). The projected economic and population growth forecasted for London will increase all of Londons CO2 emissions by 15%, from 43.6 million tonnes to an estimated 51 million tonnes per year by 2025 (excluding aviation emissions) (Mayor of London 2007). It is currently unclear what effect the
Page 68
Entec UK Limited

Objectives recent recession will have on these projections.
Proposals that support new developments can
Uncertainty:
contribute to increased energy efficiency in the longer term through compliance with relevant legislation to reduce emissions associated with new buildings.
None.
None.
Water Quality & Water Resources To protect and enhance Londons water bodies and the Blue Ribbon network
Context: The plans and programmes relating to water quality set standards for drinking water and the wider water environment. Further plans seek to improve water efficiency with a key target being to reduce the average amount of water used per person in the home to 130 litres each day by 2030. The programmes aim to reduce and manage the risks that floods pose to human health, the environment, cultural heritage and economic activity. The plans require Members States to review all watercourses and coastlines to assess the risk from flooding, to map the flood extent and the population and assets at risk in these areas. In 2007 76.2% of surface water within the Thames region was rated as being of good or better chemical quality (decrease from 80.5% in 2002) (Source: Environment Agency, 2007). Furthermore in 2007 64.5% of surface water within the Thames region was rated as being of good or better biological quality (decrease from 75.7% in 2002). (Source: Environment Agency, 2007). In 2008 about 55.5% of the total river length in the Thames region had either high or very high Nitrate concentrations (Source: Focus on London 2008). 80% of Londons water comes from the Thames and the River Lee, and the remaining 20% comes from Londons subterranean aquifer (all mostly fed by winter rainfall) (Source: Focus on London 2008). Londoners consume approximately 168 litres of water per day (national average of 150 litres per person per day) (Source: GLA/Entec, 2009). Approximately a quarter of all water distributed in the mains network is lost to leakage (Source: GLA/Entec, 2009). Rivers and canals in London are subject to a number of pressures including pollution, low flows, habitat degradation and recreation (Source: Focus on London 2008).
Page 69
Entec UK Limited

Objectives
Key Impacts:
Proposals supporting new large scale housing
Uncertainty:
and employment developments may result in long term positive effects through reducing per capita water consumption through altering water usage in new buildings.
None.
None.
Context: Relevant plans and programmes establish a framework for the management of waste across the European Community; priority is given to waste prevention, re-use and recovery of waste; prohibition of the uncontrolled disposal of waste; establishment of an integrated network of disposal installations; preparation of waste management plans; ensuring that the cost of disposal is borne by the waste holder; ensuring that waste carriers are registered; ensuring that waste is recovered or disposed of without endangering human health. This is in light of the waste hierarchy and initiatives filtering down to the local level to shift waste management up it. Plans on a regional level in particular aim to change individual lifestyle habits and promote advanced waste technologies. London produces around 7 million tonnes of C&I waste per year (as compared to approximately 4 million tonnes of municipal waste). Approximately 3 million tonnes of this C&I waste goes to landfill or incineration within, and outside London (Source: London Commercial Waste and Recycling Programme, 2008). The amount of household waste collected in England in 2007-8 was 25.3 million tonnes, and 34.5% of this was recycled or composted (Source: Defra, Environment in your Pocket Statistics, 2008). In 2006/07, London produced the second highest amount of municipal waste in England, over 4.2 million tonnes, of which just over 80% was from households. The amount of waste per household was just above average at 1.33 tonnes compared with 1.36 tonnes for England as a whole (Source: Focus on London 2008). In 2006/07, 23% of Londons household municipal waste was recycled; 57% of Londons municipal waste was sent to landfill (the third highest percentage in England); and London incinerated more municipal waste than any other region (929,000 tonnes), (Source: Focus on London 2008). In 2007/08 Londons municipal waste arisings were 4,149 thousand tonnes and household arisings were 3,342 thousand tonnes (Source: Capital Waste Facts).
Short term score: Minor negative Key Impacts:
Medium term score: Minor negative
Long term score: Minor negative
There may be negative effects arising from

increased construction waste from the development of large-scale housing and
Uncertainty:
None.
None.
Page 70
Entec UK Limited

Objectives
employment schemes. This effect will likely be covered by planning conditions and is not considered to be significant.
and
Context: The overall aim of the plans and programmes relating to traffic and transport is to improve the quality and effectiveness of transport infrastructure in terms of efficiency, pollution and social justice. The plans seek to strike a balance between the growing economy and the increasing demand for travel, and also achieving environmental objectives. Ultimately therefore the goal is to improve the quality and efficiency of transport in Europe to supplement the economy. Further plans seek to support targets for the improvement of air quality and the reduction of greenhouse gas emissions by providing sustainable transport alternative and promoting health. In the UK this particularly relates to improving rail infrastructure. Throughout the UK a number of programmes have established indicators and baselines to monitor the performance of transport. In 2006/2007 9% of Londoners found it very or fairly difficult to get to a corner shop or supermarket (2% lower than the national average) (Source: Defra, 2008). In 2006/2007 10% of Londoners found it very or fairly difficult to get to a post office (in line with the national average) (Source: Defra, 2008). In 2006/2007 22% of Londoners found it very or fairly difficult to get to a doctor or hospital (6% lower than the national average) (Source: Defra, 2008). Between 2000 and 2009, total distance travelled in London has increased by an estimated 6%. Over this period the total number of trips has increased, by an estimated 5%. Therefore distance travelled per person has been broadly constant after taking account of increased population and changes to in commuters and visitors (Source: TfL, Travel in London, 2009). In 2007 23.8 million trips were made in, to, or from London on an average day, 33% of these trips were by public transport (Source: TfL, Travel in London, 2009). In 2006, there was the following breakdown in mode of travel in London: 43% by car, 13% by bus or tram, 9% by Underground, 8% by rail, 2% by cycle and 24% were on foot (Source: Focus on London, 2008). In London between 2001 and 2007 there was a 22% increase in public transport journeys per head of population, (and a 9% decrease in car journeys per head) (Source: Focus on London 2008). In London 31% of trips are for shopping and personal business, 16% for commuting, and 26% for leisure (Source: Focus on London 2008). In 2007/2008 the mode of travel for London residents was: 37.9% by car, 1.3% by taxi, 0.6% by motorcycle, 14.5% by bus or tram, 7.6% by Underground and DLR, 4.8% by rail, 2% by cycle and 31.4% by foot (nationally 63% of journeys are by car) (Source: TfL, 2009 London Travel Report 2008). The number of bus journeys in London in 2006/2007 was 45% higher than in 1999/2000 (Source: GLA, 2008). Between 2000 and 2006 there was an 83% increase in the number of people cycling (Source: GLA (2008)). However, this still only accounts for 2% of all travel in London (Source: TfL, 2009). Whilst walking currently accounts for 21% of Londoners journeys (Source: GLA, 2008). There has been a 35% reduction in the number of road casualties since 2000. In 2006 33% of those killed or injured in road casualties were
Page 71
Entec UK Limited

Objectives pedestrians (Source: GLA, 2008). In London car use is on a declining trend, whilst public transport and cycle use is on an increasing trend.
Proposals that seek to improve development in
Uncertainty:
key centres in Outer London will improve accessibility to key services and jobs. Improvements to the transport system will contribute to greater accessibility within London.
None.
None.
Built and Historic Environment To enhance and protect the existing built environment (including the architectural distinctiveness, townscape/landscape and archaeological heritage) and landscapes, and ensure new buildings and spaces are appropriately designed.
Context: The plans and programmes relating to cultural heritage have the overall aim of protecting, conserving and transmitting archaeology and heritage to future generations. They aim to place the historic environment at the heart of the planning system and to implement a unified heritage protection system that will be easier to understand and use, more efficient, accountable and transparent and that will maximise opportunities for public inclusion and involvement. Across the UK the policies explain how, the development plan and development control systems, give weight to archaeology and heritage in planning decisions and planning conditions. In 2008 London had 152 Scheduled Ancient Monuments (19,446 in England), 121 of these were considered at risk (Source: English Heritage). In 2008 London had 18,461 listed buildings (372,905 in England). This breaks down to 582 Grade 1, 1,321 Grade 11* and 16,558 Grade 11 listed buildings entries, 487 of which were considered at risk (Source: English Heritage). In 2008 London had 148 Registered Parks and Gardens (Source: English Heritage). London has one historic battlefield at Banet (Source: English Heritage). London has 4 of the UKs 28 World Heritage Sites (Source: English Heritage). In 2008 London had 955 conservation areas (Source: English Heritage). The London Historic Parks & Gardens Trust Inventory of Historic Green Spaces includes nearly 2,000 sites (Source: English Heritage).
Regeneration proposals could impact the built

environment but there is a focus on improved design of diverse and attractive
None.
None.
Page 72
Entec UK Limited

Objectives
neighbourhoods and the overall effect is considered to be neutral.
Liveability Place
and
Context: The plans and programmes relating to population seek to provide strong, balanced and prosperous communities. This involves narrowing the gap between the most deprived neighbourhoods and the rest of the country and giving local communities more influence and power to improve their lives. A key element of achieving such aims is to ensure equality of opportunity for all Londons population and in turn provide sustainable lifestyles. Furthermore a number of plans and programmes relating to community safety seek to manage health and safety in a number of areas by reducing both general crime and anti-social behaviour. This in particular involves providing adequate health and safety information and managing health and safety risks. Further the plans aim to provide a European system of technical standards and certification for rail and road safety. In 2006/07 the total recorded crime rate in London was 124 offences per 1,000 population (national average of 100). The London crime rate has fallen from 145 in 2003/04 (Source: Focus on London 2008). In 2006/07 there was an overall rate of detection of recorded crime of 21% (lowest of UK regions) (Source: Focus on London 2008). In 2005/2006 per 100,000 of the population of London there were : 2,668 violent crimes against the person (1,971 on average in England and Wales) 139 sexual offences (115 on average in England and Wales) 1,398 burglaries (1,214 on average in England and Wales) 610 robberies (181 on average in England and Wales) 5,451 thefts/handling stolen goods (3,733 on average in England and Wales) 1,858 thefts from vehicles (1,351 on average in England and Wales) 1,651 criminal damages (2,209 on average in England and Wales) 726 drugs and other offences (471 on average in England and Wales) (Source: ONS, 2007 Focus on London).
Page 73
Entec UK Limited

Objectives
Key Impacts:
Proposals support the creation of long term
Uncertainty:
sustainable and mixed communities through increased provision of services and jobs and through the design of attractive and diverse neighbourhoods.
None.
None.
Context: The plans and programmes relating to landscape aim to promote landscape protection, management and planning, and to organise European wide co-operation on landscape issues. National policy seeks to retain and provide well-designed open spaces of high quality and promote access to the countryside. Notably this ties in with maintaining biodiversity and habitats in the UK. Development plans within the UK set out how landscape can be regarded as a material consideration within development decisions. London covers an area of 1,572km2 (1.2% of England) (Source: English Heritage). Londons designation of Metropolitan Open Land (MOL) protects strategically important open spaces within the built environment, such as Richmond Park, Wimbledon Common, Hampstead Heath, Hackney Marshes, Oxleas Wood, Hyde Park and Mitcham Common (Source: Greener London, 2007). Green belt forms 22% of the area within the Greater London boundary, whilst 9.6% of Greater London is Metropolitan Open Land (Source: Greener London (2007)). In 2008 London had 148 Registered Parks and Gardens (just over 9% of the total for England) (Source: English Heritage). London has over 600 Garden Squares, of which 461 are protected by the London Squares Preservation Act 1931 (Source: English Heritage). London has 8 Royal Parks, numerous public parks and approximately122 heaths, commons and greens (Source: English Heritage). London has 68km of the River Thames and 80km of canal network, both bordered by numerous historic assets and historic areas and open spaces.(Source: English Heritage). Thirty thousand Londoners rent allotments to grow vegetables and fruit and 14% of households grow vegetables in their garden. There is a shortage of allotment sites in inner London (Source: Greener London, 2007). London contains approximately 7,000 hectares of woodland, covering approximately 4.6% of the total land area, a third of which is classified as ancient forest (Source: Natural England, 2008).
Page 74
Entec UK Limited

Objectives
Key Impacts:
Open space may be supported through the
Uncertainty:
development of town centres although the extent of this would be determined at an individual project level. The 2012 Olympic proposals and proposals to create diverse and attractive neighbourhoods will contribute to the enhancement of open space.
There is some uncertainty at this stage relating to

the extent of open space that will be created in the development of strategic town centres.
None.
Context: The plans and programmes relating to air quality establish a framework for the monitoring and limiting of pollutants. The Air Quality Strategy (The Air Quality Strategy for England, Scotland, Wales and Northern Ireland (2007)) sets national air quality targets for nine air pollutants. Objectives for seven of the air pollutants have been included in national air quality regulations for the purpose of local air quality management, with local authorities being required to work towards the objectives. There is also a system of Pollution Prevention and Control to improve air quality through the regulation of industrial facilities. This system incorporates specific EU requirements in respect of large combustion plants, waste incineration plants and activities emitting solvents. Planning policies across the UK stipulate that Air Quality is capable of being a material planning consideration. The Mayors Air Quality Strategy seeks to minimise the adverse effects of air pollution on human health and in turn improve quality of life in the city. London air pollution concentrations exceeded the UK Air Quality Strategy Objective (AQS) and EU Limit Values during 2006 and 2007 (Source: London Air Quality Network, Report). In London between 1997 and 2008, PM10 concentrations decreased by 26%; NOx concentrations decreased by around 36%; NO2 concentrations decreased by 13%; O3 concentrations increased by 31%; and CO concentrations decreased by 59%; and SO2 concentrations decreased by 77% (Source: Focus on London 2008). All London Boroughs have declared, all or in part, as Air Quality Management Areas (AQMAs). (75% of London (1,175 km2) was covered by AQMAs in April 2007) (Source: Greener London, 2007). London currently meets EU limits for carbon monoxide (CO) and sulphur dioxide (SO2), but fails the World Health Organisation levels of SO2. NO2 is a widespread problem that affects large areas of central and inner London, parts of suburban London and all busy roads. PM10 is more of a localised problem to the busiest roads in London. Road transport, and in particular older diesel vehicles, are the main cause of air pollution in London. 30% of all cars registered in 2007 were diesel, compared with eight per cent in 1993. Although newer diesels have lower emissions than the most polluting old vehicles and emit less CO2, they still emit much higher levels of PM10 and NO2 than petrol vehicles. In Greater London, the total Oxides of nitrogen (NO2 and NO) emissions from all sources are expected to fall to 53,908 tonnes by 2010 (from 67,179 tonnes in 2003). The reductions are attributed to road transport and gas sources (Source: Mayor of London).
Page 75
Entec UK Limited

Objectives The Mayor has set a target for London to stabilise its emissions at 60% below 1990 levels by 2025 (Source: Mayor of London).
?/+
?/+
?/+
Proposals that encourage greater use of

walking, cycling and usage of public transport can contribute to improvements in local air quality.
Uncertainty:
The extent of effects depends on town centre
design that successfully reduces vehicle usage and will be location specific.
None.
Page 76
Entec UK Limited
Appendix H Quality Assurance Checklist

Objectives and Context
The plans purpose and objectives are made clear. Sustainability issues, including international and EC objectives, are considered in developing objectives and targets. Section 2 Sustainability issues relevant to London are identified in Sections 2 and 3. International, European, UK and regional objectives and targets have been identified in from the Plans and programmes listed in Appendix B and in the Scoping Report. Section 3.4 presents the objectives.
SEA Objectives are clearly set out and linked to indicators and targets where appropriate. Links to other related plans, programmes and policies are identified and explained.
Appendix B identifies a number of relevant plans and programmes.
Scoping
The environmental consultation bodies are consulted in appropriate ways and at appropriate times on the content and scope of the Scoping Report. The SEA focuses on significant issues. The consultation on the Scoping Report ran for 5 weeks from 8th August 2009 to 12th September 2009.
Significant issues were identified in the Scoping Report and were reiterated in Section 3.4 of this SA Report. These were stated throughout the Scoping Report where appropriate and are presented in Section 3.6 of this SA Report. These are stated in the Scoping Report where appropriate and in Section 3.1 of the SA Report.
Technical, procedural and other difficulties encountered are discussed; assumptions and uncertainties are made explicit. Reasons are given for eliminating issues from further consideration.
Alternatives
Realistic alternatives are considered for key issues and the reasons for choosing them are documented. Alternatives include do minimum and/or business as usual scenarios wherever relevant. The environmental effects (both adverse and beneficial) of each alternative are identified and compared. Inconsistencies between the alternatives and other relevant plans, programmes or policies are identified and explained. Reasons are given for the selection or elimination of alternatives. Alternatives are identified in Section 2.4.
These were considered in Section 2.4.
These are included in Section 4.
Refer to Section 2.4, 4 and Appendix B.
These are presented in Section 2.4 and 4.
Appendix H 1 of 1
October 2009

Baseline Information
Relevant aspects of the current state of the environment and their likely evolution without the plan are described. Characteristics of areas likely to be significantly affected are described, including areas wider than the physical boundary of the plan area where it is likely to be affected by the plan where practical. Any difficulties, such as deficiencies in information or methods, are explained. This is set out in Section 3.3, Section 4 and Appendix G.
This is set out in Section 3 5.
Technical difficulties are set out in Section 3.6 and are stated through the SA Report where appropriate.
Prediction and Evaluation of Significant Environmental Effects

Effects identified include the types listed in the Directive (biodiversity, population, human health, fauna, flora, soil, water, air, climatic factors, material assets, cultural heritage and landscape) as relevant; other likely environmental effects are also covered as appropriate. Both positive and negative effects are considered and the duration of effects (short, medium or long term) is addressed. Likely secondary, cumulative and synergistic effects are identified where practicable. Inter-relationships between effects are considered where practicable. The prediction and evaluation of effects makes use of relevant accepted standards, regulations and thresholds. Methods used to evaluate the effects are described. Sections 3 & 4 and Appendix G.
Sections 4 & 5 and Appendix G.
These are provided in Sections 4.9.
These are provided in Sections 3-5. These are considered/referenced within this SA Report where appropriate and are noted in Section 3. The methodology is set out in Section 3, and within the Scoping Report.
Mitigation Measures
Measures envisaged to prevent, reduce and offset any significant adverse effects of implementing the plan or programme are indicated. Issues to be taken into account in project consents are identified. These are set out throughout Section 4 and 5.
These are considered in Sections 4 and 5 where relevant.
Environmental Report
Is clear and concise in its layout and presentation Uses simple, clear language and avoids or explains technical terms. The purpose of the SA Report is set out in Section 1.2. Abbreviations have been presented in Appendix A and technical terms are explained throughout. A non-technical summary has also been prepared at the front of the document. Figures and tables have been used where appropriate. This is presented in Section 3. This is set out in Section 1.5 and 1.6.
Uses maps and other illustrations where appropriate. Explains the methodology used. Explains who was consulted and methods of consultation where used.
Appendix H 2 of 2
October 2009

Identifies sources of information, including expert judgement and matters of opinion. Contains a non-technical summary covering the overall approach to the SEA, the objectives of the plan, the main options considered and any changes to the plan resulting from the SEA. This is covered in Section 3.6.
An executive summary is provided at the front of the document.
Consultation
The SEA is consulted on as an integral part of the plan-making process. Consultation has already taken place on the Scoping Report in August and September 2009. Consultation of the SA Report will take place for a period of 12 weeks. Stakeholders have been kept engaged throughout the reports preparation and comments have been sought during designated consultation periods and workshops.
Consultation Bodies and the public likely to be affected by, or having an interest in, the plan or programme are consulted in ways and at times which give them an early and effective opportunity within appropriate timeframes to express their opinions on the draft plan and Environmental Report.
Decision-making and Information on the Decision

The Environmental Report (SA Report) and the opinions of those consulted are taken into account in finalising and adopting the plan or programme. An explanation is given of how they have been taken into account. This will be included in the Post Adoption Statement (to be issued following consultation).
This will be included in the Post Adoption Statement (to be issued following consultation). This will be included in the Post Adoption Statement (to be issued following consultation).
Reasons are given for choosing the plan or programme as adopted in light of other reasonable alternatives considered.
Monitoring Measures
Measures proposed for monitoring are clear, practicable and linked to the indicators and objectives used in the SEA. Monitoring is used, where appropriate, during implementation of the plan or programme, to make good deficiencies in baseline information in the SEA. Monitoring enables unforeseen adverse effects to be identified at an early stage (these effects may include predictions which prove to be incorrect). Proposals are made for action in response to significant adverse effects. These are presented in Section 5.2.
Details of this are provided in Section 5.2.
Details of this are provided in Section 5.2.
These are considered in Section 5. They will also be set out in the Post Adoption Statement (to be issued following consultation).
Appendix H 3 of 3
October 2009

London Economic Development Sustainability Appraisal

Transféré par

Informations du document

Description originale:

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

London Economic Development Sustainability Appraisal

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

London Development Agency Sustainability Appraisal of Mayor's Revised Economic Development Strategy

Sustainability Appraisal Report October 2009

Creating the environment for business

Copyright and Non-Disclosure Notice

Entec UK Limited October 2009

Creating the environment for business

What is the Economic Development Strategy?

Entec UK Limited October 2009

Creating the environment for business

What is a Sustainability Appraisal?

Entec UK Limited October 2009

Creating the environment for business

Figure NTS.1 Overview of the Sustainability Appraisal Process

Scoping Report (August 2009)

Stage C: Reporting Preparing the Sustainability Appraisal Report

Sustainability Appraisal Report (October 2009)

Stage D: Consultation Consulting on the draft revised EDS and SA Reports

Post Adoption Statements (Early 2010)

Entec UK Limited October 2009

Creating the environment for business

What Approach was Taken to the Appraisal?

Entec UK Limited October 2009

Creating the environment for business

What Alternatives for Implementing the EDS were Identified?

Entec UK Limited October 2009

Creating the environment for business

Table NTS 2: Sustainability Theme

Appraisal of Options Option 1: A Transition to Low Carbon Economy (LCE) Strategy

Option 2: Economic Strategy with significant LCE proposals

Option 3: Continuation of policies and proposals within existing EDS

Entec UK Limited October 2009

Creating the environment for business

Option 1: A Transition to Low Carbon Economy (LCE) Strategy

Option 2: Economic Strategy with significant LCE proposals

Option 3: Continuation of policies and proposals within existing EDS

What were the Key Significant Effects?

Entec UK Limited October 2009

Creating the environment for business

Comment, Query or Recommendation

More in second draft

Proposal has been modified, but Mayor has a legitimate interest

Better in next draft

Agree: amended in next draft

In new draft & MTS Yes in new draft

Yes in new draft

See new draft which has made substantial additions

Agree in new draft

Entec UK Limited October 2009

Creating the environment for business Appraisal of Draft Revised EDS

Chapter 1: London: World Capital of Business

Entec UK Limited October 2009

Creating the environment for business

Entec UK Limited October 2009

Creating the environment for business

Chapter 3: Making the Transition to a Low-carbon Economy

Entec UK Limited October 2009

Creating the environment for business

Chapter 4: Extending Opportunity to all Londoners

Entec UK Limited October 2009

Creating the environment for business

Entec UK Limited October 2009

Creating the environment for business

Entec UK Limited October 2009